Lexicon Rv 8 Owner S Manual

RV-8 to the manual 925c3041-409a-4577-bb1f-3a0a8e8a3ef5

2014-07-06

: Lexicon Lexicon-Rv-8-Owner-S-Manual lexicon-rv-8-owner-s-manual lexicon pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 262

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

RV-8 Receiver
User Guide

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1.

Read these instructions.

Keep these instructions.

Heed all warnings.

Follow all instructions.

Do not use this apparatus near water.

Clean only with a dry cloth.

Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or another apparatus
(including amplifiers) that produces heat.

Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two
blades with one wider than the other. A groundingtype plug has two blades and a third grounding
prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not
fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience
receptacles, and the point where they exit from
the apparatus.
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of fire or electric
shock, do not expose this apparatus to
rain or moisture. Do not place objects
containing liquid, such as vases, on this
apparatus.

12. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or
table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the
apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when
moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid
injury from tip-over.

13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or
when unused for long periods of time.
14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been
damaged in any way, such as when a power-supply
cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or
objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not
operate normally, or has been dropped.
•

•

Refer to the manufacturer’s operating instructions
for power requirements. Be advised that different
operating voltages may require the use of different
line cord and/or attachment plug.
Do not install the unit in an unventilated rack, or
directly above heat-producing equipment such as
power amplifiers. Observe the maximum ambient
operating temperature listed in the product specification.

•

Never attach audio power amplifier outputs directly
to any of the unit’s connectors.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses, and radiates radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on. The user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more
of the following measures:
•

Re-orient or relocate the receiving antenna.

•

Increase the separation between the equipment
and the receiver.

•

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
different from that to which the receiver is connected.

•

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby,” “Pro Logic,” “Surround EX,” and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Lexicon Inc.
3 Oak Park
Bedford, MA 01730-1413 USA
Tel
781-280-0300
Fax
781-280-0490
www.harmanspecialtygroup.com
Customer Service
Telephone:
781-280-0300
Sales Fax:
781-280-0495
Service Fax:
781-280-0499

Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. U.S. Pat. No’s 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;
6,226,616; 6,487,535 and other U.S. and world-wide patents issued and pending. DTS, DTS-ES, Neo:6, and DTS 96/24 are
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2003 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Manufactured under license from THX Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703 and/or 5,222,059. European patent number
0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Ultra2 and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of THX Ltd. Surround EX
is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Used under authorization.
SACD is a trademark of Sony Electronics, Inc.
SHARC is a Trademark of Analog Devices, Inc.
Hammerhead is a trademark of Analog Devices, Inc.
Lexicon, Logic 7 and the L7 logo are registered trademarks of Harman International Industries, Inc. U.S. Patent Nos. D454,553;
D454,860; 5,796,844; 5,870,480 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. Lexicon LIVE is a trademark of Harman International Industries, Inc.
© 2006 Harman International Industries, Incorporated. All rights reserved.

Part No. 070-15838 | Rev 1 | 01/06

This document should not be construed as a commitment on the part of Harman Specialty Group. The information it contains is
subject to change without notice. Harman Specialty Group assumes no responsibility for errors that may appear within this
document.

Introduction

Lexicon

DOCUMENTATION CONVENTIONS
This document contains general safety, installation and operation instructions for the RV-8 Receiver. It is important to read this user guide before
attempting to use the product. Pay particular attention to safety instructions.
The following symbols are used in the document:
Appears on the component to indicate the presence of uninsulated, dangerous voltage inside
the enclosure – voltage that may be sufficient to
constitute a risk of shock.
Appears on the component to indicate important operating and maintenance instructions in
the accompanying literature.

WARNING

Calls attention to a procedure, practice, condition or the like that, if not correctly performed
or adhered to, could result in injury or death.

CAUTION!

Calls attention to a procedure, practice, condition or the like that, if not correctly performed
or adhered to, could result in damage or
destruction to part or all of the product.

Note:

Calls attention to information that is essential to
highlight.

SETUP

INPUTS

DVD1

NAME

EDIT INPUT NAME

Represents a menu path. The menu items in gray boxes must be
selected with the remote control Menu
arrow to access the
menu or menu item in the black box. For example, the SETUP,
INPUTS, and DVD1 menu items must be selected to open the
DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu.
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is used here as an example and will
continue to be used as an example throughout this document.
Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a
menu path, any other input may be substituted.

This document uses the term DTS(-ES) to indicate that DTS-ES encoding may or may not be present in the input source.

Introduction

RV-8

Table of Contents
Documentation Conventions........................................................ ii

Getting Started
About the RV-8.......................................................................... 1-2
Highlights ............................................................................. 1-4
Product Registration .................................................................. 1-5
Installation Considerations......................................................... 1-5
Remote Control Battery Installation ........................................... 1-6

Basic Operation
Front-Panel Overview ................................................................ 2-2
Rear-Panel Overview.................................................................. 2-6
Tuner Overview....................................................................... 2-10
Selecting a Station .............................................................. 2-10
Direct Station Access ........................................................... 2-10
Tune/Seek Access ................................................................ 2-10
Scan Mode .......................................................................... 2-11
Loading Presets ................................................................... 2-11
Saving Presets ..................................................................... 2-11
Naming Presets ................................................................... 2-11
Editing Presets ..................................................................... 2-12
Autoload ............................................................................. 2-12
Amplifier Overview.................................................................. 2-13
Amplifier Channel Status ..................................................... 2-13
Making Connections With the Amplifier Output .................. 2-13
Headphone Overview.............................................................. 2-14
Remote Control Overview ....................................................... 2-14
Operation Considerations .................................................... 2-14
MAIN Menu ........................................................................ 2-15
Menu Navigation ................................................................ 2-15
Menu Item Selection ........................................................... 2-15
Remote Control Buttons ...................................................... 2-17

Command Matrix ............................................................... 2-18
Understanding the Zones ........................................................ 2-28
Two-Line Status....................................................................... 2-28
STATUS Menus........................................................................ 2-29
STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions ................................ 2-34
STATUS Menu Level Meters..................................................... 2-35

Setup
Setup ........................................................................................ 3-2
Input Setup ............................................................................... 3-4
Changing Input Names ......................................................... 3-5
Assigning Audio and Video Input Connectors ........................ 3-7
Selecting Preferred Listening Modes .................................... 3-12
Configuring Advanced Input Settings .................................. 3-17
INPUT SELECT Parameter Settings ....................................... 3-19
ZONE2 in Parameter Settings .............................................. 3-22
Speaker Setup ......................................................................... 3-25
Setting Crossover Points ...................................................... 3-25
Speaker Setup Parameters ................................................... 3-29
Automatic Calibration ......................................................... 3-36
Manual Calibration ............................................................. 3-53
I/O Config............................................................................... 3-60
Display Setup .......................................................................... 3-63
On-Screen Display Setup ..................................................... 3-64
Front-panel Display Setup ................................................... 3-66
Volume Control Setup............................................................. 3-68
Trigger Setup .......................................................................... 3-70
Tuner Setup ............................................................................ 3-72
Tuner Region Band Limit And Increments ........................... 3-73
Lock Options........................................................................... 3-79
LIVE! CALIBRATION ................................................................. 3-80

iii

Introduction
Audio Controls

Lexicon
Restoring Factory-Default Settings .............................................7-4

Audio Controls ..........................................................................4-2

Appendix A
Tuner Presets
Tuner Presets .............................................................................5-2

Specifications ............................................................................A-2
Declaration of Conformity .........................................................A-4

Mode Adjust

Appendix B

Mode Adjust..............................................................................6-2
Listening Mode Activation .........................................................6-2
Preferred Listening Mode Selection ........................................ 6-3
MODE
and
BUTTONS ................................................... 6-3
Listening MODE SELECTION BUTTONS ................................. 6-3
Listening Mode Descriptions......................................................6-4
Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions ......6-39
Mode – Parameter Relationships ..............................................6-47

Menu Tree.................................................................................B-2

Appendix C
Remote Control Programming.................................................. C-2
Device Activation ...................................................................C-2
Macro Operations .................................................................C-3
Remote Programming Overview ............................................C-4
Programming Macro Buttons ..............................................C-10
Three-digit Preprogrammed Codes......................................... C-18

Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Troubleshooting ........................................................................7-2
Routine Maintenance.................................................................7-4

Appendix D
Installation Worksheet .............................................................. D-2

1
Getting Started
About the RV-8........................................................................... 1-2
Highlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Product Registration ................................................................... 1-5
Installation Considerations.......................................................... 1-5
Remote Control Battery Installation ............................................ 1-6

Getting Started

Lexicon

ABOUT THE RV-8
Thank you for purchasing the RV-8 Receiver, an 8-channel audio
and video control center with independent zone monitoring that
provides control of audio and video source selection in three zones
at the same time. The RV-8 includes eight configurable inputs, each
of which can be assigned to its built-in tuner, eight digital audio,
eight analog audio, phono, five composite video, five S-Video or
three component video input connectors. The analog connectors
can be configured for up to two 5.1-channel sources.
The RV-8 features an integrated 7-channel power amplifier that is
designed to achieve high levels of power and performance.
Equipped with a toroidal power transformer, the amplifier also
provides thermal and DC protection.
The RV-8 AM/FM stereo radio tuner features four tuning regions,
allows for the automatic or manual storing of up to 40 preset
stations, can receive elements of the Radio Data System (RDS)
broadcasts, and is fully configurable for ease of operation. The RV-8
also includes a phono input.
Inside and out, the RV-8 is designed for possible future developments. The rear panel houses one RS-232 connector capable of
performing configuration downloads and flash memory software
upgrades, and another capable of supporting future developments.
The rear panel also includes one removable access panel to accommodate connectors for emerging technologies.
More than just an audio and video control center, the RV-8 features
the latest version of Lexicon’s critically acclaimed Logic 7 ®
decoding, which creates 7.1-channel output from stereo, and
5.1-and 6.1-channel sources. Unlike other decoders, Logic 7 is
compatible with all input sources and requires no special encoding.
Because the improvement it provides is clearly audible, Logic 7

1-2

decoding is widely regarded as the finest available. A Logic
7-encoded downmix of multichannel source material is available
when using the Headphone listening mode. If a stereo source is
present, the HEADPHONE L7 listening mode processes it using
LOGIC7, then uses Head Related Transfer Functions to create a
headphone output that introduces a subtle sense of surround
sound, while preserving the original stereo image.
In addition to Logic 7, the RV-8 offers Dolby Digital Surround EX,
Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Pro Logic, DTS 96/24, DTS neo:6,
DTS-ES, THX Ultra2 and THX Surround EX decoding. THX Ultra2
certification guarantees that the RV-8 meets the highest THX®
specifications.
T h e R V- 8 a l s o o f f e r s L I V E ! ( L e x i c o n I n t e l l i g e n t Va r i a b l e
Environment), designed to transform the way your listening room
sounds with the live sound that is created within the room by the
occupants of the room. LIVE! does not (nor is it meant to) work with
prerecorded material. LIVE! provides a realistic illusion of a larger,
more reverberant listening space–ideal for musicians wishing to
practice or perform with the sound of a larger venue.
LIVE! is a unique, sophisticated reverberation system that uses a
combination of microphones and digital signal processing (DSP) to
enhance a room’s acoustics and create the illusion of a much larger
space. When you engage in normal conversation, it seems as if you
are in a large room. When you practice or perform with a musical
instrument, it seems as if you are in a concert hall. Choose from one
of three customizable presets to create an ambience to liven up a
party or amaze your friends.
With two floating-point Hammerhead™ digital signal processing
(DSP) engines, the RV-8 boasts enormous processing power. These

RV-8
powerful processors perform custom Lexicon processing such as
Logic 7 decoding, bass enhancement, dialogue enhancement, auto
azimuth, five-speaker enhancement, bass management, highprecision digital crossovers and audio controls. These features are
available at sample rates of up to 96kHz, with 24-bit resolution to
retain top performance from all sources. In addition, a third DSP
engine is dedicated to decoding multichannel compressed audio
sources.
The RV-8 is one of the most advanced audio and video control
centers available. High-precision 24-bit/96kHz A/D converters can
be used to convert stereo analog audio input signals to digital
signals, allowing the RV-8 to provide the benefits of precise digital
signal processing without sacrificing signal integrity. 24-bit/192kHZ
D/A converters are available for all output channels. Alternatively,
5.1-channel and stereo analog signals can bypass A/D conversion
and internal processing, following a pure signal path directly to the
output connectors.
Digital audio input signals are processed through a two-stage phase
lock loop for extremely low intrinsic jitter and high rejection.
Lexicon’s proprietary auto azimuth technology corrects timing and

Getting Started
level imbalances in stereo sources, ensuring exceptionally accurate
playback of surround-encoded sources. A digital audio passthrough output is available for recording digital signals with a CD
recorder or a similar component.
Complementing its audio performance, the RV-8 features broadcastquality video switchers. An ultrawide-bandwidth component video
switcher accepts analog component or RGB video signals, while a
composite and S-Video switcher accepts high-quality NTSC, PAL or
SECAM video signals. Composite and S-Video sources can be
converted to 480i NTSC (576i PAL) component video. The component
video switcher can pass high-definition TV (HDTV) signals and
standard-definition (SD) TV signals. Both switchers are designed to
pass video signals without alteration or degradation.
Built to professional standards, the RV-8 is designed to serve as the
control center in any high-quality home theater. Even the most
demanding enthusiast will be impressed with its unique combination
of power, performance, flexibility and technological sophistication.
With extensive expansion capabilities, the RV-8 represents a solid
investment that will retain its value in the face of rapidly emerging
technologies.

1-3

Getting Started

Lexicon

HIGHLIGHTS
•

Eight channels

•

Eight configurable inputs

•

Three independent zones

•

Integrated 7-channel amplifier with
thermal and DC protection and toroidal
power transformer

•

Compatible with 2Ω speaker
impedances

•

Four S/PDIF coaxial and four S/PDIF
optical (Toslink) digital audio input
connectors

•

One S/PDIF coaxial and one S/PDIF
optical (Toslink) digital audio output
connectors

•

LIVE! (Lexicon Intelligent Variable
Environment)

•

Dolby Digital Surround EX, Dolby Pro
Logic IIx, and Dolby Pro Logic decoding

•

DTS 96/24, DTS NEO:6, and DTS-ES
(discrete and matrix) decoding

•

24-Bit/192kHz D/A converters for all
audio channels

•

THX Ultra2 and THX Surround EX
decoding

•

Two sets of analog A/V Zone 2 outputs;
one fixed, one variable

•

THX Ultra2 certification

One set of analog Zone 3 outputs,
variable level

•

RS-232 control

•

Two trigger output connectors

•

AM/FM stereo radio tuner

•

RDS

•

Phono input with 2-channel analog
bypass path

•

Broadcast-quality video switching

•

Rear-panel IR input connector

•

Up to two 5.1-channel analog audio input
connectors

•

Video up conversion from S-video/
composite to component video

•

Two microphone input connectors

•

Two internal expansion slots

•

Analog bypass option for 5.1 analog
stereo audio input connectors

•

Automatic and manual calibration of
speaker distances and output levels

•

Removable access panel

•

Auto switching between digital and
analog audio input connectors

•

Three component video input
connectors with full HDTV compatibility

•

Flash memory software upgrade
capabilities

•

Headphone output with LOGIC7
processing

•

Five composite video input connectors

•

Optional 19-inch rack-mount kit

•

Five S-Video input connectors

•

Two 32-bit DSP engines for custom
processing

IR preprogrammed/learning remote
control with LCD display

•

One component video output

•

Maximum volume level

Separate DSP engine for decoding
compressed audio sources

•

Logic 7 decoding

•

Two 32-bit DSP engines

•
•

1-4

Getting Started

RV-8

PRODUCT REGISTRATION
Please register the RV-8 Receiver within 15 days of purchase.
Register online at www.lexicon.com or complete and return the
product registration card attached to the back cover of this user
guide. Retain the sales receipt as proof of warranty coverage.

INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS
The RV-8 requires special care during installation to ensure optimal
performance. Pay particular attention to instructions below and to
other precautions that appear throughout this user guide.

DO install the RV-8 on a solid, flat, level surface such as a table or
shelf. The RV-8 can also be installed in a standard 19-inch
equipment rack using an optional rack-mount kit available from an
authorized Lexicon dealer.

DO NOT place the RV-8 on a windowsill or any location exposed to
direct sunlight.

DO NOT obstruct the front-panel IR receiver window. The remote
control must be in line of sight with the IR receiver for proper
operation.
DO NOT install the RV-8 on a surface that is unstable or unable to
support all four feet.

CAUTION!
Before moving the RV-8, power the unit off using the rearpanel power switch and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet.

DO select a dry, well-ventilated location out of direct sunlight.
DO NOT expose the RV-8 to high temperatures, humidity, steam,
smoke, dampness or excessive dust. Avoid installing the RV-8 near
radiators or stacking the RV-8 over other heat-producing
equipment such as a power amplifier.
DO NOT install the RV-8 near unshielded TV or FM antennas, cable
TV decoders, or other RF-emitting devices that might cause
interference.
DO NOT place the RV-8 on a thick rug or carpet, or cover the RV-8
with a cloth, as this might prevent proper cooling.

1-5

Getting Started

Lexicon

REMOTE CONTROL BATTERY INSTALLATION
The remote control requires four AAA batteries. The batteries should be replaced as needed. Alkaline batteries, which last longer without
leaking, are recommended. When battery power is low, the remote control enters a low-voltage condition, preventing it from operating the
RV-8. When this occurs, replace the batteries. Normal operation will resume when new batteries are installed.
To replace the remote control batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the remote control. Press the tab (1) and lift the cover (2) away from the remote control.
2. Remove old batteries (if applicable).
3. Observing the proper polarity, insert four AAA batteries (3).
4. Align the cover over the battery compartment and gently press down until it snaps back into place (4).
5. Dispose of the old batteries (if applicable).

4
2

1-6

2
Basic Operation
Front-Panel Overview ................................................................. 2-2
Rear-Panel Overview ................................................................... 2-6
Tuner Overview ........................................................................ 2-10
Selecting a Station...................................................................................2-10
Direct Station Access ...............................................................................2-10
Tune/Seek Access ....................................................................................2-10
Scan Mode ..............................................................................................2-11
Loading Presets .......................................................................................2-11
Saving Presets..........................................................................................2-11
Editing Presets .........................................................................................2-12
Autoload .................................................................................................2-12

Amplifier Overview ................................................................... 2-12
Amplifier Channel Status .........................................................................2-13
Making Connections With the Amplifier Output ......................................2-13

Headphone Overview ............................................................... 2-13
Remote Control Overview......................................................... 2-14
Operation Considerations ........................................................................2-14
MAIN Menu ............................................................................................2-14
Menu Navigation ....................................................................................2-14
Menu Item Selection ...............................................................................2-15
Remote Control Buttons ..........................................................................2-17
Command Matrix ....................................................................................2-18

Understanding the Zones ......................................................... 2-28
Two-Line Status ........................................................................ 2-28
STATUS Menus ......................................................................... 2-29
STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions.....................................................2-34

STATUS Menu Level Meters ...................................................... 2-35

Basic Operation

Lexicon

FRONT-PANEL OVERVIEW
The RV-8 is shown below. The numbers in the front-panel illustrations correspond with the numbered items in the text.

2-2

Basic Operation

RV-8

1 FRONT-PANEL DISPLAY

3 VOLUME KNOB

Use the front-panel display to view the current input, listening
mode, input source and volume level. If the built-in tuner is active,
the display will show the frequency, band, listening mode and
volume level. The 2 x 20 character display also functions as a display
for messages and menus, one line at a time.

Use the volume knob to adjust volume level in all Zones.

Note:
Power is still supplied to the RV-8 when standby mode is activated.

To adjust the Main Zone volume level:
Rotate the volume knob clockwise to increase VOLUME
-34db
or counterclockwise to decrease volume level
in 1dB increments. A horizontal bar graph
indicating the current Main Zone volume level is displayed in the
on-screen and front-panel displays. The Main Zone volume range is
–80 to +12dB.

2 IR RECEIVER

To adjust the Zone 2 or Zone 3 volume level:

The IR receiver receives infrared commands from the RV-8 remote
control. There are three associated LEDs.

1. Press and hold the front-panel Zone 2 or Zone 3 input selection
button that corresponds with the current input source. For
instance, if the current input source is using the DVD1 input, press
and hold the DVD1 input selection button in the desired zone.

•

The amber LED blinks when a remote control command is
received.

•

The red LED lights when the A/D converters are overloading.

•

The blue LED lights when the RV-8 is powered on and activated
– even if the FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is
set to ALWAYS OFF.

Red LED
Blue LED

Amber LED

2. While holding the desired zone input ZONE 2 VOLUME -34db
selection button, rotate the volume knob
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
decrease volume level in 1dB increments. ZONE 3 VOLUME -34db
The corresponding horizontal graph
appears in the on-screen and front-panel
displays, and indicates the position at which the current Zone 2 or
Zone 3 volume level falls within the –80 to +12dB volume range.
3. Release the selected Zone 2 input selection button when Zone 2
or Zone 3 volume level has been set.
Note:
When RV-8 output levels have been properly calibrated, the +0dB volume
level setting corresponds to THX reference levels (75dB).

2-3

Basic Operation
FRONT-PANEL OVERVIEW

Lexicon
(continued)

4 MAIN ZONE INPUT SELECTION BUTTONS
Selects the corresponding input in the Main Zone. When an input is
selected, a blue LED lights on the corresponding input selection
button. When the Main Zone is deactivated, pressing a Main Zone
input selection button activates the corresponding input in the
Main Zone. Zone 2 and Zone 3 remain deactivated until a Zone 2
or Zone 3 input is selected.

5 ZONE 2 INPUT SELECTION BUTTONS
Selects the corresponding input in Zone 2. When an input is
selected, an amber LED lights on the corresponding input selection
button. When Zone 2 is deactivated, pressing a Zone 2 input
selection button activates the corresponding input in Zone 2. The
Main Zone and Zone 3 remain deactivated until a Main Zone or
Zone 3 input is selected.

presets. See “Tuner Overview” on page 2-10 for additional
information.

8 STANDBY BUTTON
Toggles the RV-8 between on and standby. When the RV-8 is
powered on, pressing this button places the RV-8 into standby and
lights the red LED on the button. Power is supplied to the RV-8
when in standby. When the RV-8 is in standby, pressing the button
turns the unit on and activates all zones that were active in the
previous operating session.
In the event of a power outage, the RV-8 will display a BROWN
OUT!! PRESS STANDBY message. To turn the unit on, use the
S TA N D B Y b u t t o n . F o r m o r e i n f o r m a t i o n , s e e “ P O W E R
MANAGEMENT” on page 3-3.

6 ZONE 3 INPUT SELECTION BUTTONS

9 CHANNEL STATUS LEDs

Selects the corresponding input in Zone 3. When an input is
selected, a red LED lights on the corresponding input selection
button. When Zone 3 is deactivated, pressing a Zone 3 input
selection button activates the corresponding input in Zone 3. The
Main Zone and Zone 2 remain deactivated until a Main Zone or
Zone 2 input is selected.

Each amplifier channel has a blue LED on the front panel that is
illuminated when the unit is powered on. If there is a problem with
an amplifier channel, the corresponding LED will turn off. See
“Amplifier Overview” on page 2-13 for additional information.

7 TUNER SELECTION BUTTONS
Tuner selection buttons allow for direct entry of station frequencies,
selection of AM or FM broadcast bands and the saving/recalling of

2-4

10 MODE

and

BUTTONS

Use the Mode buttons to scroll to the previous ( ) or next ( )
available listening mode. Scrolling occurs in the order shown in the
MODE ADJUST menu. Refer to “Listening Mode Activation” on
page 6-2 for more information.

Basic Operation

RV-8

11 MUTE BUTTON

14 ZONE 3 OFF BUTTON

Mutes or restores the RV-8 Main Zone volume to its original level. Press
the Mute button to mute volume level; “MUTE ON” appears in the
on-screen and front-panel displays. Press the Mute button again to
restore the volume to its original level. The VOLUME CONTROL SETUP
and MUTE LEVEL parameter can be used to set mute levels.

Deactivates Zone 3.

Mute may be activated automatically or manually. For example, the
RV-8 briefly activates mute when changing input sources or
listening modes. The amber Mute button LED lights whenever
mute is activated.

12 MAIN ZONE OFF BUTTON
Deactivates the Main Zone.

13 ZONE 2 OFF BUTTON
Deactivates Zone 2.

15 TUNE/SEEK BUTTONS
Allow for manual or automatic tuning of the AM/FM stereo radio
tuner.

16 HEADPHONE OUTPUT
Features multiple listening modes including LOGIC7 headphone
processing. The headphone output follows the signal selected in
the M ain Zo ne. When headphones are plugged into the
headphone output, all Main Zone amplifier outputs are muted. If
amplifier outputs 3 and 7 are assigned to Zone 2 or Zone 3, they
remain unmuted. The Main Zone preamplifier outputs are also
muted when headphones are plugged in. Preamplifier outputs for
Zone 2 and Zone3 remain unmuted. See “Headphone Overview”
on page 2-14 for additional headphone information. Headphone
listening mode information starts on page 6-34.
.

2-5

Basic Operation

Lexicon

REAR-PANEL OVERVIEW
The RV-8 is shown below. The numbers in the rear-panel illustrations correspond with the numbered items in the text.

_ + _ +

11 12

13 14 15

16 17 18

CAUTION! Never make or break connections to the RV-8 unless the RV-8 and all associated components are powered off.

2-6

Basic Operation

RV-8

1 AMPLIFIER OUTPUTS
Provide audio outputs to the speakers. The Center channel output
and all Right channel outputs are located on the left-hand side of
the rear-panel. All Left channel outputs are located on the righthand side of the rear-panel. This organizaion facilitates making
speaker connections. The amplifier binding posts accommodate the
following connectors:

present in the Main Zone, only the Front (L) and (R) input signals are
sent to the Zone 2 and Zone 3 audio output connectors. If the
ZONE2 IN parameter is set to DMIX, a downmix of the 5.1 analog
source is sent to the Zone 2 audio output connectors. See “ZONE2 in
Parameter Settings” on page 3-22 for additional information.
Input Connector

Output Connector

(L)

Front L

•

standard 0.75-inch banana plugs

(R)

Front R

•

size 10-12 gauge spade connectors

(C)

Center

•

up to 10-gauge bare wire

(SUB)

Subwoofer

(LS)

Side L and Rear L

(RS)

Side R and Rear R

See page 2-13 for additional amplifier information.

2 VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS
Provide video input in the Main Zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3. Five
composite video connectors labeled Video 1 to 5, and five S-Video
connectors labeled S-Video 1 to 5 are available.

3 ANALOG AUDIO INPUT CONNECTORS
Provide analog audio input in the Main Zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3.
Eight stereo analog audio input connectors labeled Audio 1 to 8 are
available. Connectors labeled 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 can be configured
as 5.1-channel connectors.
When a 5.1-channel analog audio source is present in the Main Zone,
input signals are sent to the Main Zone audio output connectors as
indicated in the following table. When a 5.1-channel analog source is

4 COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS
Three component video input connectors labeled Component Video 1
to 3 are available for use in the Main Zone and have full HDTV compatibility. The ultra-wide bandwidth component video switcher accepts
any analog component or RGB video input type. The component
video connectors are not available for Zone 2 or Zone 3.

5 MAIN ZONE VIDEO OUTPUT CONNECTORS
Provide video output in the Main Zone. Two composite video
connectors, two S-Video connectors and one component video
connector are available.

2-7

Basic Operation
REAR-PANEL OVERVIEW

Lexicon
(continued)

6 ZONE 2 VIDEO OUTPUT CONNECTORS

8 TUNER ANTENNA CONNECTORS

Provide video output in Zone 2. One composite video connector
and one S-Video connector is available. Alternatively, these
connectors can be used to connect a video recording device.

Provide two antenna connections for the AM/FM stereo radio tuner.

9 DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT CONNECTORS (S/PDIF)
Note:
• Composite video output connectors are available when a composite
or S-Video source is present.
• S-Video output connectors are available when an S-Video source is
present.
• Component video output connectors are available when a
component video source is present.

7 ZONE 2 ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUT CONNECTORS
Provide analog audio output in Zone 2. Two pairs of connectors,
one labeled “Fix” and the other labeled “Var” are available. These
connectors can also be used to connect a recording device. For
recording, use the output connector labeled “Fix,” which provides
a fixed output level of +0dB. If output level adjustment is needed,
use the output labeled “Var” and adjust the Zone 2 volume.

Provide digital audio input in the Main Zone or Zone 2. Four S/PDIF
coaxial and four S/PDIF optical (Toslink) input connectors are
available. Connectors are compatible with PCM (44.1, 48, 88.2 and
96kHz), Dolby Digital and DTS(-ES) sources. Connectors are not
compatible with MPEG (MP3) sources.

10 MICROPHONE INPUT CONNECTORS
Provides microphone input for automatic calibration.

11 PHONO INPUT CONNECTORS
Provide a phono level input, which can be assigned to any of the eight
RV-8 inputs. A 2-channel analog bypass path is available (with RIAA
curve). A ground connector is also provided. The phono input is
optimized for moving magnet phono cartridges.

Note:
When using an analog input source, the Zone 2 and Zone 3 audio outputs
are approximately 2dB lower than the Main audio outputs labeled Front L/
R. When using a digital input source, the Zone 2 audio outputs are
approximately 6dB higher than the Main audio outputs labeled Front L/R.
This is to accommodate THX level requirements.

2-8

12 TRIGGER OUTPUT CONNECTORS
Provide 12V DC output to control connected components. Two
trigger output connectors are available on a removable terminal
block. The PWR connector (the power trigger output connector) is
not configurable. It is activated when the RV-8 is powered on, and
deactivated when the RV-8 is powered off from the rear panel or by

Basic Operation

RV-8
putting the RV-8 into standby. The trigger output connector
(labeled 1) can be configured for remote or program operation. See
“Trigger Setup” on page 3-70 for more information.

17 ZONE 2 DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT CONNECTORS
(S/PDIF)
Provides digital audio output in Zone 2. One S/PDIF coaxial and
one S/PDIF optical (Toslink) connector is available.

13 RS-232 CONNECTORS
The RS-232 serial connector (1) provides serial control and is used to
perform configuration downloads and flash memory software
upgrades. The RS-232 connector (2) is reserved for future
developments.

18 REMOVABLE ACCESS PANEL
Reserved for future developments.

19 AC INPUT CONNECTOR
14 MAIN ZONE AUDIO OUTPUT CONNECTORS

Provides power to the RV-8 through the supplied power cord.

Provide analog audio output in the Main Zone. Eight connectors
labeled Front L/R, Center, Sub, Side L/R and Rear L/R are available.

20 POWER SWITCH
15 IR IN CONNECTOR
Accepts input of IR signals from infrared distribution equipment.
One 3.5mm jack that accepts a stereo plug (Tip/Ring/Sleeve
connection) or mono plug (Tip/Sleeve connection) is available.

16 ZONE 3 AUDIO/VIDEO OUTPUT CONNECTORS
Provide analog audio/video output in Zone 3. One stereo analog
audio output (variable level) is available and can derive its source from
a variety of analog sources. One composite video output is available
and can derive its source from any composite or S-video source.

Use the Power switch to connect or disconnect power from the AC
Input connector to the RV-8. The I and O positions represent “on”
and “off” status, respectively. When the RV-8 is powered on, the
front-panel Standby button or remote control On button can be
used to activate and deactivate standby mode. When the RV-8 is
powered off, standby mode is not available.
In the event of a power outage, the RV-8 will display a BROWNOUT,
CYCLE POWER message. To turn the unit back on, use the rearpanel power switch. In this instance, the front-panel StandBy switch
has no effect.

2-9

Basic Operation

Lexicon

TUNER OVERVIEW
The RV-8 features an AM/FM stereo radio tuner. The front panel
displays the currently selected frequency, band, listening mode and
volume. Forty presets can store AM or FM frequencies, identified by
the preset number/name and station frequency/band. For example:
WABC/90.90 FM or Preset 02/10.30 AM. Two antennas are
supplied with the RV-8: one for AM and one for FM stereo. At a
minimum, use of the supplied antennas is recommended to ensure
consistent tuner performance.
The tuner can be setup to receive elements of the Radio Data
System (RDS) broadcasts. Originated in Europe and now with
limited availability in the US, the RDS is a standard for broadcasting
digital data along with an FM radio broadcast. When the RDS
option is active and RDS data is received, the RV-8 tuner displays
the identity of the broadcast station, receipt of alternate station
frequencies and any additional text (referred to as RT or Radio Text)
that the station broadcasts. For more information on RDS features,
see “Tuner Setup” on page 3-72.

DIRECT STATION ACCESS
To access a specific frequency, use the numeric buttons on either the
front panel or remote control to enter the desired station frequency.
To directly access a station from the front panel or remote control:
1. Press the AM/FM button to select the desired band.
2. Enter the three or four digit station frequency. For example, to
load FM station 90.9, press 9-0-9. To load AM station 1030, press
the AM/FM button to select the AM band, then press 1-0-3-0.
Note:
When digits are first entered, a “Loading Preset” status message appears
in the front-panel (and on-screen) display. When a third digit is entered,
the RV-8 senses a frequency is being entered and changes the status
message to “Setting Frequency.”

TUNE/SEEK ACCESS
SELECTING A STATION
Begin selecting a radio station by activating the built-in tuner input.
To activate the tuner input, press the front-panel TUNER button or
select the TUNER option from the remote-control MAIN screen. See
the “Tuner Setup” on page 3-72 for more information.
Next, determine if the desired frequency band is active by pushing the
front-panel or remote-control AM/FM button to toggle between the
AM and FM frequency bands.
Once the frequency band is set, there are several ways to select a radio
station: direct station access, tune/seek access, scan mode and presets.

2-10

Press one of the Tune/Seek buttons on the front panel ( / ) or
remote control (
/
) to navigate to the next available
frequency. For example, if the currently loaded frequency is
101.7FM, press the Tune/Seek
button to load 101.9FM. Press the
Tune/Seek button again to load 102.1FM, and so on.
Press one of the Tune/Seek buttons on the front panel ( / ) or
remote control (
/
) for 2 seconds to activate seek mode.
Seek mode searches for the next available radio station. If the tuner
is having difficulty locating stations, raise the sensitivity level. See
“SCAN SENS” on 3-73 for more information.

Basic Operation

RV-8

SCAN MODE

SAVING PRESETS

Scan Mode scans through all available stations, pausing for two
seconds on each station before scanning to the next one.

The RV-8 has 40 presets available for storing AM or FM stations. The
presets are divided into four banks with ten presets per bank. It is
possible to store a combination of AM and FM stations in each
bank. Storing presets on the RV-8 can be accomplished from either
the front panel or the remote control. The operation is identical.

To enter Scan Mode:
Press and hold the front-panel ( / ) or remote-control (
Tune/Seek buttons until SCAN or SCAN is displayed.

)

To stop scanning:
Press either Tune/Seek button.

LOADING PRESETS
To load a preset:
Enter a preset (number between 1 and 40) using the front-panel or
remote-control number buttons.
A “Loading Preset” status message appears in the front-panel (and
on-screen) display. If a third digit is entered, the tuner switches over
to Direct Station Access mode and the front-panel status message
changes to “Setting Frequency.”

To save a station as a preset on the RV-8:
1. Press the front-panel or remote-control SAVE button. A status
message displaying ”Saving Preset” appears in the front-panel
(and on-screen) display.
2. Enter a number between 1 and 40 to save the currently loaded
frequency as the corresponding preset.
For example, if the tuner is currently playing 101.7FM, press
the SAVE button, then the 1 button to save 101.7FM as preset
number 1.
Press the 1 button followed by the 5 button to save as preset
number 15. Pressing more than two numbers resets the preset
number to the third digit entered.
Pressing the SAVE button a second time cancels the saving process.

To skip through available presets in order:

NAMING PRESETS

Press the remote-control
or
button. For example, if preset 1 is
loaded and the
button is pressed, the RV-8 will load preset 2 (or
the next available preset). If preset 1 is loaded and the
button is
pressed, the RV-8 will load preset 40 (or the next available preset).

Preset stations use a naming system based on the RDS system. In the
US, each preset channel is identified by the station's call letters, or what
the broadcast information identifies as the call letters. In Europe and
Japan, each preset channel is identified by the station's Program
Service (PS) name.

Note:
This feature is only accessible via the remote control.

If the RDS information is not available, the preset name defaults to
PresetXX, where XX is the listed number position in the Preset menu.

2-11

Basic Operation

Lexicon

For example, if Preset #01 is FM 90.90 and the call letters are WABC,
then the name for that position is WABC. If Preset #23 does not
broadcast their call letters, then that location is identified as Preset23 in
the menu.

AUTOLOAD

EDITING PRESETS

To start autoloading:

It is possible to customize the name of each preset on the RV-8.

1. Select AUTOLOAD from the MAIN MENU : SETUP : TUNER SETUP
menu.

To edit the preset name:

2. Press menu

1. Select TUNER PRESETS from the MAIN MENU. The TUNER
PRESETS menu contains a list of preset pages. PAGE 1 contains
presets 1 through 10, PAGE 2 contains presets 11 through 20, etc.
2. Select the page containing the desired preset.
A list of presets appears.
3. Select the desired preset.
The EDIT PRESET menu opens and displays the preset call letters
(or PS), frequency, and band.
The EDIT PRESET menu options are as follows:
•

Select LISTEN TO PRESET to load the preset frequency.

•

Select NAME to customize the preset name. The preset name
can be up to eight characters long.

•

Select CLEAR PRESET to clear the frequency and band information from the preset.

See “Tuner Presets” on page 5-2 for additional information.

2-12

The RV-8 can automatically scan and store presets. This can be
accomplished only from the remote control. See “Tuner Setup
(continued)” on page 3-74 for additional information.

to start AUTOLOAD.

Basic Operation

RV-8

AMPLIFIER OVERVIEW
The RV-8 features a 7-channel power amplifier with 140W per
channel. The RV-8 can be configured so that all amplifier channels
are dedicated to the Main Zone or so that outputs 3 and 7 (labeled
Rear Right and Rear Left) are used for Zone 2 or Zone 3. Heavy duty
gold plated 5-way binding posts are provided for speaker
connections.
The amplifiers feature advanced thermal current and DC protection
for each channel. Thermal protection monitors the temperature of
the chassis and heatsinks and automatically deactivates the specific
channel(s) when they exceed their normal safe operating temperature. Current protection ensures that the output transistors are
protected by limiting the current capability which is determined by
the output voltage, while DC protection prevents DC and
frequencies below 10Hz from reaching the speakers. Dedicated
channel status LEDs are located on the front panel to provide at-aglance viewing of channel status at all times. If the main power
transformer temperature exceeds 100°C, the transformer will
deactivate, all channel status LEDs will no longer be lit and the red
standby LED will flash rapidly. Once the transformer has cooled, it
automatically resets and the amplifier operates normally; the
channel status LEDs turn back on, and the red standby LED is no
longer lit.

AMPLIFIER CHANNEL STATUS
Each channel has a blue Channel Status LED on the front panel that
is illuminated when the unit is powered on. If there is a problem
with an amplifier channel, the LED will turn off.

MAKING CONNECTIONS WITH THE AMPLIFIER
OUTPUT
The amplifier output connectors can accept bare speaker wires,
banana plug connectors or certain spade connectors. When using
bare speaker wires, loosen the connector, insert the wire into the
top of the receptacle, then tighten the connector. The same
procedure should be used for spade connectors. Banana plugs
should be inserted into the outward-facing receptacle.
Use heavy-gauge speaker cable to ensure low-impedance connections between the amplifier and the speakers. Observe correct
speaker polarity.

CAUTION! Do not connect the outputs of one channel to
the outputs of other channels or to other amplifiers.

The amplifiers are designed to meet the highest standards of performance and sound quality. In addition, THX Ultra2 certification
ensures that the amplifiers meet the highest standards set forth by
Lucasfilm's Home THX division.

2-13

Basic Operation

Lexicon

HEADPHONE OVERVIEW

REMOTE CONTROL OVERVIEW

Headphones can be connected to the RV-8 via the Headphone
output on the front panel. The headphone output follows the signal
selected in the Main Zone. If the Main Zone source is multichannel,
a downmix of the source is sent to the headphone output. LOGIC7
headphone processing is also available for stereo or multichannel
sources. To listen to a stereo source without enhanced processing,
set the 2-CH parameter in the INPUT SETUP menu to the
2-CHANNEL listening mode. When headphones are plugged into
the headphone output, all amplifier outputs are muted (including
outputs 3 and 7, unless they are assigned to Zone 2 or Zone 3). The
Main Zone preamplifier outputs are also muted. Preamplifier
outputs for Zone 2 and Zone 3 remain unmuted. Use the frontpanel volume knob or the remote-control Volume Up/Down
buttons to adjust the headphone output level.

The RV-8 remote control provides full operation of the RV-8,
including commands, such as menu navigation, that are not
available from the front panel. It is also designed to provide control
for the entire home theater system. This section provides a brief
over view of the remo te control. For detailed operation/
programming instructions and manufacturing codes, refer to
Appendix C.

When the headphones are plugged into the headphone output, the
volume defaults to the HEADPHONE parameter value selected in
the VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu. When the headphones are
unplugged, the volume defaults to the value of the MAIN PWR ON
parameter in the VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu. See page 6-34
for headphone listening mode descriptions.

2-14

OPERATION CONSIDERATIONS
The following factors can improve or impede remote control
operation.
Note the following before operating the RV-8 remote control:
•

The remote control must be in line-of-sight with the front-panel
IR receiver. Eliminate obstructions between the remote control
and the IR receiver. The remote control may become unreliable
if strong sunlight or fluorescent light shines on the IR receiver.

•

For optimal performance, position the remote control at a
30-degree angle no more than 40 to 60 feet (12.2m to 18.3m)
from the RV-8. Placing the RV-8 inside a smoked glass cabinet
will reduce the remote control range.

•

Remote controls for different components can interfere with
one another. Avoid using remote controls for different components at the same time.

•

Remote-control batteries should be replaced as needed.

Basic Operation

RV-8

MAIN MENU

MENU ITEM SELECTION

Use the MAIN MENU to open the four main
menu branches: MODE ADJUST, AUDIO
CONTROLS, TUNER PRESETS and SETUP.

Use the remote-control Menu arrows to navigate menus and to
select menu items.

MAIN MENU
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

To select a menu item on the open menu:
1. Press the remote-control
menu item.

MENU NAVIGATION
Use the remote-control arrow buttons to navigate the extensive
menu structure starting on page B-2. The table below indicates the
navigation commands that the remote-control buttons perform
when the Main Zone command bank is activated.

and

arrows to highlight the desired

2. When the desired menu item is highlighted, press the Menu
arrow to select the highlighted item. If an option is selected,
another menu opens. If a parameter is selected, a parameter
drop-down menu or horizontal graph opens.

Note:
The DVD1 device has been preprogrammed to control the Lexicon RT-10
and RT-20 disc players.

Arrow

Navigation Functions
• When a menu is open, press the remote-control Menu
• When no menus are open, press the Menu

arrow to select the highlighted menu item.

arrow to open the MAIN MENU.

• When a menu is open, press the Menu
arrow to close the menu and, in most cases, open the previous menu. Subsequent presses continue to close the current menu and open the previous menu until the MAIN MENU is closed. When
the MAIN MENU is closed, the menu structure is also closed.
• When no menus are open, pressing the Menu
• When a drop-down menu is open, press the Menu

arrow button performs no function.
arrow to select the current setting and close the drop-down menu.

• When a menu is open, press the Menu
and
arrow buttons to scroll upward and downward through the complete list
of menu items. The highlighted menu item appears in the front-panel display. All menu items appear in the on-screen
display. A scroll bar appears in the left side of the on-screen display when menu items exceed the on-screen display’s top
and bottom margins. The cursor automatically wraps to the next menu item when the first or last menu item is passed.

2-15

Basic Operation

Lexicon

MENU OPTIONS
Selecting a menu option opens another menu within the menu
structure. For example, selecting SETUP from the MAIN MENU opens
the SETUP menu.
MAIN MENU

SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
D I S P L AY S
V O L U ME C O N T R O L S
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
L O C K O PT I O N S
L I V E ! C A L I B R AT I O N
P O W E R M A N A G E ME N T

2. When the desired setting appears beneath the parameter
name, press the
arrow to accept the setting and close the
drop-down menu.

HORIZONTAL BAR GRAPHS
Selecting some menu parameters opens a horizontal bar graph. The
bar graph indicates the position at which the current parameter setting
falls within the entire parameter range.
For example, selecting the A/V SYNC DELAY parameter from the
DISPLAY SETUP menu opens the horizontal bar graph shown below,
which is used to adjust the amount of audio delay.
D I S P L AY S E T U P

OFF, 1 to 60ms

O N - S C R E E N D I S P L AY
F R O N T PA N E L D I S P L AY
A / V AS /YVN CS YDNE CL AY
D E L AY O F F O F F
C U S CT UOSMT ONMA M
EME
OFF OFF
NA

PARAMETER DROP-DOWN MENUS
Selecting some menu options opens a drop-down menu that contains
a list of available parameter settings. For example, selecting the
CUSTOM NAME parameter from the DISPLAY SETUP menu opens a
drop-down menu which is used to select the ON or OFF setting.

EDIT CUSTOM NAME

To adjust a parameter setting with a horizontal bar graph:
D I S P L AY S E T U P
O N - S C R E E N D I S P L AY
F R O N T PA N E L D I S P L AY
A / V S Y N C D E L AY
OFF
CUSTOM NAME
OFF

ON
OFF

EDIT CUSTOM NAME

To select a setting in a parameter drop-down menu:
1. When the drop-down menu opens, press the remote-control
and
arrows to scroll upward and downward through the
complete list of available settings. The current setting is displayed
beneath the parameter name in the on-screen and front-panel
displays.

2-16

1. When the horizontal bar graph appears, press the remote-control
and
arrows to increase or decrease the setting in the designated increments. The setting appears to the right of the
parameter name in the on-screen and front-panel displays.
2. When the desired adjustments have been made, press the
arrow to select the setting and close the horizontal bar graph.
Note:
Menu item selection instructions differ for certain menus. These instances
are noted throughout this user guide.

Basic Operation

RV-8

REMOTE CONTROL BUTTONS
2
1

1. SYSTEM POWER OFF
2. Displays the name of the selected device.
3. POWER ON
4. Device and function buttons

4
5

6
7
11

8
9

5. Light
6. Displays page number/currently selected device
7. LCD page change
8. FAVORITE
9. HOME menu
10. CHANNEL/Listening Mode (+/-)

10
12

11. Previous channel
12. VOLUME (+/-)

13. MUTE
14. TRANSPORT functions (PLAY, STOP, REWIND, PAUSE, REC, SKIP and FF)
for VCR, DVD and CD

15. JOYSTICK (left, right, up, down and center press)
16. DISPLAY/AM/FM
17. ENTER/SAVE

18. MACRO buttons
17

2-17

Basic Operation

Lexicon

COMMAND MATRIX
The command matrix describes the commands that the remote control buttons perform
when each command bank is active.
1

BUTTON

Enters RV-8 standby mode.

Activates the RV-8.

Displays the MAIN Zone Displays the
command bank, which Main Zone
includes commands
Status.
that control the Main
Zone.

Selects the Dolby
Digital listening
mode family.

Displays the Zone 2 Toggles RV8 between
Status.
5 speaker and 7
speaker modes.

Displays the Zone 2
Deactivates the
command bank, which Main Zone.
includes commands that
control Zone 2.

Selects the DTS
listening mode
family.

Deactivates Zone 2. Adjusts the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu
Main Zone BALANCE
to the left.

Displays the Zone 3
Selects the Tuner
command bank, which input for the
includes commands that Main Zone.
control Zone 3.

Selects the THX
listening mode
family.

Selects the Tuner
input for Zone 2.

Sets the Main Zone
Volume level to
-15dB.

Displays the DVD1
Selects the
command bank, which DVD1 input for
includes commands that the Main Zone.
control DVD1.

Toggles between
the current
listening mode
and the 2CHANNEL
listening mode.

Selects the DVD1
input for Zone 2.

Shows status menu
for current Main Zone
input stream.

6
7

2-18

HOME

MAIN PAGE1 MAIN PAGE2 ZONE2 PAGE1

ZONE2 PAGE2

STAT2 button: see
page 2-29 for more
information.

Displays the DVD2
Selects the
command bank, which DVD2 input for
includes commands that the Main Zone.
control DVD2.

Analog Bypass
Toggle.

Selects the DVD1
input for Zone 2.

Activates the RV-8.

Displays the SAT
Selects the SAT
command bank, which
input for the
includes commands that Main Zone.
control the Satellite box.

Selects the L7 FILM
listening mode.

Selects the
Satellite input for
Zone 2.

Reserved for future
expansion.

Basic Operation

RV-8

BUTTON
1

ZONE3 PAGE1

DVD1 PAGE1

DVD1 PAGE2

Enters RV-8 standby mode.

Reserved for future expansion.

Activates the RV-8.

Toggles RT-10 or RT-20 power.

Displays the Status of
Zone 3.

Resets the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu BASS,
TREBLE, and TILT EQ
parameter to +0.0dB.

Opens and closes the RT-10 or RT-20 disc tray.

Deactivates Zone 3.

Decreases the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu Main
Zone BASS parameter
in.5dB increments.

Opens the RT-10 or
RT-20 Top menu.

Opens and closes the
RT-10 or RT-20 Video
Adjust bar.

Selects the TUNER input
for Zone 3.

Decreases the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu Main
Zone TREBLE parameter
in.5dB increments.

Activates RT-10 or
RT-20 random
playback.

Opens the RT-10 or
RT-20 Angle bar.

Selects the DVD1 input
for Zone 3.

Decreases the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu Main
Zone TILT EQ parameter
in.2dB increments.

Activates RT-10 or
RT-20 repeat playback.

Activates the RT-10 or
RT-20 condition
memory mode.

Selects the DVD2 input
for Zone 3.

Deactivates AUDIO
CONTROLS menu Main
Zone LOUDNESS
parameter.

Activates RT-10 or
RT-20 A-B repeat
playback.

Activates the RT-10 or
RT-20 last memory
playback.

Selects the Satellite
input for Zone 3.

Reserved for future
expansion.

Opens the RT-10 or
RT-20 Setup menu.

Creates up to five
shortcuts for frequently
adjusted RT-10 or RT-20
Setup menu parameters.

5
6

ZONE3 PAGE2

2-19

Basic Operation

Lexicon

MAIN
PAGE1

BUTTON

HOME

Selects the VCR
command bank, which
includes commands
that control the VCR.

Selects the VCR
input for the
Main Zone.

Selects the L7
Music listening
mode.

Selects the VCR
input for Zone 2.

Adjusts the Audio
Controls menu Main
Zone BALANCE
parameter to the
right.

Selects the TV
command bank, which
includes commands
that control the TV.

Selects the TV
input for the
Main Zone.

Selects the L7 TV
listening mode.

Selects the TV input
for Zone 2.

Sets the Main Zone
volume level to
-30dB.

Selects the CD
command bank, which
includes commands
that control the CD
player.

Selects the CD
input for the
Main Zone.

Selects the L7
Music Surround
listening mode.

Selects the CD
input for Zone 2.

Toggles the Setup
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY parameter.

Selects the Phono
command bank, which
includes commands
that control the
associated device.

Selects the
Phono input for
the Main Zone.

Toggles between
setting the input
to auto, analog or
digital.

Selects the Phono
input for Zone 2.

Deactivates the RV-8.

N/A

Selects Page 2 of
the Main Zone
command bank.

Selects Page 1 of
the Main Zone
command bank.

Selects Page 2 of
the Zone 2
command bank.

Selects Page 1 of the
Zone 2 command
bank.

Selects the Home command bank.

Scrolls through Favorite Channel pages.

History-dependent*

MAIN PAGE2 ZONE2 PAGE1 ZONE2 PAGE2

11
12
13
16

14
15

Increases the Main Zone volume level
in 1dB increments.

Increases the Zone 2 volume level in 1dB
increments.

* History-dependent buttons perform different functions, depending on the Zone or device that is currently being controlled.
Check the bottom of the LCD for the currently controlled device.

2-20

Basic Operation

RV-8

BUTTON

ZONE3 PAGE1

13
16

DVD1 PAGE2

Increases the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu BASS
parameter in .5dB
increments.

Closes certain Setup
menus without saving
the changes.

Activates and deactivates the RT-10 or
RT-20 rear- panel video
output connectors.

Selects the TV input for
Zone 3.

Increases the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu
TREBLE parameter in
.5dB increments.

Activates the RT-10 or
RT-20 display mode.

Controls the brightness
of front-panel display
characters.

Selects the CD input for
Zone 3.

Increases the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu Main
Zone TILT EQ parameter
level in .2dB increments.

Opens the RT-10 or
RT-20 Subtitle bar.

Activates the RT-10 or
RT-20 search mode.

Selects the Phono input
for Zone 3.

Activates the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu Main
Zone LOUDNESS
parameter.

Opens the RT-10 or
RT-20 Audio bar.

Activates the RT-10 or
RT-20 program mode.

Displays Zone 3 Page 2
command bank.

Displays Zone 3 Page 1
command bank.

Displays DVD1 Page 2
command bank.

Displays DVD1 Page 1
command bank.

Displays the Home command bank.

Scrolls through Favorite Channel pages.

Increases Zone 3 volume level in 1dB increments

11
12

DVD1 PAGE1

Selects the VCR input
for Zone 3.

9
10

ZONE3 PAGE2

Increases RV-8 Main volume level in 1dB
increments

2-21

Basic Operation

Lexicon

BUTTON

HOME

17
19
22

MAIN PAGE2 ZONE2 PAGE1 ZONE2 PAGE2

History-dependent*

Decreases Main Zone volume level in
1dB increments.

History-dependent*

Centers the AUDIO CONTROLS menu
Toggles between fully muting Main
Zone volume level and restoring Main BALANCE and FADER parameters.
Zone volume level to its original level.

History-dependent*

Toggles between muting Main Zone
volume level and restoring Main Zone
volume level to its original level.

Toggles between fully muting Zone 2
volume level and restoring Zone 2 volume
level to its original level.

History-dependent*

Scrolls upward through listening
modes.

Adjusts the AUDIO CONTROLS menu
Main Zone FADER parameter towards the
front.

History-dependent*

Scrolls downward through listening
modes.

Adjusts the AUDIO CONTROLS menu
Main Zone FADER parameter towards the
back.

History-dependent*

If the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input, press
next available preset.

History-dependent*

Activates the Trigger output connector labeled 1.

History-dependent*

If the RV-8’s but-in tuner is the currently selected input, press
to next available preset.

18
20

MAIN
PAGE1

21
23

Decreases Zone2 volume level in 1dB
increments.

24
to skip back to

to skip forward

* History-dependent buttons perform different functions, depending on the Zone or device that is currently being controlled.
Check the bottom of the LCD for the currently controlled device.

2-22

Basic Operation

RV-8

BUTTON

18
20
17
19
22

ZONE3 PAGE1

ZONE3 PAGE2

DVD1 PAGE1

DVD1 PAGE2

Decreases Zone 3 volume level in.1dB increments.

Decreases Main Zone volume level in.1dB
increments.

Activates the 5.1 THX, 5.1 THX Ultra2 or the THX
SurEX listening mode when a 5.1-channel THX
source is present. Activates Dolby PLIIx+THX when
a stereo source is present.

Toggles between fully muting the RV-8 Main Zone
volume level and restoring Main Zone volume
level to its original level.

Toggles between fully muting Zone 3 volume level
and restoring Zone 3 volume to its original level.

Toggles between muting the RV-8 Main Zone
volume level and restoring Main Zone volume
level to its original level.

Increases Subwoofer output in 1dB increments.

Scrolls upward through RV-8 listening modes.

Decreases Subwoofer output in 1dB increments.

Scrolls downward through RV-8 listening modes.

If the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently selected
to skip back to the next available
input, press
preset.

Skips to the beginning of the current chapter or
track. Subsequent presses skip to the beginning of
the previous chapter or track.

Activates the output connector labeled Trigger 1.

Activates playback of the loaded disc at regular
playback speed.

If the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently selected
to skip forward to the next
input, press
available preset.

Skips to the beginning of the next chapter or
track. Subsequent presses skip to the beginning of
the next chapter or track.

23
24

2-23

Basic Operation

Lexicon

BUTTON

25
27
28

HOME

MAIN
PAGE1

MAIN PAGE2 ZONE2 PAGE1 ZONE2 PAGE2

History-dependent*

When a DTS(-ES) source is present, toggles the ES decoding parameter,
cycling through the AUTO, ON, and OFF settings.

History-dependent*

Deactivates the output connector labeled Trigger 1.

History-dependent*

Activates the Dolby DIGITAL EX or Dolby DIGITAL listening mode when a
5.1- channel Dolby Digital source is present.

History-dependent*

When a menu is open, scrolls upward through menu items.

History-dependent*

Opens the menu structure and selects the highlighted menu item, which opens
another menu, opens a parameter drop-down menu, or selects the highlighted
parameter setting.

History-dependent*

When a menu is open, scrolls downward through menu items.

If the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input, press
once to tune
to the
next available tuner frequency. Pressing for 2 seconds activates seek mode, which
searches for the next available radio station. To enter Scan Mode, press and hold
until the display shows
SCAN or SCAN .

30
31
26
29
32

* History-dependent buttons perform different functions, depending on the Zone or device that is currently being controlled.
Check the bottom of the LCD for the currently controlled device.

2-24

Basic Operation

RV-8

BUTTON

25
26

25
27
28

ZONE3 PAGE2

If the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently
o nce to tune to the next
selected input, press
available tuner frequency. Pressing for 2 seconds
activates seek mode, which searches
for the next available radio station. To enter
Scan Mode, press and hold until the display
shows SCAN or SCAN .

DVD1 PAGE1

DVD1 PAGE2

When RT-10 or RT-20 playback is activated, scans
through the disc in reverse direction.
When RT-10 or RT-20 playback is activated, scans
through the disc in forward direction.

When a DTS(-ES) source is present, toggles the
ES decoding parameter, cycling through the
AUTO, ON and OFF settings.

Opens the RT-10 or RT-20 disc menu.

Deactivates the output connector labeled
Trigger 1.

Stops playback of the loaded disc.

Activates the Dolby DIGITAL EX or Dolby DIGITAL
listening mode when a 5.1-channel Dolby
Digital source is present. Activates Dolby PLIIx
Movie when a stereo source is present.

Activates RT-10 or RT-20 pause mode.

When a menu is open, scrolls upward through menu items.

Opens the menu structure and selects the
highlighted item. When no menu is open,
opens the MAIN MENU.

When a menu is open, scrolls downward through menu items.

30
31

ZONE3 PAGE1

26
29
32

Navigates to the right in the RT-10 or RT-20 menu
structure.

2-25

Basic Operation

Lexicon

BUTTON

HOME

35
36
38

2-26

MAIN PAGE2 ZONE2 PAGE1

ZONE2 PAGE2

History-dependent*

When a menu is open, closes the menu and (in most cases), opens the previous
menu. Subsequent presses continue to close the current menu and open the
previous menu until the MAIN MENU is closed. When no menus are open, shows
the two-line status.

History-dependent*

When a menu is open, closes the menu structure. When no menus are open,
shows the 2-line status.

History-dependent*

Numbers 0 to 9, are used to enter the frequency of radio stations or to save/load
presets when the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input.

History-dependent*

If the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input, toggles between AM/FM
frequency bands.

History-dependent*

If the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input, pressing this button will
save the currently selected tuner frequency into a preset slot. Also use this button
when programming the remote. See page C-4 for additional information.

History-dependent*

Macro Buttons: M1 is for Macro 1, M2 is for Macro 2 and M3 is for Macro 3. See
page C-9 for additional information on how to use and program macros.

History-dependent*

Activates the remote control backlight that illuminates the buttons and LCD
screen for easier visibility.

MAIN
PAGE1

35
* History-dependent buttons perform different functions, depending on the Zone or device that is currently being controlled.
Check the bottom of the LCD for the currently controlled device.

Basic Operation

RV-8

BUTTON

ZONE3 PAGE2

DVD1 PAGE1

DVD1 PAGE2

When a menu is open, closes the menu and, in
most cases, opens the previous menu.
Subsequent presses continue to close the current
menu and open the previous menu until
the MAIN MENU is closed. When no menus are
open, this button performs no function.

Navigates to the left in the RT-10 or RT-20 menu
structure.

When a menu is open, closes the menu structure.
When no menus are open, shows the
two-line status.

Selects the highlighted RT-10 or RT-20 menu item.

Numbers 0 to 9 are used to enter the
frequency of radio stations or to save/load
presets when the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the
currently selected input.

Direct RT-10 or RT-20 title, chapter, group or track
number selection.

If the RV-8 built-in tuner is the currently selected
input, toggles between AM/FM frequency
bands.

Enters values 10 and above on the RT-10 or RT-20.
Press once for numbers in the teens, twice for
numbers in the twenties, and so on. Then press a
number button (0 to 9) to enter a second digit.

If the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently
selected input, saves the currently selected tuner
frequency as a preset. Also used to program the
remote. See page C-4 for additional information.

Deletes entries when RT-10 or RT-20 search modes
and certain playback modes are activated.

Macro Buttons: M1 is for Macro 1, M2 is for Macro 2 and M3 is for Macro 3. See page C-9
for additional information on how to use and program macros.

Activates the remote-control backlight to illuminate the buttons and LCD screen for easier
visibility.

ZONE3 PAGE1

2-27

Basic Operation

Lexicon

UNDERSTANDING THE ZONES

TWO-LINE STATUS

The RV-8 features three zones of operation: the Main Zone, Zone 2
and Zone 3. The Main Zone controls audio and video signals in the
primary listening space. Zone 2 controls digital and analog audio
and composite or S-Video signals for a second zone or recording
device. Zone 3 is designed to control analog audio and composite
or S-video signals in an additional listening space. The headphone
output follows the source selected in the Main Zone. LOGIC7
Headphone processing is available on this output.

The two-line status opens in the on-screen and front-panel displays
whenever the RV-8 detects a change in input source or listening mode.
The Main Zone two-line status appears when the RV-8 detects a Main
Zone change, and the Zone 2 (or Zone 3) two-line status appears
when a Zone 2 (or Zone 3) status change is detected.

The following are exceptions to independent zone operation:
1. The same Dolby Digital or DTS(-ES) input source can be simultaneously selected for the Main Zone and Zone 2. However,
different Dolby Digital or DTS(-ES) input sources cannot be
present in the Main Zone and Zone 2.
2. Zone 2 can provide a 2-channel downmix of Main Zone multichannel audio when all of the following conditions are met:
•

The same input must be selected in the Main Zone and
Zone 2.

•

A Dolby Digital, DTS(-ES) or 5.1a input source must be
present in the Main Zone.

•

The INPUT SETUP menu ZONE2 IN parameter must be set to
DMIX. See “ZONE2 in Parameter Settings” on page 3-22 for
more information.

3. The Zone 2 and Zone 3 audio output connectors will receive
Front L/R when a 5.1a source is present in the Main Zone and the
ZONE2 IN parameter is set to ANLG.
4. When 5.1a BYPASS or 2-CH BYPASS is selected, a downmix to
Zone 2 is not available.

2-28

The ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is used to
control the length of time the two-line status appears in the onscreen display. The ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu POSITION
parameter is used to control the vertical alignment of the two-line
status in the display device screen.
Note:
When the display device is connected to a component video output
connector and the MAIN ADV menu COMPONENT OSD parameter is set
to OFF, the on-screen display does not appear on the associated display.

MAIN ZONE TWO-LINE STATUS
Opens in the on-screen and front-panel
DVD1
D
VOL
displays whenever the RV-8 detects a Main
FILM
-34dB
Zone status change. The Main Zone two-line
status indicates the current input, input source, listening mode and
volume level selected in the Main Zone.

ZONE 2 TWO-LINE STATUS
Opens in the on-screen and front-panel displays DVD1 ANLG
whenever the RV-8 detects a Zone 2 status ZONE 2
change. The Zone 2 two-line status indicates the
current input, input source and volume level selected in Zone 2.

VOL
-34dB

Basic Operation

RV-8

ZONE 3 TWO-LINE STATUS
Opens in the on-screen and front-panel displays DVD1 ANLG
whenever the RV-8 detects a Zone 3 status ZONE3
change. The Zone 3 two-line status indicates the
current input, input source and volume level selected in Zone 3.

VOL
-34dB

TUNER STATUS
The Tuner status indicates the current frequency,
band, listening mode and volume level. The
Tuner status takes the place of the two-line status
display for inputs using the built-in tuner.

button to open the second page. If the STATUS menu does not
include a second page, pressing the STAT2 button closes the
menu. If this occurs, begin again with step 1.
2. When the desired STATUS menu page has been opened, press
the remote-control Menu
and
arrows to scroll upward and
downward through the complete list of available parameters.
Note:

DVD1
L7 MUSIC

90.9 FM
-34dB

STATUS MENUS
Pressing the remote control STAT2 button opens the STATUS menu
for the current input source of the Main Zone, which contains
parameters that provide information about the current input source
and listening mode. STATUS menus are available for 2-channel,
Dolby Digital, DTS(-ES) and 5.1 analog input sources. Unlike most
other menus, STATUS menus cannot be opened through the
selection of menu options. Rather, the remote control STAT2 button
must be pressed.

STATUS menu parameters provide information about the current
input source and listening mode. These parameters cannot be
adjusted.
3. Press the STAT2 button or the Menu
arrow to close the
STATUS menu. If the second page of the STATUS menu opens,
press the STAT2 button or the Menu
arrow again to close the
STATUS menu.
STATUS menu descriptions begin on the next page. The table
beneath each description lists the default and possible settings
for each parameter. STATUS menu parameter descriptions
begin on page 2-34. STATUS menu level meters are described
on page 2-35.

To open and navigate the STATUS menu for the current input
source:
1. Under Zone 2 page 2, press “STAT2.” The first page of the
STATUS menu for the current input source appears in the onscreen and front-panel displays.
If the STATUS menu includes a second page, the PG1 indicator
appears in the top-right corner of the menu. Press the STAT2

2-29

Basic Operation

Lexicon

2CH STATUS

D STATUS

Provides information about 2-channel input sources. Features L and
R level meters.

Provides information about Dolby Digital input sources. Features
L, C, R, SL, SR and LFE level meters.

Parameter

Possible Settings

Parameter

Possible Settings

INPUT

The current input

INPUT

The current input

MODE

The current listening mode

MODE

The current listening mode

INPUT TYPE

ANLG, PCM

CHANNELS

3/2.1, 3/2, 3/1, 2/2, 2/1, 2/0, 1/0

SAMPLE RATE

44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz

BIT RATE

32 to 640kbps

EX ENCODED

MATRIX, NONE

SAMPLE RATE

48kHz

2.0 ENCODING

MATRIX, NONE

DIALOG OFFSET

–27 to +4dB

MIX ROOM

SMALL, LARGE

CENTER MIX LVL

–3.0dB, –4.5dB, –6.0dB

SURR MIX LVL

+0.0dB, –3.0dB, –6.0dB

See “STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 2-34 for detailed information.

2 C H S TAT U S
INPUT
MODE
INPUT TYPE
S A M P L E R AT E
dB L
0
-6
-15
-30
-45

See “STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 2-34 for detailed information.

D STATUS

PG1

INPUT
MODE
CHANNELS
BIT RATE
EX ENCODED
dB L
0
-6
-15
-30
-45

2-30

SL SR

LFE

D STATUS
SAMPLE RATE
2.0 ENCODING
DIALOG OFFSET
MIX ROOM
CENTER MIX LVL
SURR MIX LVL

PG2

Basic Operation

RV-8

STATUS

5.1a BYPASS STATUS

Provides information about DTS(-ES) input sources. Includes L, C, R,
SL, SR, SB and LFE level meters. The SB level meter appears when a
6.1-channel input source is present, or when a 5.1-channel input
source is present and the ES DECODING parameter is set to ON.

Provides information about 5.1-channel analog input sources when
the MAIN ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to ON.

Parameter

Possible Settings

INPUT

The current input

Parameter

Possible Settings

MODE

5.1a BYPASS

INPUT

The current input

INPUT TYPE

BYPASS

MODE

The current listening mode

CHANNELS

3/3.1, 3/2.1

BIT RATE

754.5 to 1509.7 kbps

ES ENCODING

DISCRETE, MATRIX, OFF

WORD LENGTH

16 bits, 20 bits, 24 bits

SAMPLE RATE

44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz

See “STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 2-34 for detailed information.

5.1a BYPASS STATUS
INPUT
MODE
5.1a BYPASS
INPUT TYPE
BYPASS

See “STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 2-34 for detailed information.

S TAT U S

PG1

INPUT
MODE
CHANNELS
B I T R AT E
ENCODING
dB L
0
-6
-15
-30

S TATSUTAT
S US

PPGG21

WWOORRDD LLEENNGGTTHH
SSAAMMPPLLEE RRAT
ATEE

S L SR S B L F E

-45

2-31

Basic Operation

Lexicon

2CH BYPASS STATUS

DIGITAL STATUS

Provides information about 2-channel analog input sources when
the MAIN ADV menu 2-CH ANLG BYP parameter is set to ON.

Provides information about digital input sources for which a sample
rate is detected, but no audio is present in the input signal.

Parameter

Possible Settings

Parameter

Possible Settings

INPUT

The current input

INPUT

The current input

MODE

2CH BYPASS

MODE

The current listening mode

INPUT TYPE

BYPASS

INPUT TYPE

---

SAMPLE RATE

44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz

See “STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 2-34 for detailed information.

See “STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 2-34 for detailed information.
2CH BYPASS STATUS
INPUT
MODE
2CH BYPASS
INPUT TYPE
BYPASS

2-32

DIGITAL STATUS
INPUT
MODE
INPUT TYPE
SAMPLE RATE

Basic Operation

RV-8

5.1 ANALOG STATUS

LIVE! STATUS

Provides information about 5.1-channel analog input sources.

Provides information about LIVE! input sources. Features L and R
level meters.

Parameter

Possible Settings

INPUT

The current input

MODE

Parameter

Possible Settings

The current listening mode

INPUT

The current input

INPUT TYPE

ANLG

MODE

The current listening mode

SAMPLE RATE

96kHz

INPUT TYPE

MIC

SAMPLE RATE

48kHz

See “STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 2-34 for detailed information.
See “STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 2-34 for detailed information.
5.1 ANALOG STATUS
INPUT
MODE
INPUT TYPE
SAMPLE RATE

2CH STATUS
ANLG
96kHz

INPUT
DVD1
MODE
LIVE! MED
INPUT TYPE
MIC
48kHz
SAMPLE RATE
dB L
0
-6
-15
-30

-45

2-33

Basic Operation

Lexicon

STATUS MENU PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
2.0 ENCODING

MATRIX, NONE

Indicates whether or not a matrix-encoded source is detected.
When the parameter setting is MATRIX, a matrix-encoded source is
detected. When the parameter setting is NONE, a matrix-encoded
source is not detected. The RV-8 cannot automatically detect matrix
encoding in non-flagged input sources.

BIT RATE

32 to 640 kbps or 754 to 1509.7kbps

Indicates the rate at which the input signal is encoded. A higher bit
rate indicates that less compression was used during the encoding
process. Possible settings for Dolby Digital sources range from 32 to
640 kbps. Possible settings for DTS(-ES) sources range from 754 to
1509.7 kbps.

Possible settings for Dolby Digital input sources include 3/2.1, 3/2,
3/1, 2/2, 2/1, 2/0 and 1/0. Possible settings for DTS(-ES) input
sources include 3/3.1 and 3/2.1.

DIALOG OFFSET

–27 to +4dB

Indicates the dialog normalization value applied to the input signal.
Dolby Digital input sources reproduce dialog at 27 decibels below fullscale (–27dBFS). When the dialog normalization value of the incoming
signal is higher or lower, the DIALOG OFFSET parameter indicates the
amount of adjustment the RV-8 makes to normalize dialog to –27dBFS.

ES ENCODING

DISCRETE, MATRIX, OFF

Indicates the relative level of the center channel that was used
during the mixing process.

Indicates whether or not a DTS-ES-encoded source is detected.
When the parameter setting is DISCRETE, a discrete 6.1-channel
DTS-ES source is detected. When the parameter setting is MATRIX,
a 5.1-channel DTS-ES source with a surround-encoded back
channel is detected. When the parameter setting is NONE, a
standard DTS source with no DTS-ES encoding is detected.

CHANNELS

EX ENCODING

CENTER MIX LVL

–3.0dB, –4.5dB, –6.0dB

3/3.1, 3/2.1, 3/2, 3/1, 2/2, 2/1, 2/0, 1/0

Indicates the number of channels present in the input source. The
first digit indicates the number of front channels present. The digit
after the slash indicates the number of surround channels present.
The digit after the decimal point indicates the presence of LFE (lowfrequency effects) information. For instance, if the parameter setting
is 3/2.1, an input source with three front channels, two surround
channels and LFE information is present. LFE information is sent to
the Main Zone audio output connector labeled Sub.

2-34

MATRIX, NONE

Indicates whether or not a Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded source
is detected. When the parameter setting is MATRIX, a 5.1-channel
Dolby Digital source recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX is
detected. When the parameter setting is NONE, a standard 5.1channel Dolby Digital source recorded without Dolby Digital Surround
EX encoding is detected. The RV-8 cannot automatically detect Dolby
Digital Surround EX encoding in non-flagged input sources.

Basic Operation

RV-8

INPUT

SURR MIX LVL

Indicates the selected input (e.g., DVD1).

Indicates the relative surround channel level that was used during
the mixing process.

INPUT TYPE

ANLG, BYP, PCM, MIC, ---

Indicates the input source that is present. When the parameter
setting is ANLG, a 2-channel analog audio source is present and the
MAIN ADV menu 2-CH ANLG BYP parameter is set to OFF. When
the parameter setting is BYP (Bypass), a 2-channel analog audio
source is present and the 2-CH ANLG BYP parameter is set to ON.
When the parameter setting is PCM, a 2-channel digital audio
source is present. When the parameter is set to MIC, a microphone
source is present. When the parameter setting is ---, an unknown
digital audio source is present.

MIX ROOM

SMALL, LARGE

Indicates the size of the mixing room that was used during the
mixing process. When the parameter setting is LARGE, setting the
RE-EQUALIZATION parameter to ON for THX listening modes is
recommended.

MODE
Indicates the activated listening mode (e.g., L7 FILM).

SAMPLE RATE

+0.0dB, –3.0dB, –6.0dB

44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz

WORD LENGTH

16 bits, 20 bits, 24 bits

Indicates the word length of the audio data present in the input signal.

STATUS MENU LEVEL METERS
Most STATUS menus contain level meters that indicate fluctuating
input levels in the front left (L), center (C), front right (R), surround left
(SL), surround right (SR), surround back (SB) and subwoofer (SUB)
channels. These level meters indicate input levels for both analog and
digital input sources. For instance, the level meters indicate digital
audio input levels when a digital audio source is present.
Different combinations of level meters appear on each STATUS menu,
depending on the source that is present. The SB level meter appears
when a 6.1-channel source is present, or when a 5.1-channel source
is present and the ES DECODING parameter is set to ON.
Level meters appear in combinations of green, yellow and red when
the on-screen display is configured for a blue-screen background.
Green indicates low levels, yellow indicates normal levels, and red
indicates high levels and the onset of overload. Level meters appear
in white when the on-screen display is not configured for a bluescreen background.

Indicates the sample rate of the input source that is present.

2-35

3
Setup
Setup ..........................................................................................3-2
Input Setup.................................................................................3-4
Changing Input Names............................................................................. 3-5
Assigning Audio and Video Input Connectors ........................................... 3-7
Selecting Preferred Listening Modes........................................................ 3-12
Configuring Advanced Input Settings...................................................... 3-17
INPUT SELECT Parameter Settings........................................................... 3-19
ZONE2 in Parameter Settings.................................................................. 3-22

Speaker Setup ...........................................................................3-25
Setting Crossover Points.......................................................................... 3-25
Speaker Setup Parameters....................................................................... 3-29
Automatic Calibration ............................................................................. 3-36
Manual Calibration ................................................................................. 3-53

I/O Config.................................................................................3-60
Display Setup ............................................................................3-63
On-Screen Display Setup ........................................................................ 3-64
Front-panel Display Setup ....................................................................... 3-66

Volume Control Setup...............................................................3-68
Trigger Setup ............................................................................3-70
Tuner Setup ..............................................................................3-72
Tuner Region Band Limit And Increments ............................................... 3-73

Lock Options.............................................................................3-79
LIVE! CALIBRATION ...................................................................3-80

Setup

Lexicon

SETUP
Selecting SETUP from the MAIN MENU opens the SETUP menu.

I/O CONFIG
SETUP

MAIN MENU

SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

Opens the I/O CONFIG menu, which is used to configure the analog
audio input connectors as eight stereo connectors, one 5.1-channel
and five stereo connectors, or two stereo and two 5.1-channel
connectors. It can also be used to configure the amplifier outputs.
See “I/O CONFIGURATION” 3-60 for more information.

DISPLAYS
SETUP

INPUTS
SETUP

INPUTS

Prompts the selection of a desired input (e.g., DVD1) and opens the
corresponding INPUT SETUP menu, which is used to change input
names, assign audio and video input connectors, select preferred
listening modes and configure Main Zone and Zone 2 input settings.
See “INPUT SETUP” on page 3-4 for more information.

SPEAKERS
SETUP

SPEAKERS

Opens the SPEAKER SETUP menu, which is used to configure the
Main Zone audio output connectors for the desired speaker setup,
set speaker distances and calibrate output levels. See “SPEAKER
SETUP” on page 3-25 for more information.

3-2

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

Opens the DISPLAY SETUP menu, which is used to customize the onscreen and front-panel displays, restore audio/video synchronization,
and create and activate a custom unit name. See “DISPLAY SETUP”
on page 3-63 for more information.

VOLUME CONTROLS
SETUP

VOLUME CONTROLS

Opens the VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu, which is used to configure
Main Zone, Mute, Zone 2, Zone 3 and Headphone volume levels. See
“VOLUME CONTROL SETUP” on page 3-68 for more information.

TRIGGER
SETUP

TRIGGER

Opens the TRIGGER SETUP menu, which is used to configure the
trigger output connector labeled 1. See ”TRIGGER SETUP” on page
3-70 for more information.

Setup

RV-8

TUNER SETUP
SETUP

TUNER SETUP

POWER MANAGEMENT
SETUP

ON, OFF

POWER MANAGEMENT

Opens the TUNER SETUP menu, which is used to configure the AM/
FM tuner. See “TUNER SETUP” on page 3-72 for more information.

Opens the POWER MANAGEMENT menu, which is used to automatically put the RV-8 into standby mode during brownouts.

LOCK OPTIONS

When set to ON, the RV-8 detects low voltage levels or a momentary
loss of power and puts the device in standby mode. In the event of a
power brown out, the RV-8 will display a BROWN OUT!! PRESS
STANDBY message. To turn the unit back on, use the front panel
STANDYBY button.

SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

Opens the LOCK OPTIONS menu, which is used to protect MODE
ADJUST, AUDIO CONTROLS and SETUP menu branch settings from
accidental changes. For more information, see “Lock Options” on
page 3-79.

LIVE! CALIBRATION
SETUP

LIVE! CALIBRATION

Opens the LIVE! CALIBRATION menu, which is used to perform the
necessary calibration before using the LIVE! modes. See “LIVE!
CALIBRATION” on page 3-80 for more information.

When set to OFF, the RV-8 will attempt to function during a
momentary power loss, however software settings may become
corrupt and need to be reset.
When the RV-8 is in standby mode, pressing the button turns the
unit on and activates all zones that were active in the previous
operating session.

3-3

Setup

Lexicon

INPUT SETUP
SETUP

INPUTS

(INPUT)

INPUT SETUP

Selecting the SETUP menu INPUTS option prompts the selection of a desired input (e.g., DVD1). Selecting an input opens the corresponding
INPUT SETUP menu, which is used to change the input name, assign audio and video input connectors, select preferred listening modes and
configure advanced Main Zone and Zone 2 input settings.

MAIN MENU

SETUP

INPUT SETUP

DVD1 INPUT SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

DVD1
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
PHONO

DVD1
NAME
DIGITAL IN
COAX-1
ANALOG IN
NONE
ANLG IN LVL
AUTO
VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO-1
COMPONENT IN
1
2-CH
FILM
D
5.1 FILM
FILM
5.1a
5.1a FILM
MIC
LIVE! MED
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
ZONE2 ADVANCED

The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP
menu can be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input can be substituted.

All INPUT SETUP menus are shown in the Appendix on page A-6. The parameters on the left side of the INPUT SETUP menus are identical,
regardless of which input is selected. The parameter settings on the right side are adjustable. Default parameter settings differ from input to input.
The INPUT SETUP menus shown in the Appendix indicate factory-default parameter settings for each input.

3-4

Setup

RV-8

CHANGING INPUT NAMES
Selecting the INPUT SETUP menu NAME parameter opens the INPUT NAME menu, which is used to customize or restore the factory-default name
of the selected input. Factory-default input names correspond to front-panel and remote-control input selection button labels.

SETUP

INPUT SETUP

DVD1 INPUT SETUP

DVD1 INPUT NAME

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

DVD1
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
PHONO

NAME
DVD1
DIGITAL IN
COAX-1
ANALOG IN
NONE
ANLG IN LVL
AUTO
VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO-1
COMPONENT IN
1
2-CH
FILM
5.1 FILM
D
FILM
5.1a
5.1a FILM
LIVE! MED
MIC
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
ZONE2 ADVANCED

EDIT INPUT NAME
RESTORE DEFAULT NAME

EDIT INPUT NAME
DVD1
>

MAIN MENU

BUTTONS TO EDIT
UP TO 8 CHARACTERS
BUTTON TO ADVANCE

EDIT INPUT NAME
SETUP

INPUTS

DVD1

NAME

EDIT INPUT NAME

Opens the EDIT INPUT NAME drop-down menu, which is used to
customize the name of the selected input. Custom input names can
include up to eight characters.
To customize the name of the selected input:
1. Follow the EDIT INPUT NAME menu path to open the EDIT INPUT
NAME drop-down menu.
2. When the EDIT INPUT NAME menu opens, the current input
name appears on the second line. Using the remote-control
and
arrow buttons, change the character above the cursor (^).
3. When the desired character has been changed, press the
arrow
button to advance to the next character space. The cursor will

automatically wrap to the first character space when the last
character space is passed.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter all characters in the new name.
5. When the desired input name has been entered, press the arrow
button to close the menu and return to the INPUT NAME menu.
The custom input name appears in the on-screen and front-panel
displays. Both the custom and factory-default input names appear in
the INPUT SETUP menu. The custom input name appears against the
left margin of the on-screen display, and the factory-default input
name appears in parentheses against the right margin.

3-5

Setup

Lexicon

MAIN MENU

SETUP

INPUT SETUP

DVD1 INPUT SETUP

DVD1 INPUT NAME

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

DVD1
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
PHONO

DVD1
NAME
DIGITAL IN
COAX-1
ANALOG IN
NONE
ANLG IN LVL
AUTO
VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO-1
COMPONENT IN
1
2-CH
FILM
D
5.1 FILM
FILM
5.1a
5.1a FILM
MIC
LIVE! MED
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
ZONE2 ADVANCED

EDIT INPUT NAME
RESTORE DEFAULT NAME

PRESS MENU V TO
RESTORE INPUT NAME

RESTORE DEFAULT NAME
SETUP

INPUTS

DVD1

NAME

RESTORE DEFAULT NAME

Restores the factory-default name of the selected input. Factorydefault input names correspond to front-panel and remote-control
input selection button labels.

3. When the RESTORE DEFAULT NAME option is highlighted, press
the
arrow button to select this option. The message “PRESS
MENU V TO RESTORE INPUT NAME” appears in the on-screen
and front-panel displays.

To restore the factory-default name of the selected input:

4. When this message appears, press the
arrow button to restore
the factory-default name of the selected input and close the
message. (Press the
arrow button to close the message
without restoring the factory-default name of the selected input.)

1. Follow the RESTORE DEFAULT NAME menu path to open the
INPUT NAME menu.
2. When the INPUT NAME menu opens, press the remote control
and
arrow buttons to highlight the RESTORE DEFAULT NAME
option.

3-6

Setup

RV-8

ASSIGNING AUDIO and VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS
The RV-8 has eight configurable inputs, each of which can be assigned to its eight digital audio, eight analog audio, the built-in tuner, the phono
input, five composite video, five S-Video or three component video input connectors.
MAIN MENU

SETUP

INPUT SETUP

DVD1 INPUT SETUP

DVD1 DIGITAL IN

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

DVD1
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
PHONO

NAME
DVD1
DIGITAL IN
COAX-1
ANALOG IN
NONE
ANLG IN LVL
AUTO
VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO-1
COMPONENT IN
1
2-CH
FILM
D
5.1 FILM
FILM
5.1a
5.1a FILM
MIC
LIVE! MED
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
ZONE2 ADVANCED

COAX-1
COAX-2
COAX-3
COAX-4
OPTICAL-1
OPTICAL-2
OPTICAL-3
OPTICAL-4
NONE

The table below indicates the INPUT SETUP menu parameters that
can be used to assign audio and video input connectors. The ANLG
IN LVL parameter can be used to adjust 2-channel analog audio input
levels for the selected input.

DIGITAL IN
SETUP

INPUTS

COAX-1 TO 4, OPTICAL-1 TO 4, NONE
DVD1

DIGITAL IN

Opens the DIGITAL IN menu, which is used to assign a digital audio
input connector for the selected input. The RV-8 has eight configurable inputs, each of which can be assigned to any of its eight digital
audio input connectors.

Parameter

Possible Settings

DIGITAL IN

COAX-1 to 4, OPTICAL-1 to 4, NONE

ANALOG IN

ANALOG-1 to 8, 5.1 ANLG (3-5) or (6-8), PHONO,
TUNER, NONE, LIVE!

Please note the following:

ANLG IN LVL

AUTO, –18dB to +12dB

•

VIDEO IN

COMPOSITE-1 to 5, S-VIDEO-1 to 5, NONE

When no digital audio input connector is assigned, the RV-8 will
automatically set the MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT
parameter to ANALOG (see page 3-17).

•

A digital audio input connector must be assigned when no
analog audio input connector is assigned. Refer to the next page
for information about assigning an analog audio input
connector.

COMPONENT IN COMPONENT-1 to 3, VIDEO, NONE
Note:
The digital audio input connectors are compatible with PCM (44.1, 48,
88.2 and 96kHz), Dolby Digital and DTS (-ES) sources. The digital audio
input connectors are not compatible with MPEG or MP3 sources.

3-7

Setup

Lexicon

ASSIGNING AUDIO and VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS

(continued)

MAIN MENU

SETUP

INPUT SETUP

DVD1 INPUT SETUP

DVD1 ANALOG IN

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

DVD1
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
PHONO

NAME
DVD1
DIGITAL IN
COAX-1
ANALOG IN
NONE
ANLG IN LVL
AUTO
S-VIDEO-1
VIDEO IN
1
COMPONENT IN
FILM
2-CH
5.1 FILM
D
FILM
5.1a
5.1a FILM
LIVE! MED
MIC
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
ZONE2 ADVANCED

ANALOG-1
ANALOG-2
ANALOG-3
ANALOG-4
ANALOG-5
ANALOG-6
ANALOG-7
ANALOG-8
PHONO
TUNER
NONE
LIVE!

ANALOG-1
ANALOG-2
ANALOG-3
ANALOG-4
ANALOG-5
5.1 ANLG (6-8)
PHONO
TUNER
NONE
LIVE!

ANALOG-1
ANALOG-2
5.1 ANLG (3-5)
5.1 ANLG (6-8)
PHONO
TUNER
NONE
LIVE!

ANALOG IN
SETUP

INPUTS

ANALOG-1 to 8, 5.1 ANLG (3-5) or (6-8), PHONO, TUNER, NONE, LIVE!
DVD1

ANALOG IN

Opens the ANALOG IN menu, which is used to assign an analog
audio input connector for the selected input. The RV-8 has eight
configurable inputs, each of which can be assigned to any of its eight
analog audio input connectors.

Please note the following:
•

When no analog audio input connector is assigned, the RV-8
automatically sets the MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT
parameter to DIGITAL (see page 3-17).

The appearance of the ANALOG IN menu depends on the configuration of the analog audio input connectors.

•

The ANALOG IN menu (A above) appears when the I/O CONFIG
menu 8 STEREO INPUTS option is selected (see page 3-60).

An analog audio input connector must be assigned when no
digital audio input connector is assigned. Refer to the previous
page for information about assigning a digital audio input
connector.

•

The ANALOG IN menu (B above) appears when the I/O CONFIG
menu 5 ST. & 5.1 ANLG option is selected (see page 3-61).

The PHONO input corresponds to the built-in phono
connector.

•

The TUNER input corresponds with the internal AM/FM radio
tuner.

•

LIVE! cannot be selected until LIVE! CALIBRATION is run. When
the ANALOG IN selection is LIVE!, the digital input selection is
disabled for this input until a different analog input is selected.

•
•
•

3-8

The ANALOG IN menu (C above) appears when the I/O
CONFIG menu 2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG option is selected (see
page 3-61).

Setup

RV-8

MAIN MENU

SETUP

INPUT SETUP

DVD1 INPUT SETUP

DVD1 ANLG IN LVL

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

DVD1
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
PHONO

NAME
DVD1
DIGITAL IN
COAX-1
ANALOG IN
NONE
ANLG IN LVL
AUTO
VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO-1
COMPONENT IN
1
2-CH
FILM
5.1 FILM
D
FILM
5.1a
5.1a FILM
LIVE! MED
MIC
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
ZONE2 ADVANCED

AUTO
MANUAL

ANLG IN LVL
SETUP

INPUTS

ON
+0.dB

AUTO GAIN
dB L
0
-6
-15
-30

ON
OFF
-18 to +12dB

+0.0dB

-45

AUTO, –18dB to +12dB
DVD1

ANLG IN LVL

Opens the ANLG IN LVL menu, which is used to adjust the 2-channel
analog audio input levels for the selected input. Despite attempts at
standardization, analog audio sources have a wide range of levels. To
compensate for this, the RV-8 allows independent input level
adjustment for each of its stereo and multichannel analog audio
input connectors, phono input and the internal tuner. Input level
adjustment is not available when analog bypass is on.
Parameter

Possible Settings

AUTO

ON, OFF

MANUAL

–18 to +12dB

AUTO GAIN*

–18 to +12dB

Note:
Adjustments made in the ANLG IN LVL menu are applied to the analog
audio input connector assigned for the selected input, these adjustments
are automatically applied to the new connector.

* This parameter cannot be adjusted.

3-9

Setup

Lexicon

ASSIGNING AUDIO and VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS
AUTO
SETUP

(continued)

ON, OFF
INPUTS

DVD1

ANLG IN LVL

AUTO

SETUP

Provides automatic adjustment of analog audio input levels. When
set to ON, the RV-8 automatically monitors and optimizes input
levels. When the input signal is too high, the RV-8 quickly decreases
input levels to avoid overload. When the input signal is too low, the
RV-8 slowly increases input levels to maximize signal-to-noise ratio
and dynamic range.
When OFF is selected, the RV-8 does not automatically monitor and
optimize analog audio input levels. Rather, input levels must be
adjusted with the MANUAL parameter (see below).

MANUAL
SETUP

INPUTS

DVD1

ANLG IN LVL

AUTO GAIN

Indicates the current amount of input level adjustment for the
selected analog audio input connector. When the ANLG IN LVL menu
AUTO parameter is ON, the AUTO GAIN parameter indicates the
amount of automatic input level adjustment. When the AUTO
parameter is OFF, the AUTO GAIN parameter indicates the amount of
manual input level adjustment. (In other words, the AUTO GAIN
parameter reflects the setting of the ANLG IN LVL menu MANUAL
parameter.)
When the AUTO parameter is ON, the AUTO GAIN parameter
continues to indicate the amount of manual input level adjustment
until automatic adjustments have been made.

–18dB to +12dB
DVD1

ANLG IN LVL

MANUAL

Provides manual adjustment of analog audio input levels. When
manual adjustments are made, the RV-8 automatically sets the ANLG
IN LVL menu AUTO parameter to OFF, deactivating automatic input
level adjustment. Manual input level adjustments are retained when
the AUTO parameter is ON.
Note:
When the AUTO parameter is ON, the RV-8 will not make adjustments
that exceed the ANLG IN LVL menu MANUAL parameter setting.

3-10

AUTO GAIN

LEVEL METERS
SETUP

INPUTS

DVD1

ANLG IN LVL

Indicate fluctuating input levels for the selected input. Like the
STATUS menu level meters, ANLG IN LVL menu level meters indicate
input levels for both analog and digital audio sources. However,
ANLG IN LVL menu input level adjustments affect only analog audio
sources.
Level meters appear in combinations of green, yellow and red when
the on-screen display is configured for a blue-screen background.
Green indicates low levels; yellow indicates normal levels; and red
indicates the onset of overload. Level meters appear in white when
the on-screen display is not configured for a blue-screen background.

Setup

RV-8

VIDEO IN
SETUP

INPUTS

COMPOSITE-1 TO 5, S-VIDEO-1 TO 5, NONE
DVD1

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN
SETUP

INPUTS

COMPONENT-1 to 3, VIDEO, NONE
DVD1

COMPONENT IN

Opens the VIDEO IN menu, which is used to assign a composite or
S-Video input connector for the selected input. The RV-8 has eight
configurable inputs, each of which can be assigned to any of its five
composite or five S-Video input connectors.

Opens the COMPONENT IN menu, which is used to assign a
component video input connector for the selected input. The RV-8
has eight configurable inputs, each of which can be assigned to any
of its three component video input connectors.

Note:

Alternatively, COMPONENT IN can be assigned to VIDEO. This will
cause the composite or S-Video signal selected for the VIDEO IN
parameter to be converted to component input. The NONE setting
shuts off the component output.

Composite video output connectors are available when a composite or
S-Video source is present.
S-Video output connectors are available when an S-Video source is
present.

Note:
When the component is set to NONE, black and blue lines appear on the
screen if the monitor does not have auto-sense.

MAIN MENU

SETUP

INPUT SETUP

DVD1 INPUT SETUP

DVD1 VIDEO IN

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

DVD1
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
PHONO

DVD1
NAME
DIGITAL IN
COAX-1
NONE
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
AUTO
VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO-1
COMPONENT IN
1
2-CH
FILM
5.1 FILM
D
FILM
5.1a
5.1a FILM
MIC
LIVE! MED
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
ZONE2 ADVANCED

COMPOSITE-1
COMPOSITE-2
COMPOSITE-3
COMPOSITE-4
COMPOSITE-5
S-VIDEO-1
S-VIDEO-2
S-VIDEO-3
S-VIDEO-4
S-VIDEO-5
NONE

DVD1 COMPONENT IN
COMPONENT-1
COMPONENT-2
COMPONENT-3
VIDEO
NONE

3-11

Setup

Lexicon

SELECTING PREFERRED LISTENING MODES
Preferred listening modes can be pre-selected so that when a
particular type of input source is played, the pre-selected listening
mode is activated.
The RV-8 allows five preferred listening modes for each Main Zone
input: one listening mode each for 2-channel, Dolby Digital,
DTS(-ES), 5.1a and MIC (LIVE!) sources. The table to the right
indicates the INPUT SETUP menu parameters that can be used to
select preferred listening modes.

Preferred Listening Mode Selection Parameters
2-CH
D

Selects a preferred listening mode for 2-channel sources
Selects a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital sources
Selects a preferred listening mode for DTS(-ES) sources

5.1a

Selects a preferred listening mode for 5.1 analog sources

MIC

Selects a preferred listening mode for microphone sources (LIVE!)

Menus showing DVD1 parameters selected as preferred listening modes.

MAIN MENU

SETUP

INPUT SETUP

DVD1 INPUT SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

DVD1
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
PHONO

DVD1
NAME
DIGITAL IN
COAX-1
NONE
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
AUTO
VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO-1
COMPONENT IN
1
2-CH
FILM
5.1 FILM
D
FILM
5.1a
5.1a FILM
MIC
LIVE! MED
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
ZONE2 ADVANCED

DVD1

MODE
FILM
MUSIC

2-CHAN
HEADPHONE
USE LAST

3-12

DVD1 5.1a MODE
5.1a
FILM
MUSIC
5.1a
5.1a
5.1a STANDARD
5.1a 2-CHANNEL
HEADPHONE 5.1a
USE LAST

DVD1 MIC MODE
LIVE! SMALL
LIVE! MED
LIVE! LARGE
USE LAST

DVD1 2-CH MODE

DVD1
5.1
5.1
5.1

D MODE
FILM
TV
MUSIC

DIGITAL
5.1 2-CHANNEL
5.1 MONO LOGIC
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO
HEADPHONE 5.1
USE LAST

FILM
TV
MUSIC
MUSIC SURR
PLII +
PLII MOVIE
PLII MUSIC
PL +
PRO LOGIC
NIGHTCLUB
CONCERT HALL
CHURCH
CATHEDRAL
PANORAMA
2-CH SURROUND
2-CHANNEL
MONO LOGIC
MONO SURROUND
MONO
HEADPHONE
USE LAST

Setup

RV-8
When a preferred listening mode is selected, that listening mode is
automatically activated whenever a new input is selected or an
appropriate input source is present. For example, the following can
occur when a preferred listening mode is activated (also refer to the
corresponding menus on 3-12):
If the DVD1 input is selected and a 2-channel source is played, the
L7 FILM listening mode is activated. If a Dolby Digital source is
played, the 5.1 L7 FILM listening mode is activated. If a DTS(-ES)
source is played, the DTS(-ES) L7 FILM listening mode is activated.

Dynamic Listening Modes
Dynamic listening modes are only available under certain conditions.
For example, many of the dynamic modes are only available when
the RV-8 is configured for seven main output channels and source
material with specific encoding is played. All Dynamic Listening
Modes are available through the remote control or front panel Mode
button. The dynamic listening modes are listed in the table below.

Dynamic modes
2-Channel

Dolby Digital

DTS

Dolby PLIIx + THX
Dolby PLIIx MOV
Dolby PLIIx MUS
DTS NEO:6 + THX
DTS NEO:6 CIN
DTS NEO:6 MUSIC

Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital EX
THX or THX UL2Cin or THX SurEX
THX MUSIC
5.1 PLIIx MOV
5.1 PLIIx MUS

DTS THX or DTS THX UL2Cin or DTS ES THX
DTS or DTS ES MATRIX or DTS ES DISCR
DTS THX MUSIC
DTS L7 FILM or DTS ES L7 FILM
DTS L7 MUSIC or DTS ES L7 MUSIC
DTS 2-CHAN or DTS ES 2-CHAN

Modes that Do Not Appear in the Input Setup Menu
The RV-8 features the ability to assign preferred listening modes for
each input and incoming audio format. However, not all listening
modes will appear in the Input Setup Menu. Listening modes that do

not appear in the Input Setup menu as preferred listening modes
under any circumstances are listed in the table below.

Modes that do not appear in the Input Setup menu
2-Channel

Dolby Digital

DTS

Dolby PLIIx + THX
Dolby PLIIx MOV
Dolby PLIIx MUS
DTS NEO:6 + THX
DTS NEO:6 CIN
DTS NEO:6 MUSIC

THX MUSIC
5.1 PLIIx MOV
5.1 PLIIx MUS

DTS THX MUSIC
5.1 MONO LOGIC
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO

3-13

Setup
SELECTING PREFERRED LISTENING MODES

Lexicon
(continued)

The Use Last Parameter
When the RV-8 is set to use a preferred listening mode for a selected
input, selecting another mode from the Mode scroll list replaces the
preferred selection. However, this newly selected mode will be lost
when switching between inputs.
The USE LAST parameter was designed to allow the RV-8 software to
“remember” the last used listening mode for a given input source.
Once selected, that mode will always be active on the corresponding
input until another listening mode is selected as demonstrated in the
following example:
1.

Select Main Menu SETUP INPUTS DVD1

USE LAST.

2. Press the MENU button.
3. Press the DVD-1 button.
4. Play a DTS input source.

and a dynamic listening mode (or mode that does not appear in the
input setup menu) is active, the selected dynamic mode is lost when
switching between inputs.
When USE LAST is selected as the preferred listening mode, and a
dynamic listening mode (or mode that does not appear in the input
setup menu) is active, the selected listening mode is retained when
switching between inputs, even when the RV-8 is set to standby as in
the following example:
1.

Select Main Menu SETUP INPUTS DVD1 2-CH

2. Press the MENU button.
3. Press the DVD-1 button.
4. Play a 2-channel input source.
5. Press the MODE + button until you reach

The RV-8 switches to the TV input and the on-screen display
identifies the preferred listening mode.

PLIIx MOV.

PLIIx MOV is a dynamic listening mode.

5. Press the MODE + button until you reach DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN.
6. Press the TV button

USE LAST.

6. Press the TV button
The RV-8 switches to the TV input and the on-screen display
identifies the preferred listening mode.

7. Press the DVD-1 button.

The on-screen display should identify that the active listening mode
for the DVD1 input is still DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN. As the DTS(-ES)
2-CHAN mode is a preferred listening mode, it can also be set in
the SETUP menu.

The on-screen display should identify that the active listening mode
for the DVD1 input is still
PLIIx MOV. This is the only method of
setting up a dynamic mode (or mode that does not appear in the
input setup menu) to behave like a preferred listening mode.

When seven speakers are selected in the SPEAKER SETUP menu, and
the appropriate source material is played, the dynamic listening
mode (or mode that does not appear in the input setup menu) can
always be accessed using the MODE + or MODE - buttons whether
or not a preferred mode is set. When a preferred listening mode is set

Note:

3-14

When a dynamic mode (or mode that does not appear in the input setup
menu) is set as in the above example, the setting is retained even when
the RV-8 is set to standby.

Setup

RV-8

2-CH
SETUP

DOLBY D
INPUTS

DVD1

2-CH

Opens the 2-CH MODE menu, which is used to select a preferred
listening mode for 2-channel input sources. The RV-8 activates the
selected listening mode whenever a 2-channel source is present.

SETUP

INPUTS

DVD1

Opens the DOLBY DIGITAL MODE menu, which is used to select a
preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital input sources. The RV-8
activates the selected listening mode whenever a new input is
selected or a new Dolby Digital source is present.

When the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST:
The RV-8 activates the listening mode that was activated the last time
a 2-channel source was present
The remote control 2 CH button toggles between the 2-CHANNEL
listening mode and the previous listening mode, and ignores the USE
LAST setting. Instead, it uses the listening mode (for example, L7
FILM) that was activated before the 2-CHANNEL listening mode.
The RV-8 activates a DTS NEO:6 listening mode if a DTS NEO:6
listening mode was activated the last time a 2-channel source was
present, and a 44.1kHz or 48kHz PCM digital source is present. Since
the DTS NEO:6 listening modes are dynamic, they cannot be
selected as the preferred listening mode for 2-channel sources.

When the DOLBY D parameter is set to USE LAST:
The RV-8 activates the listening mode that was activated the last time
a Dolby Digital source was present
The RV-8 activates the Dolby PLIIx MOV (Movie) listening mode if
this listening mode was activated the last time a Dolby Digital source
was present. Since Dolby PLIIx MOV is a dynamic listening mode, it
cannot be selected as the preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital
sources.

3-15

Setup

Lexicon

SELECTING PREFERRED LISTENING MODES (continued)
5.1a
SETUP

INPUTS

SETUP

DVD1

INPUTS

DVD1

5.1a

Opens the DTS(-ES) MODE menu, which is used to select a preferred
listening mode for DTS(-ES) input sources. The RV-8 automatically
activates the selected listening mode whenever a new input is selected or
a new DTS(-ES) source is present.

Opens the 5.1a MODE menu, which is used to select a preferred
listening mode for 5.1-channel analog sources. The RV-8 automatically
activates the preferred listening mode whenever a 5.1-channel analog
source is present.

When the DTS-ES parameter is set to USE LAST:

When the 5.1a parameter is set to USE LAST:

•

The RV-8 activates the listening mode that was activated the
last time a DTS(-ES) source was present

•

The RV-8 activates the DTS THX MUSIC listening mode if it was
activated the last time a DTS(-ES) source was present. Since
DTS THX MUSIC is a dynamic listening mode, it cannot be
selected as the preferred listening mode for DTS(-ES) sources.

The RV-8 activates the 5.1-channel analog listening mode that was
activated the last time a 5.1-channel analog source was present. 5.1a
MUSIC cannot be selected as the preferred listening mode for 5.1channel analog sources. However, when the 5.1a parameter is set to
USE LAST, the RV-8 will activate 5.1a MUSIC if this listening mode
was activated the last time a 5.1-channel analog source was present.

MIC
SETUP

INPUTS

DVD1

MIC

Opens the MIC MODE menu, which is used to select a preferred
listening mode for the LIVE! source. The RV-8 automatically activates
the preferred listening mode when a LIVE! input is selected.
When the MIC parameter is set to USE LAST:
The RV-8 activates the listening mode (LIVE! SMALL, LIVE! MED or
LIVE! LARGE) that was activated the last time a MIC source was
present.

3-16

Setup

RV-8

CONFIGURING ADVANCED INPUT SETTINGS
MAIN MENU

SETUP

INPUT SETUP

DVD1 INPUT SETUP

DVD1 MAIN ADV

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

DVD1
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
PHONO

NAME
DVD1
DIGITAL IN
COAX-1
ANALOG IN
NONE
ANLG IN LVL
AUTO
S-VIDEO-1
VIDEO IN
1
COMPONENT IN
FILM
2-CH
5.1 FILM
D
FILM
5.1a
5.1a FILM
LIVE! MED
MIC
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
ZONE2 ADVANCED

DIGITAL
INPUT SELECT
OFF
ANALOG BYPASS
AUTO
S-VIDEO 16:9
ON
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
OFF
COMPONENT OSD
A
LEGACY VIDEO
FAST
FORMAT DETECT

SETUP

INPUTS

DVD1

MAIN ADVANCED

SETUP

INPUTS

AUTO
OFF
ON
OFF
A
B

DIGITAL
ANGL
DMIX

INPUT SELECT

MAIN ADVANCED

DIGITAL
ANALOG
AUTO

NORMAL
FAST

DIGITAL, ANALOG, AUTO
DVD1

MAIN ADVANCED

INPUT SELECT

Selecting the INPUT SETUP menu MAIN ADVANCED option opens
the MAIN ADV menu shown above. The parameters on the left side
of this menu are identical, regardless of which input is selected. The
settings on the right side are adjustable. Default parameter settings
differ from input to input.

Controls the interaction of the digital and analog audio input
connectors assigned to the current Main Zone input. The INPUT
SETUP menu is used to assign one digital and one analog audio input
connector for the selected input. The table on page 3-19 describes
INPUT SELECT parameter settings.

Parameter

Possible Settings

Note:

INPUT SELECT
ANLOG BYPASS
S-VIDEO 16:9
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
COMPONENT OSD
LEGACY VIDEO
FORMAT DETECT

DIGITAL, ANALOG, AUTO
ON, OFF
AUTO, OFF
ON, OFF
ON, OFF
A, B
NORMAL, FAST

When the INPUT SELECT parameter is set to AUTO, the RV-8 will not select
the assigned analog audio input connector when a valid digital audio
input source is present. Some DVD and CD players output digital signals
(data) when the player is paused or stopped or when the player is
powered on and the disc drawer is empty. When this occurs, the RV-8
automatically selects the assigned digital audio input connector.

3-17

Setup

Lexicon

CONFIGURING ADVANCE INPUT SETTINGS (continued)
ANALOG BYPASS
SETUP

INPUTS

DVD1

ON, OFF
MAIN ADVANCED

ANALOG BYPASS

When set to ON, the RV-8 passes the analog input signal to the Main
Zone audio output connectors. For stereo analog sources, the input is
sent to the FRONT L/R outputs. For a 5.1-channel analog source, the
(L) input is sent to the FRONT L output. The (R) input is sent to the
FRONT R output. The (C) input is sent to the center output. The
(SUB) input is sent to the SUB output. The (LS) input is sent to the
SIDE L and REAR L outputs. The (RS) input is sent to the SIDE R and
REAR R outputs. When ANALOG BYPASS is set to OFF, the unit routes
the analog input signal through A/D conversion. This makes it
possible to utilize internal processing, including listening modes,
crossovers and equalization. Neither Zone 2 nor Zone 3 provide
multichannel outputs. If the 5.1-channel analog input is selected for
Zone 2 or Zone 3, only the front left and right (L)/(R) inputs will be
available.
When LIVE! is the selected analog input, the MAIN ADVANCED
INPUT SELECT parameter is forced to ANALOG, and ANALOG
BYPASS is disabled.
Note:
If the Main Zone source is 5.1 analog, only the Front L/R channels will be
sent to the Zone 2 S/PDIF outputs.

3-18

S-VIDEO 16:9
SETUP

INPUTS

AUTO, OFF
DVD1

MAIN ADVANCED

S-VIDEO 16:9

Controls the passage of anamorphic trigger signals present in some
video sources. When set to AUTO, the RV-8 allows anamorphic video
input signals to pass through the S-Video switcher, enabling
compatible display devices to automatically switch between
anamorphic and non-anamorphic display modes.
When OFF, the RV-8 prevents anamorphic video input signals from
passing through the S-Video switcher, preventing compatible
display devices from automatically switching between anamorphic
and non-anamorphic display modes.

Setup

RV-8

INPUT SELECT PARAMETER SETTINGS
DIGITAL

ANALOG

AUTO

The RV-8 sends the assigned digital audio
input connector to the Main Zone audio
output connectors. The RV-8 ignores the
assigned analog audio input connector.

The RV-8 sends the assigned analog audio input
connector to the Main Zone audio output
connectors. The RV-8 ignores the digital audio
input connector.

The RV-8 toggles between sending the assigned
digital and analog audio input connectors to the
Main Zone audio output connectors, based on the
input source that is present.

Note the following:

For example:

•

The digital audio input connectors
are compatible with PCM (44.1, 48,
88.2 and 96kHz), Dolby Digital and
DTS(-ES) sources.

•

The RV-8 automatically sets the INPUT
SELECT parameter to ANALOG when the
DIGITAL IN parameter is set to NONE.

•

The digital audio input connectors
are not compatible with MPEG or
MP3 sources. If an incompatible
digital audio source (e.g., MPEG or
MP3) is present, the RV-8 automatically selects the assigned analog
audio input connector.

The ANALOG IN parameter can be used to
assign an analog audio input connector
for the selected input.

When a 2-channel PCM, Dolby Digital or
DTS(-ES ) source is presen t, th e RV-8
automatically selects the assigned digital
audio input connector.

•

When an SACDTM source is present, the RV8 automatically selects the assigned analog
audio input connector.

•

•
•

The RV-8 automatically sets the
INPUT SELECT parameter to DIGITAL
when the ANALOG IN parameter is
set to NONE.
If ANALOG IN is set to NONE, the
RV-8 will mute.
The DIGITAL IN parameter can be
used to assign a digital audio input
connector for the selected input.

Note the following:
•

The RV-8 automatically sets the INPUT SELECT
parameter to AUTO when both digital and
analog audio input connectors are assigned.

•

When no compatible digital source is
present, the RV-8 automatically selects the
assigned analog audio input connector.

•

The AUTO setting is recommended for
components that generate both digital and
analog input signals, such as DVD/SACD
players.

3-19

Setup

Lexicon

CONFIGURING ADVANCE INPUT SETTINGS (continued)
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
SETUP

INPUTS

DVD1

ON, OFF
MAIN ADVANCED

S-VIDEO OSD 4-3

Controls the appearance of the on-screen display when the display
device is connected to an S-Video output connector. When set to
ON, the display device shows the on-screen display in a 4:3 aspect
ratio, regardless of the incoming signal.
Aspect ratio refers to the ratio between the height and width of the
picture on the display device or to the ratio between the height and
width of the display device. A 4:3 aspect ratio is almost square. A
16:9 aspect ratio, often referred to as “widescreen,” is almost twice as
wide as it is high.
When OFF, the display device shows the on-screen display in the
same aspect ratio as the incoming video input signal.
Note:
The on-screen display appears horizontally stretched across the display
device screen when all of the following conditions are present:
•
•
•

The S-VIDEO OSD 4:3 parameter is OFF.
An anamorphic video input signal is present.
A 16:9 display device (widescreen) is connected to an S-Video
output connector.

3-20

COMPONENT OSD
SETUP

INPUTS

DVD1

ON, OFF
MAIN ADVANCED

COMPONENT OSD

Controls the appearance of the on-screen display when the display
device is connected to the component video output connector.
When ON, the display device shows the on-screen display as a 480i
video signal on a full blue-screen background. To minimize viewing
distractions, the two-line status does not appear in the on-screen
display. When OFF, the display device does not show the on-screen
display, including the two-line status.
Note:
When the ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu BACKGROUND parameter is OFF,
the display device using the component video output connector will not
show the on-screen display.

Setup

RV-8

LEGACY VIDEO
SETUP

INPUTS

A, B
DVD1

MAIN ADVANCED

LEGACY VIDEO

ZONE2 IN
SETUP

INPUTS

DIGITAL, ANLG, DMIX
DVD1

ZONE2 IN

When video played back from a VCR is converted to component
video by the RV-8, the resulting picture quality depends on both the
quality of the VCR playback and the capabilities of the component
display device. The LEGACY VIDEO menu item has two selections, A
and B. Use the one that gives the best picture for the Combination of
the VCR and display device.

Controls the interaction of the digital and analog audio input
connectors assigned to the current Zone 2 inputs. The INPUT SETUP
menu can be used to assign one digital and one analog input
connector for the selected input. See page 3-7 for more information.
The table on the next page describes ZONE2 IN parameter settings.

Note:

Note

Some combinations of VCR and display device may not produce a
satisfactory picture with either setting. In such cases, better results may be
achieved by connecting to the display device via composite or S-video.

When using DTS-encoded discs, set the ZONE2 IN parameter to DMIX.

FORMAT DETECT
SETUP

INPUTS

DVD1

NORMAL, FAST
MAIN ADVANCED

FORMAT DETECT

When the ZONE2 IN parameter is set to DIGITAL, the unit recognizes
DTS-encoded discs as audio signals (not data signals) and outputs
loud digital noise from the ZONE2 analog and digital audio outputs.
For maximum flexibility with Dolby Digital and DTS (-ES) sources:
1. Select a Main Zone DIGITAL IN connector.

Controls how the RV-8 reacts when it detects silence in the digital
audio stream. Digital sources typically output a short period of silence
when switching between sources.

2. Set the ZONE2 IN parameter to ANLG.

When set to NORMAL, the RV-8 will not mute when silence is
detected. This setting is appropriate for most sources.

The unit will use the digital connector for the Main Zone, and the
analog connectors for Zone 2.

3. Connect the digital and analog outputs on the DVD player to the
corresponding digital and analog inputs on the RV-8.

When set to FAST, the RV-8 will mute when approximately 2ms of
continuous digital silence is detected. Once valid audio is received,
the RV-8 will configure its processing and deactivate mute. This
prevents digital noise from occurring during digital audio signal
changes. For example, when switching from Dolby Digital to DTS.
Use this setting if audible noise occurs during input digital format
changes.

3-21

Setup

Lexicon

ZONE2 IN PARAMETER SETTINGS
DIGITAL
•

The RV-8 automatically sets
the ZONE2 IN parameter to
DIGITAL when the ANALOG
IN parameter is set to NONE.

•

The RV-8 sends the assigned
D I G I TA L I N c o n n e c t o r
specified in the INPUT SETUP
menu to the ZONE 2
ANALOG and DIGITAL AUDIO
OUTPUTS.

•

3-22

Only PCM digital input
sources are compatible with
ZONE 2 analog audio
outputs. Dolby Digital and
DTS sources are compatible
with the Zone 2 digital audio
output when the DIG BYPASS
parameter is set to ON.
Audio will not be available in
Zone 2 analog outputs when
a Dolby Digital, DTS (-ES) or
unknown digital input source
is present.

ANLG (Analog)
•

The ANALOG IN connector
specified in the INPUT SETUP
menu is sent to the ZONE 2
ANALOG and DIGITAL AUDIO
OUTPUTS.

•

Only Front L/R Audio will be
available in Zone 2 when one
of the 5.1 analog inputs is
selected for the Main Zone.

DMIX (Downmix)
•

Set the ZONE2 IN parameter to DMIX to send a downmixed
version of Main Zone audio to the Zone 2 audio output
connectors. Downmixes can be generated for Dolby Digital,
DTS(-ES) and 5.1a sources.

•

To generate a downmix, the same input must be selected in
the Main Zone and Zone 2. Otherwise, the Zone 2 audio
output connectors will mute.

•

Main Zone listening mode activation affects the Zone 2 audio
output connectors. For instance, when the MONO listening
mode is activated in the Main Zone, the Zone 2 audio output
connectors will generate mono output signals.

•

It is recommended that you set the ZONE2 IN parameter to
DMIX when recording from a DVD player without built-in
Dolby Digital or DTS-ES decoding to a VCR or PVR (e.g. Tivo®
or Replay TV®).

•

A 2-channel downmixed version of Main Zone audio is sent to
the ZONE 2 ANALOG and DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUTS.
Downmixes can be generated for Dolby Digital, DTS(-ES) and
5.1 analog input sources. To generate a downmix, the input
that is selected in Zone 2 must also be selected in the Main
Zone (e.g., DVD1). Otherwise, the ZONE 2 ANALOG and
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUTS will mute. Downmixes cannot be
generated when the 5.1a BYPASS listening mode is selected in
the Main Zone.

Setup

RV-8

ZONE2 ADVANCED
SETUP

INPUTS

DVD1

ZONE2 ADVANCED

Opens the ZONE2 IN menu, which is used to configure advanced

MAIN MENU

SETUP

INPUT SETUP

DVD1 INPUT SETUP

DVD1 ZONE2 ADVANCED

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

DVD1
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
PHONO

NAME
DVD1
DIGITAL IN
COAX-1
ANALOG IN
NONE
ANLG IN LVL
AUTO
VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO-1
COMPONENT IN
1
2-CH
FILM
D
5.1 FILM
FILM
5.1a
5.1a FILM
MIC
LIVE! MED
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
ZONE2 ADVANCED

+0dB
ANLG IN LVL
OFF
DIGITAL BYPASS
44.1kHz
DIG OUT RATE
ENABLED
RECORD

Parameter

Possible Settings

ANLG IN LVL
DIGITAL BYPASS
DIG OUT RATE
RECORD

-18dB to + 12dB
ON, OFF
96kHz, 88.2kHz, 48kHz, 44.1kHz
BLOCKED, ENABLED

ANLG IN LVL
SETUP

INPUTS

-18 to +12dB
DVD1

ZONE2 ADVANCED

ANLG IN LVL

Allows adjustment of analog audio input levels for input signals sent
to the Zone 2 digital audio output connectors. The RV-8 applies these
adjustments to input signals before passing them to the Zone 2
digital audio output connectors. This parameter can be adjusted
when an input source is present to prevent the internal A/D converter
from overloading.

3-23

Setup

Lexicon

DIGITAL BYPASS
SETUP

INPUTS

ON, OFF
DVD1

ZONE2 ADVANCED

DIGITAL BYPASS

Allows digital sources to bypass decoding for direct digital recording.
When ON is selected, the RV-8 passes digital input signals directly to
the Zone 2 digital audio output connectors, preserving the original
format of the input signal. This would be useful if you want to send a
multichannel-encoded signal to a second device for decoding. When
OFF is selected and the ZONE2 IN parameter is set to DIGITAL, Dolby
Digital and DTS sources will not be passed to the Zone 2 digital audio
outputs. When OFF is selected and a PCM source is present, the RV-8
will send the PCM audio to the Zone 2 digital audio output
connectors. If a Dolby Digital or DTS source is present and the
ZONE2 IN parameter is set to DMIX, a downmix of the source will be
sent to the Zone 2 digital audio output connectors.

DIG OUT RATE
SETUP

INPUTS

96kHz, 88.2kHz, 48kHz, 44.1kHz
DVD1

ZONE2 ADVANCED

DIG OUT RATE

Controls the sample rate of analog input signals sent to the Zone 2
digital audio output connectors.
When a value is selected, the RV-8 runs the Zone 2 A/D converters at
the selected sample rate. It is recommended to set the DIG OUT RATE
parameter to the appropriate value when using a recording format
that operates on a single sample rate, such as CD-R format (44.1kHz).
Note:
DIG OUT RATE only affects analog input signals. It does not change the
sample rate of digital input signals, or downmixed signals.

3-24

RECORD
SETUP

BLOCKED, ENABLED
INPUTS

DVD1

ZONE2 ADVANCED

RECORD

Prevents recording device feedback loops. When BLOCKED is
selected, the RV-8 blocks the Zone 2 audio output connectors to
prevent feedback loops. However, the RV-8 still passes video input
signals to the Zone 2 video output connectors. When ENABLED is
selected, the RV-8 passes audio and video input signals to the Zone 2
audio and video output connectors.

Setup

RV-8

SPEAKER SETUP
SETUP

SPEAKERS

Select the SPEAKER SETUP menu to configure the Main Zone audio output connectors for the desired speaker setup. The Main Zone includes eight
audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, Subwoofer, Side L/R and Rear L/R.

MAIN MENU

SETUP

SPEAKER SETUP

CROSSOVER SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

SET CROSSOVERS
CHECK MICROPHONES
AUTOMATIC
MANUAL

CUSTOM SETUP
THX SETUP

SETTING CROSSOVER POINTS
SETUP

SPEAKERS

SET CROSSOVERS

R
80Hz

SET CROSSOVERS
BEFORE CALIBRATING

RR
80Hz

80Hz

C
80Hz
M
SUB
80Hz

L
80Hz

SL
80Hz

RL
80Hz

Note:
It is important to set crossover points before calibrating output levels or
LIVE!. Setting crossover points afterwards could invalidate calibrated output levels and will invalidate the LIVE! calibration.

Selecting the SPEAKER SETUP menu SET CROSSOVERS option opens
the CROSSOVER SETUP menu, which is used to configure a custom
or THX setup.

3-25

Setup

Lexicon

CUSTOM SPEAKER SETUPS
Selecting the CROSSOVER SETUP menu CUSTOM SETUP option opens the CUSTOM SETUP menu, which assigns independent crossover points for
each Main Zone audio output connector. Possible crossover settings include FULL, FULL + SUB, and 10Hz increments within a 30Hz to 120Hz
range. The graphs shown on the next page indicate the frequency response of each crossover point.

MAIN MENU

SETUP

SPEAKER SETUP

CROSSOVER SETUP

CUSTOM SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGES
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

SET CROSSOVERS
CHECK MICROPHONES
AUTOMATIC
MANUAL

CUSTOM SETUP
THX SETUP

FRONT L/R
CENTER
SIDE L/R
REAR L/R
SUBWOOFER
ULTRA2 SUB
BGC
ASA

To configure a custom speaker setup:
•

Select the crossover point closest to the low frequency rating of
the associated speakers. For example, set the FRONT L/R
parameter to the crossover point closest to the low-frequency
rating of the front speakers.

•

Select the subwoofer crossover point equal to the lowest
crossover point of any of the other speakers. For example, if
CUSTOM SETUP menu parameters are set as shown above, set
the SUBWOOFER parameter to 40Hz – the lowest crossover
point of the other speakers.

3-26

RR
80Hz

80Hz

SET CROSSOVERS
BEFORE CALIBRATING

C
80Hz
M
SUB
80Hz

L
80Hz

SL
80Hz

40 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
40 Hz
OFF
N/A
APART

RL
80Hz

In a custom setup, low frequencies are generally redirected from
speakers with the highest crossover points to speakers with the
lowest crossover points. Signals lower than the lowest crossover point
are redirected to the subwoofer. If the lowest crossover point is FULL,
low-frequency signals, excluding LFE information, are not redirected
to the subwoofer.
Low frequencies between the Subwoofer and any or all of the other
speaker channels can be duplicated. To do this, select the FULL + SUB
crossover setting for the front, center, side or rear speakers. Making
this selection can result in excessive bass.

Setup

RV-8

In general, low frequencies will be redirected from speakers with the highest crossover points to speakers with the lowest crossover points. Lowfrequency signals lower than the lowest crossover point will be redirected to the subwoofer. If the lowest crossover point is FULL, low frequency
signals, excluding LFE information, will not be redirected to the subwoofer.
High-Pass Filter

High-pass filters attenuate low frequencies at 24dB per octave. The curves in the graph
above indicate the frequency response of each crossover setting. From left to right, the
curves represent crossover settings from 30Hz to 120Hz. The graph above does not
show the THX 80Hz crossover point, which is 12dB per octave.

Low-Pass Filter

Low-pass filters attenuate high frequencies at 24dB per octave. The curves in the graph
above indicate the frequency response of each crossover setting. From left to right, the
curves represent crossover settings from 30Hz to 120Hz.

3-27

Setup

Lexicon

THX SPEAKER SETUPS
Selecting THX SETUP opens the THX SPEAKER SETUP screen, which indicates that pressing the arrow button will automatically configure the Main
Zone audio output connectors for a THX speaker setup. Use THX-certified speakers in a THX speaker setup.

SETUP

SPEAKER SETUP

CROSSOVER SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

SET CROSSOVERS
CHECK MICROPHONES
AUTOMATIC
MANUAL

CUSTOM SETUP
THX SETUP
R

SET CROSSOVERS
BEFORE CALIBRATING

RR
80Hz

80Hz

80Hz
C

THX SPEAKER SETUP
!CAUTION!
PRESSING THE RIGHT
BUTTON WILL
AUTOMATICALLY CHANGE
THE OUTPUTS TO A THX
SPEAKER
CONFIGURATION

80Hz
M
SUB
80Hz

L
80Hz

SL
80Hz

CROSSOVER SETUP

THX 80 Hz
FRONT L/R*
THX 80 Hz
CENTER*
THX 80 Hz
SIDE L/R*
THX 80 Hz
REAR L/R
SUBWOOFER* THX 80 Hz
OFF
ULTRA2 SUB
N/A
BGC
APART
ASA

CUSTOM SETUP
THX SETUP

* These parameters cannot be
adjusted.

RL
80Hz

Selecting THX SETUP opens the THX SPEAKER SETUP screen, which
indicates that pressing the arrow button will automatically configure
the Main Zone audio output connectors for a THX speaker setup. Use
THX-certified speakers in a THX speaker setup.

THX SETUP

RR
80Hz

80Hz

80Hz
C
80Hz
M
SUB
80Hz

L
80Hz

SL
80Hz

RL
80Hz

When a THX speaker setup is selected, the RV-8 applies a THX 80Hz
crossover point with a 12dB-per-octave filter to the Front L/R, Center,
Side L/R and Rear L/R output connectors. The RV-8 applies a THX
80Hz crossover point with a 24dB-per-octave filter to the Subwoofer
output connector.

When the THX SPEAKER SETUP screen opens:
•

Press the arrow button to configure the Main Zone audio
output connectors for a THX speaker setup. The THX SETUP
menu will open on the in-screen display.

•

Press the arrow button to close the message without configuring the Main Zone audio output connectors for a THX
speaker setup.

3-28

Notes:
•

A THX speaker setup is not required to activate THX listening
modes.

•

In the THX SETUP menu, only the REAR L/R, THX ULTRA2 SUB,
BGC and ASA parameters can be changed.

Setup

RV-8

SPEAKER SETUP PARAMETERS
SETUP

SPEAKERS

SET CROSSOVERS

CUSTOM SETUP

SETUP

The table below indicates the speaker setup parameters for configuring the Main Zone audio output connectors for the desired speaker
setup. These parameters are available in the CUSTOM SETUP and
THX SETUP menus.

SPEAKERS

SET CROSSOVERS

THX SETUP

Speaker setup parameters perform the same function regardless of
the selected speaker setup. When a parameter setting is adjusted on
one menu, the corresponding parameter setting is automatically
adjusted on the other menu. For example, when a THX speaker setup
is selected, the crossover settings on the CUSTOM SETUP menu are
set to THX 80Hz.

CUSTOM SETUP Menu
Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

THX SETUP Menu
Default Setting

Possible Settings

FRONT L/R*

80Hz

FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz

THX 80Hz

CENTER*

80Hz

FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE

THX 80Hz

SIDE L/R*

80Hz

FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE

THX 80Hz

REAR L/R

80Hz

FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE

THX 80Hz

THX 80Hz, NONE

SUBWOOFER*

80Hz

FULL, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE

THX 80Hz

THX ULTRA2 SUB

OFF

ON, OFF

OFF

ON, OFF

BGC

N/A†

ON, OFF

N/A†

ON, OFF

ASA

APART

APART, CLOSE, TOGETHER

APART

APART, CLOSE, TOGETHER

* These parameters cannot be adjusted on the THX SETUP menu.
† When the THX ULTRA2 SUB parameter is set to OFF, the BGC parameter is not available (N/A).

3-29

Setup

Lexicon

SPEAKER SETUP PARAMETERS

(continued)

MAIN MENU

SETUP

SPEAKER SETUP

CROSSOVER SETUP

CUSTOM SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

SET CROSSOVERS
CHECK MICROPHONES
AUTOMATIC
MANUAL

CUSTOM SETUP
THX SETUP

FRONT L/R
CENTER
SIDE L/R
REAR L/R
SUBWOOFER
ULTRA2 SUB
BGC
ASA

SET CROSSOVERS
BEFORE CALIBRATING

RR
80Hz

C
80Hz
M
SUB
80Hz

3-30

SR
80Hz

80Hz

40Hz
60Hz
60Hz
60Hz
40Hz
OFF
N/A
APART

L
80Hz

SL
80Hz

RL
80Hz

S UB W O O F E R

R E A R L / R S P E A K ER S

S I D E L / R S P E AK E R S

C EN T E R SP E A K E R

F R O N T L / R SP E A K E R S

FULL
3 0 Hz
4 0 Hz
5 0 Hz
6 0 Hz
7 0 Hz
80Hz
THX 8 0 Hz
90Hz
1 0 0Hz
1 1 0Hz
1 2 0Hz
NONE

FULL
FULL + SUB
3 0 Hz
4 0 Hz
5 0 Hz
6 0 Hz
7 0 Hz
80Hz
THX 8 0 Hz
90Hz
1 0 0 Hz
1 1 0 Hz
1 2 0 Hz
NONE

FULL
FULL + SUB
3 0 Hz
4 0 Hz
5 0 Hz
6 0 Hz
7 0 Hz
80Hz
THX 8 0 Hz
90Hz
1 0 0Hz
1 1 0Hz
1 2 0Hz
NONE

FULL
FULL + SUB
3 0 Hz
4 0 Hz
5 0 Hz
6 0 Hz
7 0 Hz
80Hz
THX 80 Hz
90Hz
1 0 0 Hz
1 1 0 Hz
1 2 0 Hz

Setup

RV-8

FRONT L/R
SETUP

SPEAKERS

FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120HZ, THX 80HZ
SET CROSSOVERS

CUSTOM SETUP

FRONT L/R

CENTER
SETUP

FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120HZ, THX 80HZ, NONE
SPEAKERS

SET CROSSOVERS

CUSTOM SETUP

CENTER

Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connectors
labeled Front L/R when a custom speaker setup is selected. Opens the
FRONT L/R SPEAKERS menu to select a crossover point for the Front
L/R output connectors.

Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connector
labeled CENTER when a custom speaker setup is selected. Opens the
CENTER SPEAKER menu to select a crossover point for the CENTER
output connector.

•

Select FULL to send a full-range signal to the front speakers.
Otherwise, select the crossover point closest to the lowfrequency rating of the front speakers.

•

Select FULL to send a full-range signal to the center speaker.
Otherwise, select the crossover point closest to the lowfrequency rating of the center speaker.

•

Select FULL + SUB to send a full-range signal to the front
speakers and duplicate bass frequencies to the SUB output.
(The set crossover point of the SUB parameter determines the
upper range of duplicate bass.) Selecting the FULL + SUB
option can result in excessive bass.

•

Select FULL + SUB to send a full-range signal to the center
speaker and duplicate bass frequencies to the SUB output. (The
set crossover point of the SUB parameter determines the upper
range of duplicate bass.) Selecting the FULL + SUB option can
result in excessive bass.

•

When the speaker setup does not include a center speaker, select
NONE to redirect center channel signals to the Front L/R output
connectors – unless the 5.1a BYPASS listening mode is activated. In
this case, configure the speaker setup with the associated DVD-A/
SACD player to redirect center channel signals.

SETUP

SPEAKERS

SET CROSSOVERS

THX SETUP

When THX speaker setup is selected, a THX 80Hz crossover point is
applied to the Front L/R output connectors, and the FRONT L/R
parameter cannot be adjusted.

SETUP

SPEAKERS

SET CROSSOVERS

THX SETUP

When THX speaker setup is selected, a THX 80Hz crossover point is
applied to the Center output connector, and the CENTER parameter
cannot be adjusted.

3-31

Setup

Lexicon

SPEAKER SETUP PARAMETERS
SIDE L/R
SETUP

(continued)

FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE

SPEAKERS

SET CROSSOVERS

CUSTOM SETUP

SIDE L/R

Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connectors
labeled SIDE L/R when a custom speaker setup is selected.
•

Select FULL to send a full-range signal to the side speakers.
Otherwise, select the crossover point closest to the lowfrequency rating of the side speakers.

•

Select FULL + SUB to send a full-range signal to the side
speakers and duplicate bass frequencies to the SUB output.
(The set crossover point of the SUB parameter determines the
upper range of duplicate bass.) Selecting the FULL + SUB option
can result in excessive bass.

•

When the speaker setup does not include side speakers, select
NONE to redirect side channel signals to the Rear L/R output
connectors. If the REAR L/R parameter is also set to NONE, the
RV-8 will redirect surround channel signals to the Front L/R
output connectors.

REAR L/R
SETUP

FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE

SPEAKERS

SET CROSSOVERS

CUSTOM SETUP

REAR L/R

Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connectors
labeled REAR L/R when a custom speaker setup is selected.
•

Select FULL to send a full-range signal to the rear speakers.
Otherwise, select the crossover point closest to the lowfrequency rating of the rear speakers.

•

Select FULL + SUB to send a full-range signal to the rear
speakers and duplicate bass frequencies to the SUB output.
(The set crossover point of the SUB parameter determines the
upper range of duplicate bass.) Selecting the FULL + SUB option
can result in excessive bass.

•

When the speaker setup does not include rear speakers, select NONE
to redirect rear channel signals to the Side L/R output connectors. If
the SIDE L/R parameter is also set to NONE, the RV-8 redirects
surround channel signals to the Front L/R output connectors.

Note:

When the SIDE L/R parameter is set to NONE, Dolby Digital Surround
EX, THX Ultra2, THX Surround EX, DTS(-ES) decoding, the ASA
parameter and PLIIx modes are not available.

When the REAR L/R parameter is set to NONE, Dolby Digital Surround EX,
THX Ultra2, THX Surround EX, PLIIx modes, DTS(-ES) decoding and the ASA
parameter are not available.

SETUP

SPEAKERS

SET CROSSOVERS

THX SETUP

When THX speaker setup is selected, a THX 80Hz crossover point is
applied to the SIDE L/R output connectors, and the SIDE L/R
parameter cannot be adjusted.

3-32

SETUP

SPEAKERS

SET CROSSOVERS

THX SETUP

When THX speaker setup is selected, the THX REAR SPEAKERS menu opens
which is used to activate or deactivate the REAR L/R output connectors.
To activate and configure the Rear L/R output connectors for a
7.1-channel THX speaker, setup select THX 80Hz. To deactivate the
Rear L/R output connectors and configure the Main Zone audio output
connectors for a 5.1-channel THX speaker setup, select NONE.

Setup

RV-8

MAIN MENU

SETUP

SPEAKER SETUP

CROSSOVER SETUP

CUSTOM SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

SET CROSSOVERS
CHECK MICROPHONES
AUTOMATIC
MANUAL

CUSTOM SETUP
THX SETUP

FRONT L/R
CENTER
SIDE L/R
REAR L/R
SUBWOOFER
ULTRA2 SUB
BGC
ASA

SET CROSSOVERS
BEFORE CALIBRATING

SETUP

SPEAKERS

RR
60Hz

C
60Hz
M
SUB
40Hz

SUBWOOFER

SR
60Hz

40Hz

L
40Hz

SL
60Hz

RL
60Hz

S U B WO O F E R
40Hz
60Hz
60Hz
60Hz
40Hz
OFF
N/A
APART

FULL
30Hz
40Hz
5 0 Hz
6 0 Hz
7 0 Hz
80Hz
THX 8 0Hz
90Hz
1 0 0 Hz
1 1 0 Hz
1 2 0 Hz
NONE

FULL, 30 TO 120 Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE
SET CROSSOVERS

THX SETUP

SUBWOOFER

Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connector
labeled Subwoofer. When set to FULL, the RV-8 sends a full-range
audio output signal to this connector. Otherwise, the RV-8 activates a
crossover point at the selected setting. Choose the setting equal to
the lowest setting of the other speakers.

Note:
When the SUBWOOFER parameter is set to NONE, subwoofer signals
will not be redirected if the 5.1a BYPASS listening mode is activated. To
redirect subwoofer signals, configure the speaker setup with the
associated DVD-A/SACD player.SETUP
MAIN MENU
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SETUP
INPUTS

3-33

Setup

Lexicon

SPEAKER SETUP PARAMETERS

(continued)

MAIN MENU

SETUP

SPEAKER SETUP

CROSSOVER SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TRIGGERS
TUNER SETUP
TUNER
SETUP
LOCK
OPTIONS
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

SET CROSSOVERS
CHECK MICROPHONES
AUTOMATIC
MANUAL

CUSTOM SETUP
THX SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS
BEFORE CALIBRATING

THX SETUP

!CAUTION!
PRESSING THE
BUTTON WILL
AUTOMATICALLY CHANGE
THE OUTPUTS TO A THX
SPEAKER CONFIGURATION

THX 80Hz
FRONT L/R*
THX 80Hz
CENTER*
THX 80Hz
SIDE L/R*
THX 80Hz
REAR L/R
SUBWOOFER* THX 80Hz
OFF
ULTRA2 SUB
BGC
N/A
ASA
APART

RR
60Hz

C
60Hz
M
SUB
40Hz

THX SPEAKER SETUP

SR
60Hz

40Hz

L
40Hz

SL
60Hz

RL
60Hz

CUSTOM SETUP

ON
OFF

40 Hz
FRONT L/R
60 Hz
CENTER
60 Hz
SIDE L/R
60 Hz
REAR L/R
SUBWOOFER
40 Hz
OFF
ULTRA2 SUB
N/A
BGC
APART
ASA

APART
CLOSE
TOGETHER

* These parameters cannot be
adjusted.

THX ULTRA2 SUB
SETUP

SPEAKERS

ON, OFF
CUSTOM SETUP

ULTRA2 SUB

SETUP

Indicates whether or not the subwoofer connected to the Main Zone
audio output connector labeled Subwoofer is Ultra2-certified. Select
the ON setting if the connected subwoofer is Ultra2-certified and the
OFF setting if the connected subwoofer is not Ultra2-certified. When

3-34

SPEAKERS

THX SETUP

ULTRA2 SUB

set to ON, the CUSTOM and THX SETUP menu BGC parameter can
be used to adjust boundary gain compensation. When set to OFF, the
BGC parameter is not available (N/A).

Setup

RV-8

BGC (BOUNDARY GAIN COMPENSATION)
SETUP

SPEAKERS

CUSTOM SETUP

SETUP

SPEAKERS

THX SETUP

ON, OFF

BGC
BGC

ASA (ADVANCED SPEAKER ARRAY) APART, CLOSE, TOGETHER
SETUP

SPEAKERS

CUSTOM SETUP

SETUP

SPEAKERS

THX SETUP

ASA
ASA

Adjusts boundary gain compensation when the CUSTOM and THX
SETUP menu THX ULTRA2 SUB parameter is set to ON. When the
BGC parameter is set to ON, a highpass 55Hz filter is applied to all
audio output connectors for all Main Zone listening modes. When set
to OFF, no filter is applied to Main Zone listening modes and audio
output connectors. When the parameter setting is N/A, the THX
ULTRA2 SUB parameter is set to OFF, and boundary gain compensation cannot be adjusted.

A proprietary THX technology that processes signals sent to the rear
speakers, optimizing the listening experience for THX Ultra2 listening
modes. To maximize the effectiveness of ASA processing, it is recommended that you configure a 7-channel speaker setup in which the
rear speakers are placed close together facing the center of the
listening space. The ASA parameter is not available unless the 5.1
THX ULTRA2, 5.1 THX MUSIC, DTS THX ULTRA2 or DTS THX
MUSIC listening mode is activated.

Note:

Select the TOGETHER setting if the distance between the rear
speakers is less than 1 foot (0.3m). Select the CLOSE setting if the
distance between the rear speakers is greater than 1 foot (0.3m), but
less than 4 feet (1.2m). Select the APART setting if the distance
between the rear speakers is greater than 4 feet (1.2m).

BGC compensates for increased bass energy that is caused by the
proximity of the speakers to the listening room walls.

Note:
ASA processing is only available when both side and rear speakers are
present.
When the remote control 7/5 button is used to toggle between 7 and
5-channel playback:
•

ASA processing is not available during 5-channel playback.

•

The RV-8 automatically switches between the 5.1 THX ULTRA2
and 5.1 THX or DTS THX ULTRA2 and DTS THX listening modes.

3-35

Setup

Lexicon

AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION
The RV-8 offers automatic calibration of speaker distances, output level, or both. The table below indicates available automatic calibration options.
A successful microphone check is required before automatic calibration can be performed.
Automatic Options

Details

MICROPHONE CHECK

•

Confirms that the microphones are properly connected and functioning.

•

Calculates an average level for the microphones connected to the microphone input connectors,
allowing the RV-8 to compensate for individual microphone sensitivities during automatic calibration.

•

Ensures that microphone levels are consistent, eliminating automatic calibration errors from individual
microphone levels.

•

Activates automatic calibration of speaker distances and output levels.

•

Offers accurate calibration with minimal interaction, automatically applying calibrated speaker distances
and output levels.

•

Calibrates speaker distances within 0.5 foot (.15m) of the physical distance between the primary listening
position and the speaker.

•

Calibrates individual speaker output levels within +/–0.5dB of each other and overall speaker output
levels within +/–3.0dB of THX reference levels (75dB).

•

Activates automatic calibration of speaker distances.

•

Provides a comparison between original and calibrated speaker distances, allowing selection of the
desired values.

•

Calibrates speaker distances within 0.5 foot (.15m) of the physical distance between the primary listening
position and the speaker.

•

Activates automatic calibration of output levels.

•

Provides a comparison between original and calibrated output levels, allowing selection of the desired
values.

•

Calibrates individual speaker output levels within +/–0.5dB of each other and overall speaker output
levels within +/–3.0dB of THX reference levels (75dB).

DISTANCES & LEVELS

DISTANCES

LEVELS

3-36

Setup

RV-8

CONNECTING THE MICROPHONES
CAUTION!

To connect the microphones:

•

4. Make sure the RV-8 is powered off OR in standby mode.

The microphones included in the Lexicon Microphone Kit
require careful handling. Dropping or otherwise physically
abusing the microphones might cause errors during use or
irreparable damage to the microphones.

•

The microphone wires also require careful handling. Do not
sharply bend the wires or place objects on them.

•

Never make or break microphone input connections unless
the RV-8 is powered off with the rear-panel power switch,
OR standby mode is activated with the front-panel or
remote control standby button.

5. Connect the microphones included in the Lexicon Microphone Kit
to the microphone input connectors on the RV-8 rear panel. Make
sure the microphone cable plug is fully inserted for a solid
connection.
During the microphone check, the microphones will be
referred to as 1 or 2, based on the input connector to which
the microphone is connected. You should label the microphones for troubleshooting purposes.
6. Power on the RV-8 or deactivate standby mode.

Note the following:
•

Automatic calibration requires the microphones included in the
Lexicon Microphone Kit, available at authorized Lexicon dealers.
Performing automatic calibration with microphones other than
those in the kit will produce unpredictable results.

•

Proper microphone placement is essential to achieving the
desired automatic calibration results. Pay particular attention to
the microphone placement instructions and illustrations included
in this section.

•

It is important to read and observe the care and handling
documentation included with the Lexicon Microphone Kit to
ensure optimal microphone performance.

•

If power is lost during automatic calibration of speaker levels or
speaker distances, previous settings may be lost and recalibration of speaker levels and speaker distances is required.

3-37

Setup

Lexicon

POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR THE MICROPHONE CHECK
Refer to the microphone placement examples that begin below to position the microphones for the microphone check.

PROPER microphone positioning for the microphone check
During the microphone check, position
the microphones:
3 As close together as possible
3 Relatively centered between and equidistant from
the front left and right speakers
Rear
Left

3 In a clear line-of-sight path with the speakers
3 In a location unobstructed by furniture and other
fixtures, where echoes will not obscure calibration
noise signals
3 At least 2 feet (0.61m) from all speakers and
walls, but within 30 feet (9.14m) of all speakers
The illustration to the right provides an example of
proper microphone placement during the microphone
check. All of the microphones are positioned as close
together as possible in an unobstructed location that is
equidistant from the front left and right speakers.

Side
Left

Rear
Right

Side
Right

Front
Left
Microphone
Center

Subwoofer
Front
Right

3-38

Setup

RV-8

IMPROPER microphone positioning for the microphone check
During the microphone check, DO NOT:
7 Separate the microphones
7 Scatter the microphones throughout the listening
space
7 Obstruct the line-of-sight path between the microphones and the speakers
7 Position the microphones on the floor, on seat
cushions, or in locations obstructed by furniture and
other fixtures, where echoes might obscure
calibration noise signals

Rear
Left

7 Position the microphones within 2 feet (0.61m) of
speakers and walls or more than 30 feet (9.14m)
from any one speaker
The illustration to the right provides an example of
improper microphone placement during the microphone
check. The microphones are scattered throughout the
listening space rather than positioned as close together as
possible in a location that is equidistant from the front left
and right speakers.

Side
Left

Rear
Right

Side
Right

Front
Left
Microphone
Center

Subwoofer
Front
Right

3-39

Setup

Lexicon

CHECKING THE MICROPHONES
MAIN MENU
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

SETUP

SPEAKER SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

SET CROSSOVERS
CHECK MICROPHONES
AUTOMATIC
MANUAL
SET CROSSOVERS
BEFORE CALIBRATING

CUSTOM
CHECK MICROPHONES
SETUP
GROUP MICROPHONES
40 Hz
INTO A BUNDLE
60 Hz IN THE
60THE
Hz ROOM
MIDDLE OF
60 Hz
PRESS 40TOHzBEGIN
OFF
MIC CHECK
N/A
APART

Note the following:
•

•

The RV-8 outputs calibration noise signals between 55dB and
95dB, beginning with 55dB and increasing in 5dB increments
until the microphones detect the required level. If the
calibration noise signal becomes too loud, press the
arrow
button to cancel the microphone check.
Although the calibration noise signal is output at a fixed volume
level, you should set all volume controls for associated components (i.e., speakers, subwoofers and power amplifiers) to a
reasonable level before performing automatic calibration.
When the procedure is finished, the RV-8 automatically reverts
to the last volume level that was selected before automatic
calibration began.
During automatic calibration, you should refer to the on-screen
display instead of the front-panel display, as additional information and instructions are available in the on-screen display.

1. Select the SPEAKER SETUP menu CHECK MICROPHONES option,
as shown above.

3-40

2. The first CHECK MICROPHONES screen opens in the on-screen
display, indicating the importance of proper microphone
placement to achieve accurate automatic calibration results.
3. Press the
arrow button to begin the microphone check. The
following screens appears in the on-screen display as the microphone check is performed:
CHECKING FOR SILENCE
Appears in the on-screen display while
CUSTOM
CHECK MICROPHONES
SETUP
the RV-8 determines the relative noise
CHECKING FOR SILENCE
level of the listening space and the
PLEASE WAIT
internal noise level of the microphones.
After eliminating microphones that are
not detected or not functioning, the RV-8 calculates an average
level for all microphones.

Setup

RV-8
CHECKING MICROPHONES
Appears in the on-screen display while
CUSTOM
CHECK MICROPHONES
SETUP
the RV-8 confirms the microphone level
CHECKING MICROPHONES
calculated during the silence check. To
PLEASE WAIT
do this, the RV-8 sends alternating
calibration noise signals to the front left
and right speakers. These signals are output between 55dB and
95dB, beginning with 55dB and increasing in 5dB increments
until the microphones detect the required level. If the signal
becomes too loud, press the
arrow button to cancel the
microphone check.
The RV-8 uses the calibration noise signal to eliminate microphones that register the signal at a level that is too low or too
high. Then, the RV-8 determines the appropriate output level for
the calibration noise signal used during automatic calibration.

4. Press the
and
arrow buttons to highlight the desired microphone parameter. The RV-8 refers to the microphones according
to the input connector to which the microphone is connected.
5. Press the
arrow button to view more detailed results for the
selected microphone. A message similar to the one shown at the
bottom of the previous column opens in the on-screen display.
Refer to the table on the next page for information about all
possible microphone check messages.
Note the following:
•

The RV-8 retains the calculated microphone level until the
SPEAKER SETUP menu is closed. Once this menu is closed,
another microphone check is required before automatic
calibration can be performed.

•

Optional microphone kits that include two microphones are
available. Perform automatic calibration with two microphones
that have passed the microphone check.

CHECK MICROPHONES Results

However, the RV-8 will perform automatic calibration as long as
at least one microphone passes the microphone check. In this
circumstance, place the successfully checked microphone in the
primary listening position.

Appears in the on-screen display when the RV-8 is finished
checking the microphones. This display indicates the individual
check results for each microphone.
•

An OK result indicates that the microphone passed the
microphone check.

•

An ERROR result indicates that the microphone did not pass
the microphone check.
CHECK MICROPHONES
MIC 1
MIC 2

OK
ERROR

•

If a microphone check was successful, do not disconnect the
microphones from the microphone input connectors. If the
microphones are disconnected, you should perform the microphone check again before proceeding to automatic calibration.

(MICROPHONE)
OK

PRESS TO VIEW
DETAILS

3-41

Setup

Lexicon

CHECKING THE MICROPHONES
Message

(continued)

Description

Troubleshooting

(MICROPHONE)
OK

The microphone detected the calibration
noise signal without error.

•

N/A

(MICROPHONE)
NOT DETECTED

The RV-8 did not detect the microphone
during the silence check.

•

Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly connected to the RV-8 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection.

•

The microphone may be damaged. Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer for assistance.

•

Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly connected to the RV-8 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection.

•

The microphones may be positioned too far from the front speakers. Refer to the microphone
placement examples that begin on page 3-38 to confirm that the microphones are appropriately positioned for the microphone check.

•

The microphone may be damaged. Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer for assistance.

•

Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly connected to the RV-8 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection.

•

The microphones might be positioned too far from the front speakers. Refer to the microphone placement examples that begin on page 3-38 to confirm that the microphones are
appropriately positioned for the microphone check.

•

The microphone may be damaged. Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer for assistance.

•

Eliminate extraneous noises in the listening space, including conversations, air conditioners
and sounds that filter in through open doors and windows.

•

The microphone may be damaged. Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer for assistance.

(MICROPHONE)
SIGNAL TOO LOW

(MICROPHONE)
OUT OF RANGE

(MICROPHONE)
TOO MUCH ROOM NOISE

The RV-8 detected the microphone during the silence check. However, the
microphone level determined during the
silence check was not confirmed during
the microphone check.

The microphone level is more than 20dB
below the highest microphone level.

The microphone level could not be
determined because of excessive room
noise in the listening space.

POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION
Proper microphone placement is essential to achieving the desired
automatic calibration results. Microphone placement determines
whether the RV-8 calibrates optimal speaker distances and output
levels for a single listening position, several listening positions in a
single row, or several listening positions in the listening space.

3-42

•

Refer to the microphone placement examples that begin on the
next page to position the microphones for automatic
calibration. Select the microphone placement that best meets
the needs of the listening space.

Setup

RV-8

PROPER microphone placement to achieve the best results for a single listening position
When calibrating for a single listening
position, place the microphones:
3 As close together as possible in a single listening
position (the primary listening position)
3 At the approximate spot where the listener’s head
will be during listening

Rear
Left

3 In a clear line-of-sight path with the speakers
3 In a location unobstructed by furniture and other
fixtures, where echoes will not obscure calibration
noise signals

Side
Right

3 At least 2 feet (0.61m) from all speakers and
walls, but within 30 feet (9.14m) of all speakers
The illustration to the right provides an example of
proper microphone placement when calibrating for a
single listening position. The microphones are
positioned as close together as possible in a single
listening position, allowing the RV-8 to calibrate optimal
speaker distances and output levels for that position.

Side
Left

Rear
Right

Front
Left
Microphone
Center

Subwoofer
Front
Right

3-43

Setup

Lexicon

POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION

(continued)

PROPER microphone placement to achieve the best results for multiple listening positions in a single row
When calibrating for multiple listening
positions in a single row, position the
microphones:
3 At the approximate spot where the listener’s head
will be during listening
3 In a clear line-of-sight path with the speakers
3 In a location unobstructed by furniture and other
fixtures, where echoes will not obscure calibration
noise signals

Rear
Left

3 At least 2 feet (0.61m) from all speakers and
walls, but within 30 feet (9.14m) of all speakers
The illustration to the right provides an example of
proper microphone placement when calibrating for
multiple listening positions in a single row. Each microphone is positioned in a single listening position within a
single row, allowing the RV-8 to calibrate optimal
speaker distances and output levels for that row at the
expense of a single listening position.

Side
Left

Rear
Right

Side
Right

Front
Left
Microphone
Center

Subwoofer
Front
Right

3-44

Setup

RV-8

PROPER microphone placement to achieve the best results for multiple listening positions in multiple rows
When calibrating for multiple listening
positions in multiple rows, position the
microphones:
3 At the approximate spot where the listener’s head
will be during listening
3 In a clear line-of-sight path with the speakers
3 In a location unobstructed by furniture and other
fixtures, where echoes will not obscure calibration
noise signals

Rear
Left

3 At least 2 feet (0.61m) from all speakers and
walls, but within 30 feet (9.14m) of all speakers
The illustration to the right provides an example of
proper microphone placement when calibrating for
multiple listening positions in multiple rows. Each microphone is positioned in a single listening position within a
row, allowing the RV-8 to calibrate optimal speaker
distances and output levels for a larger listening area at
the expense of a single listening position.

Side
Left

Rear
Right

Side
Right

Front
Left
Microphone
Center

Subwoofer
Front
Right

3-45

Setup

Lexicon

POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION

(continued)

IMPROPER microphone positioning for automatic calibration
During the automatic calibration, do not:
7 Arrange the microphones along the perimeter of
the listening positions or space
7 Position the microphones in spots where the
listeners’ heads will not be during listening
Rear
Left

7 Obstruct the line-of-sight path between the
microphones and the speakers
7 Position the microphones on the floor, on seat
cushions, or in locations obstructed by furniture
and other fixtures, where echoes might obscure
calibration noise signals
7 Position the microphones within 2 feet (0.61m) of
speakers and walls or more than 30 feet (9.14m)
from any one speaker

Side
Left

Rear
Right

Side
Right

Front
Left
Microphone
Center

The illustration to the right provides an example of
improper microphone placement during the microphone
check. The microphones are positioned on the floor
along the perimeter of the listening space, making it
difficult for the RV-8 to calibrate optimal speaker
distances and output levels for the actual listening
positions.

3-46

Subwoofer
Front
Right

Setup

RV-8

IMPROPER microphone positioning for automatic calibration
During the automatic calibration, do not:
7 Arrange the microphones along the perimeter of
the listening positions or space
7 Position the microphones at spots where the
listeners’ heads will not be during listening
7 Obstruct the line-of-sight path between the
microphones and the speakers

Rear
Left

7 Position the microphones on the floor, on seat
cushions, or in locations obstructed by furniture
and other fixtures, where echoes might obscure
calibration noise signals
7 Position the microphones within 2 feet (0.61m) of
speakers and walls or more than 30 feet (9.14m)
from any one speaker

Side
Left

Rear
Right

Side
Right

Front
Left
Microphone
Center

The illustration to the right provides an example of
improper microphone placement during the microphone
check. The microphones are positioned on seat cushions
rather than in spots where the listener’s heads will be
during listening.

Subwoofer
Front
Right

3-47

Setup

Lexicon

PERFORMING AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION
MAIN MENU

SETUP

SPEAKER SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

SET CROSSOVERS
CHECK MICROPHONES
AUTOMATIC
MANUAL

CUSTOM
AUTO SPEAKER
SETUP SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS
BEFORE CALIBRATING

DISTANCES 40
& LEVELS
Hz
DISTANCES 60 Hz
60 Hz
OUTPUT LEVELS
60 Hz
40 Hz
PLACE MICROPHONES
AROUND PREFERRED
OFF
LISTENING POSITIONS
N/A
APART

CUSTOM
AUTO SPEAKER
SETUP SETUP
!CAUTION!
40 Hz
60 Hz
HIGH AUDIO
LEVELS
60 Hz
Hz 10 SEC
YOU WILL 60
HAVE
40 Hz
TO LEAVE THE
ROOM OR
OFF
SIT QUIETLY
N/A
PRESSAPART
TO BEGIN
COUNTDOWN

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP
TEST WILL BEGIN IN
10
PRESS TO SKIP
COUNTDOWN

Follow the procedures in the appropriate table column for the desired type of automatic calibration.

STEP

DISTANCES

DISTANCES & LEVELS

LEVELS

Select the SPEAKER SETUP menu AUTOMATIC option, as shown in the menu illustration above.

• If a microphone check is successful, the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu appears in the on-screen display. Press
the
or
arrow button to highlight the automatic calibration option you want. Then press the
arrow button to select
this option. Refer to the table on page 3-36 for more information about automatic calibration options.

MIC CHECK REQUIRED
FOR AUTO CALIBRATION

• If a microphone check is unsuccessful, one of the error messages shown to the right appears in the on-screen display, indicating that a successful microphone check is required before automatic calibration, and also the reason the previous check failed.
If this occurs, go back to “Connecting the Microphones” on page 3-37 and work your way back to this page.

NO MICROPHONE
DETECTED

The following AUTO SPEAKER SETUP messages are displayed before automatic calibration begins:

• The !CAUTION! HIGH AUDIO LEVELS message indicates that the RV-8 generates loud calibration noise signals during automatic calibration. If the signals become too loud, press the
arrow button to cancel automatic calibration. Press the
arrow button to open the next AUTO SPEAKER SETUP
menu.
• The countdown display notifies you that automatic calibration will begin in 10 seconds. The primary reason for the 10 second delay is to give you time
to leave the listening space before automatic calibration begins. If you choose to remain in the room, your movements could affect the calibration
results. If you leave the room, you can return in about 10 minutes (the calibration procedure should be completed). Press the
arrow button to
skip the countdown and begin automatic calibration. The RV-8 automatically activates automatic calibration when the countdown ends.

3-48

Setup

RV-8

SETTING SETUP
DISTANCES
CUSTOM
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER

STEP

SETTING SETUP
DISTANCES
CUSTOM
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft

FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER

DISTANCES

SETTING SETUP
LEVELS
CUSTOM
12.0ft
10.5ft
12.0ft
4.5ft
ERROR
6.0ft
4.5ft
N/A

FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER

SETTING SETUP
LEVELS
CUSTOM
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB

DISTANCES & LEVELS

The SETTING DISTANCES menu is displayed when the RV-8 calibrates speaker distances.

• During speaker distance calibration, the RV-8 sends calibration noise signals to the Main Zone
audio output connectors in the order shown on the SETTING DISTANCES menu. The cursor automatically scrolls downward through speaker calibration parameters, highlighting each parameter
while the RV-8 calculates a distance for the corresponding speaker. As it finishes each parameter,
the RV-8 enters the calibrated value or an ERROR message to the right of the parameter label.

-2.0dB
ERROR
-2.0dB
-4.5dB
-3.0dB
-3.0dB
-4.5dB
N/A

LEVELS
This step does not occur when the AUTO
SPEAKER SETUP menu LEVELS option is
selected.

• Because of the way low-frequency signals propagate in most listening spaces, automatic speaker distance calibration often produces unreliable results for subwoofers. For this reason, the RV-8 does not
send calibration noise signals to the Subwoofer connector during speaker distance calibration. Instead,
the RV-8 automatically calibrates the subwoofer distance to the shortest distance of the other speakers.
These distances can be manually adjusted. See “PERFORMING MANUAL SPEAKER DISTANCE CALIBRATION” on page 3-54.

This step does not occur when the AUTO SPEAKER
SETUP menu DISTANCES option is selected.

FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER

The SETTING LEVELS menu is displayed when the RV-8 calibrates output levels.
• During speaker levels calibration, the RV-8 sends calibration noise signals to the Main Zone
audio output connectors in the order shown on the SETTING LEVELS menu. The cursor automatically scrolls downward through speaker calibration parameters, highlighting each parameter while the RV-8 calculates an output level for the corresponding speaker. As it finishes each
parameter, the RV-8 enters the calibrated value or an ERROR message to the right of the parameter label.

3-49

Setup

Lexicon

PERFORMING AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION (continued)
STEP

DISTANCES & LEVELS

DISTANCES

AUTO DISTANCES
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER

FRONT LEFT
12.0ft
10.5ft
12.0ft
4.5ft
ERROR
6.0ft
4.5ft
N/A

• A value indicates that no errors occurred
during the calibration procedure.
• An ERROR message indicates that a value
was calculated, but at least one error
occurred during the calibration procedure.
• Press the
or
arrow button to highlight the speaker calibration parameter
you want. Then press the
button to
view more detailed results for the
selected speaker. A message similar to
the one shown above will display.
• Refer to the table on page 3-52 for information about all possible speaker calibration messages.
• This menu is displayed, but not user
accessible during Auto Distance Calibration or after Auto Calibration.

3-50

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP

AUTO LEVELS

DISTANCES
LEVELS

FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER

Refer to the table on page
3-52 for information about
all possible speaker calibration messages.

If there was a DISTANCES calibration
error, an AUTO DISTANCES menu automatically displays.

LEVELS

OK
ERROR

AUTO VALUES APPLIED
PRESS TO VIEW
DETAILS

When the RV-8 is finished calibrating
speaker distances and output levels, if there
was a calibration error, the AUTO SPEAKER
SETUP screen is displayed, indicating the
results for each calibration procedure.
• An OK message indicates that no errors
occurred during the calibration procedure.
• An ERROR message indicates that values
were calculated, but at least one error
occurred during calibration.
• Press the
or
arrow button to highlight the desired calibration procedure.
DISTANCES displays the AUTO DISTANCES screen shown in the left column
of this table.
LEVELS displays the AUTO LEVELS screen
shown in the right column of this table.
• Press the
procedure.

arrow button to select this

• Refer to the instructions in the appropriate column to view more detailed results
for each individual speaker.
• If a speaker is highlighted in either the
Distances or Levels menus, the speaker
name is displayed.

FRONT LEFT
-2.0dB
ERROR
-2.0dB
-4.5dB
-3.0dB
-3.0dB
-4.5dB
N/A

Refer to the table on page
3-52 for information about
all possible speaker calibration messages.

If there was a LEVELS calibration error, an
AUTO LEVELS menu automatically displays.
• A value indicates that no errors occurred
during the calibration procedure.
• An ERROR message indicates that a value
was calculated, but at least one error
occurred during the calibration procedure.
• Press the
or
arrow button to highlight the desired speaker calibration
parameter. Then, press the
arrow
button to view more detailed results for
the selected speaker. A message similar
to the one shown above will display.
• Refer to the table on page 3-52 for information about all possible speaker calibration messages.
• This menu is displayed, but not user
accessible during Auto Distance Calibration or after Auto Calibration.

Setup

RV-8

STEP

DISTANCES
SET DISTANCES

AUTO DISTANCES

AUTO DISTANCES
ORIGINAL DISTANCES

FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER

RR
0.0ft

0.0ft

C
0.0ft
M
SUB
0.0ft

L
0.0ft

DISTANCES & LEVELS

12.0ft
10.5ft
12.0ft
4.5ft
ERROR
6.0ft
4.5ft
N/A

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP

AUTO DISTANCES*

DISTANCES
LEVELS

FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER

OK
ERROR

AUTO VALUES APPLIED
PRESS TO VIEW
DETAILS

LEVELS

12.0ft
10.5ft
12.0ft
4.5ft
ERROR
6.0ft
4.5ft
N/A

AUTO LEVELS

AUTO LEVELS
ORIGINAL LEVELS

FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER

R
0.0dB

0.0ft

RR
0.0dB

0.0dB

C
0.0dB
M
SUB

SL RL
0.0ft

SET LEVELS

0.0dB

L
0.0dB

-2.0dB
ERROR
-2.0dB
-4.5dB
-3.0dB
-3.0dB
-4.5dB
N/A

SL RL
0.0dB

0.0dB

Use the SET DISTANCES menu to select
the desired speaker distances.

Use the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu to
select speaker distances or levels.

Use the SET LEVELS menu to select the
desired speaker levels.

1 Press the
arrow button to return to
the SET DISTANCES menu.

1 Press the
arrow button to return to the
AUTO SPEAKER SETUP results screen.

1 Press the
arrow button to return to
the SET LEVELS menu.

2 Press the
or
arrow button to toggle between calibrated speaker distances
(AUTO) and original speaker distances.
The speaker graphics at the bottom of
the menu update to indicate the selected
values.

2 To select the other calibration procedure,
follow the instructions in Step 5. Otherwise,
press the
button to return to the
SPEAKER SETUP menu.

• Press the
and
arrow buttons to
toggle between calibrated output levels
(AUTO) and original output levels. The
speaker graphics at the bottom of the
menu update to indicate the selected
values.

3 Press the
button to apply the
selected values. A confirmation message
is displayed to indicate the applied values.

Note: The AUTO DISTANCES screen is shown
above as an example. The AUTO LEVELS
screen can be substituted.

• Press the
arrow button to apply the
selected values. A confirmation message is
displayed to indicate the applied values.

4 Press the
button twice in succession
to return to the SPEAKER SETUP menu.

• Press the
arrow button twice in succession to return to the SPEAKER SETUP
menu.

The AUTO DISTANCES menu is only accessible after the DISTANCES & LEVELS calibration is performed as a combined procedure.

The AUTO LEVELS menu is only accessible
after the DISTANCES & LEVELS calibration is
performed as a combined procedure.

3-51

Setup

Lexicon

PERFORMING AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION (continued)
Message

Description

Troubleshooting

The RV-8 successfully calibrated the value
for the selected speaker without error.

•

N/A

(SPEAKER)
SPEAKER IS NOT ENABLED

The selected speaker is not present in the
speaker setup.

•

Set the corresponding CUSTOM or THX SETUP menu parameter to include the selected
speaker in the speaker setup. (The RV-8 only calibrates values for speakers that are included in
the speaker setup.)

(SPEAKER)
SPEAKER OUT OF PHASE

The microphones detected out-of-phase
calibration noise signals, but the calibrated value is still accurate.

•

Examine speaker/associated amplifier connections to ensure that speaker wires are not crossed.

•

Dipolar speakers could cause this error. However, the RV-8 does not report this error unless at
least half of the microphones detect out-of-phase calibration noise signals.

(SPEAKER)
OK

(SPEAKER)
SIGNAL TOO LOW

(SPEAKER)
UNABLE TO CALCULATE

The microphones detected calibration
noise signals at an unusually low level.

The microphones did not detect calibration noise signals or the RV-8 could not
calculate a value.

•

Reflections from room objects could cause this error.

•

Drivers intentionally wired out-of-phase could cause this error.

•

The microphones might be positioned more than 30 feet (9.14m) from the selected speaker or in a
location where echoes obscure calibration noise signals. Refer to the placement examples on pages
3-40 to 3-44 to confirm that the microphones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration.

•

Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly connected to the RV-8 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection.

•

Refer to the microphone placement examples on pages 3-41 to 3-45 to confirm that the
microphones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration.

•

Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly connected to the RV-8 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection.
Refer to the microphone placement examples on pages 3-41 to 3-45 to confirm that the
microphones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration.

(SPEAKER)
MAY NOT BE ACCURATE

One or more microphones did not detect
calibration noise signals at a reasonable
level. The calibrated value could be inaccurate.

•

(SPEAKER)
SPKR OUTPUT TOO HIGH

The microphones detected calibration
noise signals at an unusually high level.

•

Decrease associated amplifier volume levels – including (if applicable) powered subwoofer amplifiers.

•

The microphones may be positioned too close (within 2 feet [0.61m]) of the selected speaker.
Refer to the microphone placement examples on pages 3-41 to 3-45 to confirm that the microphones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration.

(SPEAKER)
SPKR OUTPUT TOO LOW

The microphones detected calibration
noise signals at an unusually low level.

•

Increase associated amplifier volume levels – including (if applicable) powered subwoofer amplifiers.

•

The microphones may be positioned too far away (more than 30 feet [9.14m]) from the
selected speaker. See the microphone placement examples on pages 3-41 to 3-45 to confirm
that the microphones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration.

3-52

Setup

RV-8

MANUAL CALIBRATION
SETUP

SPEAKERS

MANUAL

Selecting the SPEAKER SETUP menu MANUAL option displays the MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu, to manually calibrate speaker distances and
output levels. The table below indicates available manual calibration options.
MAIN MENU

SETUP

SPEAKER SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

SET CROSSOVERS
CHECK MICROPHONES
AUTOMATIC
MANUAL
SET CROSSOVERS
BEFORE CALIBRATING

CUSTOM
MANUAL SETUP
SPEAKER SETUP
SPEAKER DISTANCES 40 Hz
LEVELS CALIBRATION60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
40RRHz
R SR
OFF
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
N/A
C
APART
0.0dB
M
SUB
0.0dB

Manual Options

L
0.0dB

SL RL
0.0dB

0.0dB

Details

SPEAKER DISTANCES

•

Provides manual calibration and individual adjustment of speaker distances.

INTERNAL NOISE TEST

•

Provides manual calibration and individual adjustment of output levels.

•

Automatically sends an internal calibration noise signal to each Main Zone audio output connector,
allowing for simultaneous output level adjustment.

•

Provides manual calibration and individual adjustment of output levels.

•

Requires an external calibration source such as an audio calibration disc.

•

Activates an appropriate listening mode based on the current Main Zone input source.

•

Provides amplitude limits for low-frequency signals sent to the Main Zone audio output connector
labeled Subwoofer, and low-frequency signals redirected to other Main Zone audio output connectors.

•

Protects speakers against input sources that produce low-frequency signal peaks.

EXTERNAL NOISE TEST

BASS PEAK LIMITERS

3-53

Setup

Lexicon

PERFORMING MANUAL SPEAKER DISTANCE CALIBRATION
SETUP

SPEAKERS

MANUAL

SPEAKER DISTANCES

Selecting the MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu SPEAKER DISTANCES option displays the SPEAKER DISTANCES menu, to manually calibrate speaker
distances.
MAIN MENU

SETUP

SPEAKER SETUP

MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

SET CROSSOVERS
CHECK MICROPHONES
AUTOMATIC
MANUAL

SPEAKER DISTANCES
LEVELS CALIBRATION

SET CROSSOVERS
BEFORE CALIBRATING

1. Follow the menu path shown above to select MANUAL SPEAKER
SETUP
SPEAKER DISTANCES. The SPEAKER DISTANCES menu
shown above will open in the on-screen display.
2. Press the
or
arrow buttons to highlight the desired speaker
distance parameter. Then, press the
arrow button to select the
highlighted speaker distance parameter.

RR
0.0ft

C
0.0ft
M
SUB
0.0ft

To manually calibrate speaker distances:

SR
0.0ft

0.0ft

L
0.0ft

SPEAKERSETUP
DISTANCES
CUSTOM
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER
UNITS

0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
FEET

0.0 to 30.0ft or 12.0m

METERS
FEET

SL RL
0.0ft

0.0ft

3. To determine the appropriate speaker distance, measure the
distance between the primary listening position and the front of
the speaker.
For example, when the FRONT LEFT parameter is selected,
measure the distance between the primary listening position
and the front of the front left speaker (connected to the Main
Zone audio output connector labeled Front L).
4. When the speaker distance has been measured, press the
and
arrow buttons to set the parameter to the closest available
value.

3-54

Setup

RV-8

PERFORMING MANUAL OUTPUT LEVEL CALIBRATION
SETUP

SPEAKERS

MANUAL

LEVELS CALIBRATION

Selecting the MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu LEVELS CALIBRATION option displays the LEVELS CALIBRATION menu shown below, to manually
calibrate output levels.
MAIN MENU

SETUP

SPEAKER SETUP

MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

SET CROSSOVERS
CHECK MICROPHONES
AUTOMATIC
MANUAL

SPEAKER DISTANCES
LEVELS CALIBRATION

SET CROSSOVERS
BEFORE CALIBRATING

0.0dB

INTERNAL NOISE TEST
EXTERNAL NOISE TEST
BASS PEAK LIMITERS
RR

0.0dB

M
SUB

L
0.0dB

INTERNAL NOISE
!CAUTION!
HIGH AUDIO LEVELS

0.0dB

LEVELS CALIBRATION
CUSTOM
SETUP

SL RL
0.0dB

0.0dB

SPEAKERSETUP
LEVEL ADJUST
CUSTOM
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER

+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB

-18.0 to +12.0dB

Note the following:
•

Use a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter to manually calibrate
output levels. A SPL meter is a device that measures the relative
loudness of the speakers to ensure accurate output level
calibration. SPL meters are available from electronic retailers
such as Radio Shack.

•

Output levels should be calibrated from the primary listening
position, placing the SPL meter at the approximate location
where the listener’s head will be during listening.

•

Output levels for speakers that are not included in the speaker
setup cannot be adjusted during the internal noise test. These
output levels can be adjusted during the external noise test, but
there is no need to do so.

3-55

Setup

Lexicon

INTERNAL NOISE TEST
SETUP

SPEAKERS

MANUAL

LEVELS CALIBRATION

INTERNAL NOISE TEST

Opens the INTERNAL NOISE message shown on the previous page,
which indicates that the internal noise test generates loud calibration
noise signals.

To manually calibrate output levels during the internal noise test:
1. Set the SPL meter to “C” weighting and “SLOW” response.
2. Place the SPL meter at the primary listening position.

When the INTERNAL NOISE message opens:
•

Press the
arrow button to open the SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST
menu shown on the previous page. When the SPEAKER LEVEL
ADJUST menu opens, the internal noise test automatically
begins.

•

Press the

button to skip the internal noise test.

During the internal noise test, the RV-8 sends calibration noise signals
to each speaker in the order shown on the SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST
menu. The cursor automatically scrolls through output level parameters, highlighting each parameter as the RV-8 sends the calibration
noise signal to the corresponding speaker. The calibration noise
signal is sent to each speaker for about 4 seconds.
Note:
When the internal noise test begins, the RV-8 automatically sets
volume level to +0dB. Avoid adjusting the master volume level while
the test is in progress, to achieve THX reference levels (75dB).
INTERNAL NOISE TEST LEVELS CALIBRATION MANUAL SPEAKERS SETUP

3-56

3. Press the
or
arrow button to highlight the desired output
level parameter. Then, quickly press the
button to select this
output level parameter. The horizontal bar graph shown on the
previous page will open in the on-screen display and automatic
scrolling will stop.
Note:
During the internal noise test, it is possible to select an output level
parameter just as the cursor is about to automatically scroll to the
next parameter, causing the RV-8 to send the calibration noise
signal to both speakers. If this occurs, reselect the desired speaker.
4. When the horizontal bar graph opens, press the
or
button
to select the output level that achieves a 75dB SPL meter reading
from the primary listening position.
5. Press
to close the parameter. The internal noise test will
continue and automatic scrolling will resume.
6. Repeat steps 2, 3, 4 and 5 until all desired output levels have
been set.

Setup

RV-8

EXTERNAL NOISE TEST
SETUP

SPEAKERS

MANUAL

LEVELS CALIBRATION

EXTERNAL NOISE TEST

Selecting the LEVELS CALIBRATION menu EXTERNAL NOISE TEST
option opens the SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST menu shown on page 3-55,
which manually calibrates output levels.
The external noise test requires an external calibration source such as
an audio calibration disc. When the external noise test is conducted,
the RV-8 activates a listening mode based on the current Main Zone
input source. Refer to the table below for more information about
external noise test listening mode activation.
When a listening mode is activated during the external noise test, all
custom listening mode menu parameter settings are ignored. The
listening mode is applied to the current Main Zone input source in its
factory-default condition. When the external noise test is finished, the
listening mode returns to its custom condition.
EXTERNAL NOISE TEST LEVELS CALIBRATION MANUAL SPEAKERS SETUP

INPUT SOURCE

LISTENING MODE

2-Channel
Dolby Digital
DTS(-ES)
5.1-Channel Analog

PLII MOVIE,

PLIIx MOVIE*

DIGITAL**
*

Note:
When the external noise test begins, the RV-8 automatically sets
volume level to +0dB. Avoid adjusting the master volume level while
the test is in progress, to achieve THX reference levels (75dB).

To manually calibrate output levels during the external noise test:
1. Set the SPL meter to “C” weighting and “SLOW” response.
2. Place the SPL meter at the primary listening position.
3. Press the
or
arrow button to highlight the output level
parameter you want. Then press the
button to select this
output level parameter.
The horizontal bar graph shown on page 3-55 is displayed.
4. Begin playback of the external calibration source and press the
or
arrow button to select the output level that achieves a 75dB
SPL Meter reading.
5. After selecting the output level, press the
the horizontal bar graph.

arrow button to close

6. Repeat steps 3, 4 and 5 until you have set all the output levels you
want.

5.1a BYPASS***

* These listening modes depend on the speaker configuration. Dolby Pro Logic IIx MOVIE
will only load when side and rear speakers are present.
**These listening mode names differ depending on the current input source, speaker
setup and parameter settings. Refer to the Listening Mode Descriptions section
beginning on page 6-4 for more information.
**If the Advanced Menu input is set to “ANALOG BYPASS OFF” the listening mode for the
EXTERNAL NOISE TEST is “5.1a STANDARD”.

3-57

Setup

Lexicon

SETTING BASS PEAK LIMITERS
SETUP

SPEAKERS

MANUAL

LEVELS CALIBRATION

BASS PEAK LIMITERS

The BASS PEAK LIMITERS option displays the BASS PEAK LIMITERS menu, to set amplitude limits on low-frequency signals sent to the Main Zone
audio output connectors, including the Subwoofer. The RV-8 is equipped with an internal limiter to prevent low-frequency signals from exceeding
a designated output level. This is essential for Dolby Digital and DTS(-ES) sources that produce low-frequency signal peaks at much higher output
levels than 2-channel sources. In home theaters, there is a danger of the subwoofers and their associated amplifiers overloading when attempting
to reproduce low-frequency signals.
MAIN MENU

SETUP

SPEAKER SETUP

MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP

LEVELS CALIBRATION

BASS PEAK LIMITER

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

SET CROSSOVERS
CHECK MICROPHONES
AUTOMATIC
MANUAL

SPEAKER DISTANCES
LEVELS CALIBRATION

INTERNAL NOISE TEST
EXTERNAL NOISE TEST
BASS PEAK LIMITERS

CAL NOISE
LIMITER
LIMIT ADJ

R
0.0dB

SET CROSSOVERS
BEFORE CALIBRATING

ON
ON
100dB

RR
0.0dB

!CAUTION!
HIGH AUDIO LEVELS

0.0dB

C
0.0dB
M
SUB

L
0.0dB

0.0dB

SL RL
0.0dB

75 to 120dB

0.0dB

ON
OFF

CAL NOISE
Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Setting

CAL NOISE

ON, OFF

LIMITER

ON, OFF

LIMIT ADJ

100dB

75 to 120dB

SETUP

SPEAKERS

ON, OFF
MANUAL

LEVELS CALIBRATION

BASS PEAK LIMITERS

CAL NOISE

Determines whether bass peak limiters are set with an internal or
external calibration source.
To set the CAL NOISE parameter:

Note:
Configure BASS PEAK LIMITERS menu parameter settings whether
output levels are automatically or manually calibrated.

•
•

Select ON to activate an internal calibration noise signal to set
bass peak limiters.
Select OFF to deactivate the internal calibration noise signal.
Setting bass peak limiters with the calibration noise set to OFF requires
an external calibration source such as an audio calibration disc.

3-58

Setup

RV-8

LIMITER
SETUP

SPEAKERS

ON, OFF
MANUAL

LEVELS CALIBRATION

BASS PEAK LIMITERS

LIMITER

Limits low-frequency signals sent to the subwoofer or redirected to
other speakers.
To set the LIMITER parameter:
•

Select ON to restrict the output level of the low-frequency
signals to the LIMIT ADJ parameter setting.

•

Select OFF to allow an unrestricted signal output level,
regardless of the LIMIT ADJ parameter setting.

LIMIT ADJ
SETUP

SPEAKERS

75 to 120dB
MANUAL

LEVELS CALIBRATION

BASS PEAK LIMITERS

LIMITER ADJ

Sets amplitude limits applied to the Subwoofer output connector,
and to other Main Zone audio output connectors to which lowfrequency signals are redirected.
To set the LIMIT ADJ parameter:
1. Select the LIMIT ADJ parameter.
The parameter initially sets to 75dB.
2. Press the

and

arrow buttons to change the parameter value.

The selected amplitude is applied when the SUB LIMITER
parameter is set to ON.

3-59

Setup

Lexicon

I/O CONFIG
SETUP

I/O CONFIG

The I/O CONFIG option is used to configure the analog audio input connectors as eight (Left/Right) stereo connectors, five (Left/Right) stereo
connectors and one 5.1-channel configuration (Front L/R, Center, Subwoofer, Side L/R), or as two stereo connectors and two 5.1-channel
configurations.
MAIN MENU

SETUP

I/O CONFIG

REAR PANEL CONFIG

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

ANALOG INPUTS
AMP OUTPUTS

8 STEREO INPUTS
OR
5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG
OR
2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG

8 STEREO INPUTS
SETUP

I/O CONFIG

ANALOG INPUTS

8 STEREO INPUTS

Select the 8 STEREO INPUTS option to configure the analog audio
input connectors as eight stereo connectors.

3-60

When 8 STEREO INPUTS is selected:
•

All analog audio input connectors are configured as stereo
connectors.

•

The 5.1-channel connectors are not available.

•

Input sources that were assigned to the 5.1 ANLG (3-5) and 5.1
ANLG (6-8) are reassigned to the stereo connectors labeled 3
and 6, respectively.

Setup

RV-8

5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG
SETUP

I/O CONFIG

ANALOG INPUTS

2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG
SETUP

5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG

I/O CONFIG

ANALOG INPUTS

2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG

Configures the analog audio input connectors as five stereo
connectors and one 5.1-channel configuration.

Configures the analog audio input connectors as two stereo
connectors and two 5.1-channel configurations.

When the analog audio input connectors are configured as five
stereo and one 5.1-channel configuration:

When the analog audio input connectors are configured as two
stereo and two 5.1-channel connectors:

•

The connectors labeled 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 are configured as
stereo connectors.

•

The connectors labeled 1 and 2 are configured as stereo connectors.

•

The connectors labeled 6, 7 and 8 are configured as a 5.1-channel
connector. This connector is sent to the Main Zone audio output
connectors, as indicated in the table at the bottom of the next
column.

The connectors labeled 3, 4 and 5 are configured as a 5.1channel connector, and the connectors labeled 6, 7 and 8 are
configured as a 5.1-channel connector. These connectors are
sent to the Main Zone audio output connectors as indicated in
the table at the bottom of this column.

•

Two-channel sources that were assigned to the stereo connectors
labeled 6, 7 and 8 are reassigned to the 5.1-channel connector
labeled 5.1 ANLG (6-8). The 5.1-channel connectors should only be
used with 5.1-channel analog sources such as DVD-As and SACDs.

•

2-channel sources that were assigned to the stereo connectors
labeled 3, 4 and 5 are reassigned to the 5.1-channel connector
labeled 5.1 ANLG (3-5). Two-channel sources that were assigned
to the stereo connectors labeled 6, 7 and 8 are reassigned to the
5.1-channel connector labeled 5.1 ANLG (6-8). The 5.1-channel
connectors should only be used with 5.1-channel analog
sources such as DVD-As and SACDs.

The 5.1-channel analog audio input connectors are sent to the Main
Zone analog audio output connectors, as shown in the table below.
Input Connector

Output Connector

(L)

Front L

(R)

Front R

(C)

Center

(SUB)

Sub

(LS)

Side L and Rear L

(RS)

Side R and Rear R

3-61

Setup

Lexicon

I/O CONFIG

(continued)

MAIN MENU

SETUP

I/O CONFIG

AMP OUTPUTS

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

ANALOG INPUTS
AMP OUTPUTS

MAIN 7.1
MAIN 5.1 & ZONE2 2.0
MAIN 5.1 & ZONE3 2.0

MAIN 7.1
SETUP

I/O CONFIG

MAIN 5.1 & ZONE3 2.0
AMP INPUTS

MAIN 7.1

SETUP

I/O CONFIG

AMP INPUTS

MAIN 5.1 & ZONE3 2.0

When set to MAIN 7.1, all of the amplifier outputs on the rear panel
will be configured for use in the Main Zone. Outputs 3 and 7 are
used for the rear speakers (Rear L/R).

Configures amplifier outputs 3 and 7 for use in Zone 3. Outputs 1, 2,
4, 5 and 6 will be configured for use in the Main Zone. The input
source selected for Zone 3 will be output on amplifier outputs 3 and 7.

MAIN 5.1 & ZONE2 2.0

Note:

SETUP

I/O CONFIG

AMP INPUTS

MAIN 5.1 & ZONE2 2.0

Configures amplifier outputs 3 and 7 for use in Zone 2. Outputs 1, 2,
4, 5 and 6 will be configured for use in the Main Zone. The input
source selected for Zone 2 will be output on amplifier outputs 3 and 7.
Note:
If the current speaker configuration is using rear speakers, a warning
message will appear alerting the user to the fact that the rear speakers will
be disabled for the Main Zone when the 5.1 MAIN & ZONE2 2.0 setting
is chosen. Press the right menu button to confirm the change. Pressing
any other button will cancel the change.

3-62

If the current speaker configuration is using rear speakers, a warning
message will appear alerting the user to the fact that the rear speakers will
be disabled for the Main Zone when the 5.1 MAIN & ZONE3 2.0 setting
is chosen. Press the right menu button to confirm the change. Pressing
any other button will cancel the change.

Setup

RV-8

DISPLAY SETUP
SETUP

DISPLAYS

Selecting the SETUP menu DISPLAYS option opens the DISPLAY SETUP menu, which is used to customize the on-screen and front-panel displays,
restore audio/video synchronization, and activate and create a custom unit name.

MAIN MENU

SETUP

DISPLAY SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
A/V SYNC DELAY
OFF
CUSTOM NAME
OFF
EDIT CUSTOM NAME

Parameter

Default
Setting

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

Refer to page 3-64

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

Refer to page 3-66

A/V SYNC DELAY

OFF

OFF, 1 to 60ms

CUSTOM NAME

OFF

ON, OFF

EDIT CUSTOM NAME

N/A

OFF, 1 to 60ms

Possible Setting

3-63

Setup

Lexicon

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY SETUP
SETUP

DISPLAYS

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

Opens the ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu, which is used to customize the on-screen display.

MAIN MENU

SETUP

DISPLAY SETUP

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
A/V SYNC DELAY
OFF
CUSTOM NAME
OFF
EDIT CUSTOM NAME

STATUS
POSITION
FORMAT
BACKGROUND

Parameter

Default Setting Possible Settings

STATUS

2 SECONDS

ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS,
ALWAYS OFF

POSITION

TOP

TOP, CENTER, BOTTOM

FORMAT

NTSC

SECAM, PAL, NTSC

BACKGROUND ON

ON, OFF

ALWAYS ON
2 SECONDS
ALWAYS OFF

2 SECONDS
TOP
NTSC
ON

TOP
CENTER
BOTTOM
SECAM
PAL
NTSC

ON
OFF

STATUS
SETUP

ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS, ALWAYS OFF
DISPLAYS

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

STATUS

Activates and deactivates the on-screen display sent to the Main Zone
video output connector. When set to ALWAYS ON, the on-screen display
remains on at all times. When set to 2 SECONDS, the on-screen display
appears for 2 seconds whenever the input source changes or the RV-8
receives a command. When set to ALWAYS OFF, the on-screen display
remains off at all times. It will not reappear until the ON-SCREEN
DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is set to ALWAYS ON or 2 SECONDS.

Note:
When the ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is set to ALWAYS
OFF, the on-screen display immediately disappears. Use the front-panel
display as a guide to reset the parameter to ALWAYS ON or 2 SECONDS.

3-64

Setup

RV-8

POSITION
SETUP

DISPLAYS

TOP, CENTER, BOTTOM
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

POSITION

Controls the vertical position of the two-line status on the display
device screen. When set to TOP, the two-line status appears near the
top of the display device screen. When set to CENTER, the two-line
status is centered on the display device screen. When set to
BOTTOM, the two-line status appears near the bottom of the display
device screen. Refer to page 2-28 for more information about the
two-line status.

FORMAT
SETUP

DISPLAYS

SECAM, PAL, NTSC
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

BACKGROUND
SETUP

DISPLAYS

ON, OFF
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

BACKGROUND

Activates and deactivates the menu background. When set to ON,
on-screen display menus appear over a solid blue or gray background
(depending on the display device). When set to OFF, on-screen
display menus appear over the video input signal.
Note:
When the BACKGROUND parameter is set to OFF, the on-screen display
will disappear if the display device is using the component video output
connector.

FORMAT

Controls the compatibility between the video input connectors, the
video switcher and the display device. Select the setting that is
compatible with the source components and display device.
Note:
The FORMAT parameter affects the composite and S-Video output
connectors. It does not affect the component video output connector.

3-65

Setup

Lexicon

FRONT-PANEL DISPLAY SETUP
Opens the FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu, which is used to customize the front-panel display.
MAIN MENU

SETUP

DISPLAY SETUP

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
A/V SYNC DELAY
OFF
CUSTOM NAME
OFF
EDIT CUSTOM NAME

STATUS
BRIGHTNESS

ALWAYS ON
100%

ALWAYS ON
2 SECONDS
ALWAYS OFF
100%
75%
50%
25%

Parameter

Default Setting Possible Settings

Note:

STATUS

ALWAYS ON

When the FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is set to
ALWAYS OFF, the front-panel display immediately disappears. Use the onscreen display as a guide to reset the parameter to ALWAYS ON or 2
SECONDS.

BRIGHTNESS 100%

STATUS
SETUP

ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS,
ALWAYS OFF
100%, 75%, 50%, 25%

ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS, ALWAYS OFF
DISPLAYS

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

STATUS

Activates and deactivates the front-panel display. When set to ALWAYS
ON, the front-panel display remains on at all times. When set to 2
SECONDS, the front-panel display appears for 2 seconds whenever the
input source changes or the RV-8 receives a command. When set to
ALWAYS OFF, the front-panel display remains off at all times.

3-66

BRIGHTNESS
SETUP

DISPLAYS

100%,75%, 50%, 25%
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

BRIGHTNESS

Controls the brightness of front-panel display characters. When a
setting is selected, front-panel display illumination automatically
adjusts to the selected brightness.

Setup

RV-8

MAIN MENU

SETUP

DISPLAY SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
A/V SYNC DELAY
OFF
CUSTOM NAME
OFF
EDIT CUSTOM NAME

A/V SYNC DELAY
SETUP

DISPLAYS

OFF, 1 to 60ms

EDIT CUSTOM NAME
RV-8
>

ON
OFF

BUTTONS TO EDIT
UP TO 20 CHARACTERS
BUTTON TO ADVANCE

OFF, 1 to 60ms

EDIT CUSTOM NAME
SETUP

A/V SYNC DELAY

DISPLAYS

EDIT CUSTOM NAME

Restores audio/video synchronization when using products such as
video processors that introduce a video signal delay. This parameter
can be used to set an audio signal delay to compensate for the video
signal delay.

Opens the EDIT CUSTOM NAME menu shown below, which can be
used to create a custom unit name. When the CUSTOM parameter is
set to ON, the custom unit name appears in the on-screen and frontpanel displays when the RV-8 is activated.

CUSTOM NAME

To customize the name of the RV-8:

SETUP

DISPLAYS

ON, OFF
CUSTOM NAME

Activates the display of a custom unit name, which appears when the
RV-8 is activated. When set to ON, the custom name scrolls across
the on-screen and front-panel displays when the RV-8 is activated.
When set to OFF, the custom name does not appear when the RV-8 is
activated. The custom name can be entered in the DISPLAY SETUP
menu EDIT CUSTOM NAME menu.

1. Follow the EDIT CUSTOM NAME menu path to open the EDIT
CUSTOM NAME drop-down menu shown below.
2. When the EDIT CUSTOM NAME drop-down menu opens, press
the remote control
and
arrow buttons to change the
character above the cursor (^).
3. When the desired character has been selected, press the
arrow
button to advance to the next character space. The cursor will
automatically wrap to the first character space when the last
character space is passed.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the desired custom unit name.
5. When the desired custom unit name has been entered, press the
arrow button to close the EDIT CUSTOM NAME drop-down
menu and return to the DISPLAY SETUP menu.
3-67

Setup

Lexicon

VOLUME CONTROL SETUP
SETUP

VOLUME CONTROLS

Opens the VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu, which is used to configure Main Zone, Zone 2, Zone 3, and Headphone volume levels.
MAIN MENU

SETUP

VOLUME CONTROL SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

MAIN PWR ON
MUTE LEVEL
Z2 PWR ON
Z2 PWR ON
HEADPHONE
MAX VOLUME

-30dB
-30dB
-30dB
-30dB
-30dB
+12dB

Parameter

Default
Setting

Possible Settings

MAIN PWR ON

–30dB

LAST LVL, –80 to +12dB

MUTE LEVEL

–30dB

–40dB, –30dB, –20dB, –10dB, FULL

Z2 PWR ON

–30dB

LAST LVL, –80 to +12dB

Z3 PWR ON

–30dB

LAST LVL, –80 to +12dB

HEADPHONE

–30dB

LAST LVL, –80 to +12dB

MAX VOLUME

–12dB

–80 to +12dB

MAIN PWR ON
SETUP

VOLUME CONTROLS

LAST LVL, –80 to +12dB
MAIN PWR ON

Sets the Main Zone volume level that will be selected whenever the
Main Zone is activated. When set to LAST LVL, the Main Zone
activates at the volume level that was last selected in the previous
operating session.

3-68

LAST LVL, -80 to +12dB

VOLUME CONTROL SETUP
MAIN PWR ON
-30dB
MUTE LEVEL
-30dB
ZONE
PWR
Z2
PWR
ON ON
-30dB
MAX
VOLON
+12dB
Z2
PWR
-30dB
HEADPHONE
-30dB
MAX VOLUME
+12dB

MUTE LEVEL
SETUP

VOLUME CONTROLS

-10dB
-20dB
-30dB
-40dB
FULL MUTE

–40dB, –30dB, –20dB, –10dB, FULL MUTE
MUTE LEVEL

Sets the amount of attenuation that occurs in the Main Zone when the
front-panel or remote control Mute button is pressed. When set to FULL
MUTE, Main Zone volume level will be fully attenuated. Otherwise, Main
Zone volume level will be attenuated to the selected level.

Z2 PWR ON
SETUP

VOLUME CONTROLS

LAST LVL, –80 to +12dB
ZONE PWR ON

Sets the Zone 2 volume level that will be selected whenever Zone 2 is
activated. When set to LAST LVL, Zone 2 activates at the volume level
that was last selected in the previous operating session. LAST LVL is
displayed on power up if the Zone 2 was powered off using the Zone
2 Off button on the remote control or front panel.

Setup

RV-8

Z3 PWR ON
SETUP

VOLUME CONTROLS

LAST LVL, –80 to +12dB
ZONE PWR ON

Sets the Zone 3 volume level that will be selected whenever Zone 3 is
activated. When set to LAST LVL, Zone 3 activates at the volume level
that was last selected in the previous operating session. LAST LVL is
displayed on power up if the Zone 3 was powered off using the Zone
3 Off button on the remote control or front panel.

HEADPHONE
SETUP

VOLUME CONTROLS

LAST LVL, –80 to +12dB

headphones will activate at the last volume level that was selected
when they were last plugged in. When the headphones are
unplugged, the volume will revert to the MAIN PWR ON setting.

MAX VOLUME
SETUP

VOLUME CONTROLS

-80 TO +12dB
MAX VOLUME

Selects the maximum volume level for the Main Zone. When a value
is selected, the RV-8 automatically sets Main Zone volume level to the
selected value when the current level is higher.

ZONE PWR ON

Sets the Headphone volume level that will be selected whenever
headphones are plugged in to the RV-8. When set to LAST LVL, the

3-69

Setup

Lexicon

TRIGGER SETUP
SETUP

TRIGGER

Selecting the SETUP menu TRIGGER option opens the
TRIGGER SETUP menu shown to the right, which can be used
to configure the trigger output connector labeled 1. The RV-8
rear panel houses two 12V DC trigger output connectors. The
connector labeled PWR – the power trigger output connector
– is not configurable. It is activated when the RV-8 is activated,
and deactivated when the RV-8 is deactivated. The trigger
output connector labeled 1 can be configured for remote or
program operation.
Parameter

Default Setting Possible Settings

REMOTE ONLY

ON, OFF

Program Operation

OFF

ON, OFF

REMOTE ONLY
SETUP

TRIGGER

ON, OFF
REMOTE ONLY

Configures the trigger output connector labeled 1 for remote
operation. When set to ON, this connector is configured for
remote operation. The remote control play and stop buttons
turns the trigger on and off. The RV-8 ignores all other
TRIGGER SETUP menu parameter settings. When set to OFF,
the trigger output connector labeled 1 is not configured for
remote operation. It can be configured for program operation.

3-70

MAIN MENU

SETUP

TRIGGER SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

REMOTE ONLY
DVD1
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
PHONO
ZONE2 INPUTS
ZONE3 INPUTS
FILM
TV
MUSIC
MUSIC SURR
PLIIx + THX
PLIIx MOV
PLIIx MUS
PLII+ THX
PLII MOVIE
PLII MUSIC
PL + THX
PRO LOGIC
+ THX
CIN
MUSIC
NIGHTCLUB
CONCERT HHALL
CHURCH
CATHEDRAL
PANORAMA
2-CH SURROUND
2-CHANNEL
MONO LOGIC
MONO SURROUND
MONO
5.1 FILM
5.1 TV
5.1 MUSIC
SurEX
MUSIC
5.1 PLIIx MOV
5.1 PLIIx MUS
DIGITAL EX
5.1 2-CHANNEL
5.1 MONO LOGIC
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO
FILM

TRIGGER SETUP
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

MUSIC
2-CHAN
5.1a FILM
5.1a MUSIC
5.1a
SurEX
5.1a
MUSIC
5.1a STANDARD
5.1a 2-CHANNEL
5.1a BYPASS
2CH BYPASS
HEADPHONE
HEADPHONE 5.1
HEADPHONE
HEADPHONE 5.1a
LIVE! SMALL
LIVE! MED
LIVE! LARGE

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

* TRIGGER SETUP menu
listening mode names
are fixed, meaning
these names do not
change when certain
encoding is present. For
instance, the 5.1 THX
SurEX listening mode
label appears whether
THX Ultra2, THX Surround EX, or no encoding is engaged.

ON
OFF

Setup

RV-8

PROGRAM OPERATION PARAMETERS
SETUP

TRIGGER

ON, OFF

(PROGRAM OPERATION PARAMETER)

Configure the trigger output connector labeled 1 for
program operation. All TRIGGER SETUP menu parameters–
except the REMOTE ONLY parameter–are considered
program operation parameters. The connector can be
associated with multiple inputs and listening modes at the
same time.
When the REMOTE ONLY parameter is set to OFF and
program operation parameters are set to ON, the trigger
output connector labeled 1 is associated with the corresponding Main Zone inputs, Main Zone listening modes
or Zone 2 inputs. (The connector cannot be associated
with individual Zone 2 inputs; rather, it can be associated
with the Zone 2 inputs as a group.) When configured for
program operation, the connector is activated when the
corresponding inputs and listening modes are selected
and deactivated when the corresponding inputs and
listening modes are deselected.
Note:
When the CUSTOM menu RESET MODE option is selected to
restore the factory default version of the selected listening
mode, the corresponding TRIGGER SETUP menu listening
mode parameter is automatically set to OFF.

MAIN MENU

SETUP

TRIGGER SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

MUSIC
2-CHAN
5.1a FILM
5.1a MUSIC
5.1a
SurEX
5.1a
MUSIC
5.1a STANDARD
5.1a 2-CHANNEL
5.1a BYPASS
2CH BYPASS
HEADPHONE
HEADPHONE 5.1
HEADPHONE
HEADPHONE 5.1a
LIVE! SMALL
LIVE! MED
LIVE! LARGE

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

ON
OFF

3-71

Setup

Lexicon

TUNER SETUP
SETUP

TUNER SETUP

Selecting the SETUP menu TUNER SETUP option opens the TUNER SETUP menu, which is used to configure the AM/FM radio tuner.
MAIN MENU

SETUP

TUNER SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

REGION
USA
SCAN SENS
LOW
AUTOLOAD
CLEAR ALL
TUNER PRESETS
DISPLAY
RDS NAME
RADIO TEXT
ON
SCROLL RATE
MEDIUM
AUTO FREQUENCY
ON

REGION

Parameter

Default
Setting

Possible Settings

REGION

USA

USA, EUROPE, JAPAN, E. EUR

SCAN SENS

LOW

LOW, MED, HIGH

AUTOLOAD

N/A

CLEAR ALL

N/A

TUNER PRESETS

N/A

DISPLAY

RDS NAME RDS NAME, PRESET NAME,
FREQUENCY

RADIO TEXT

ON, OFF

SCROLL RATE

MEDIUM

SLOW, MEDIUM, FAST

AUTO FREQUENCY ON

3-72

USA
EUROPE
JAPAN
E. EUR

ON, OFF

SETUP

USA, EUROPE, JAPAN, E. EUR
TUNER SETUP

REGION

Sets the tuner region. The four regions are USA, EUROPE, JAPAN and
E. EUR. The table on the next page lists the band limits and increments for these regions.
Note:
The tuner user interface will not allow illegal frequencies to be entered. It
will always set at the closest valid frequency. For example, if the RV-8 has
USA set as the current region, entering 107.8MHz will result in 107.9MHz
being the actual tuner frequency. If the value is less than the lowest
frequency, it will set it to LO LIMIT for the appropriate region. Likewise, if
the dialed value is larger than the highest allowed frequency, it will
actually set it to the HI LIMIT for the appropriate region.

Setup

RV-8

MAIN MENU

SETUP

TUNER SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

REGION
USA
SCAN SENS
LOW
AUTOLOAD
CLEAR ALL
TUNER PRESETS
DISPLAY
RDS NAME
RADIO TEXT
ON
SCROLL RATE
MEDIUM
AUTO FREQUENCY
ON

SCAN SENS
SETUP

TUNER SETUP

LOW
MED
HIGH

LOW, MED, HIGH
REGION

Selects the Scan Sensitivity parameter, which can be used to set the
threshold the system will use to tune to a new station. The default
setting is LOW sensitivity (only the strongest station frequencies will
tune). If the LOW setting does not tune enough stations, try the MED
(medium) or HIGH settings.

TUNER REGION BAND LIMIT AND INCREMENTS
REGION

FM LO LIMIT

FM HI LIMIT

FM INCREMENT

AM LO LIMIT

AM HI LIMIT

AM INCREMENT

USA

87.90MHZ

107.90MHZ

200 KHZ/.2MHZ

520KHZ

1720KHZ

10KHZ

EUROPE

87.50MHZ

108.00MHZ

50KHZ/.05MHZ

520KHZ

1602KHZ

9KHZ

JAPAN

76.00MHZ

91.00MHZ

50KHZ/.05MHZ

522KHZ

1720KHZ

9KHZ

E. EUR

64.00MHZ

76.00MHZ

50KHZ/.05MHZ

520KHZ

1720KHZ

9KHZ

3-73

Setup

Lexicon

TUNER SETUP

(continued)

MAIN MENU

SETUP

TUNER SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

USA
REGION
LOW
SCAN SENS
AUTOLOAD
CLEAR ALL
TUNER PRESETS
DISPLAY
RDS NAME
RADIO TEXT
ON
SCROLL RATE
MEDIUM
AUTO FREQUENCY
ON

PRESS RIGHT J
TO START AUTOLOAD

AUTOLOAD
SETUP

TUNER SETUP

AUTOLOAD

Automatically scans and stores presets for the currently selected
frequency band.
To select the AUTOLOAD option, highlight AUTOLOAD in the TUNER
SETUP menu and press the right ( ) arrow. The message “PRESS
RIGHT TO START AUTOLOAD” appears in the on-screen and frontpanel displays.
•

To cancel the AUTOLOAD command, press the left (

•

AUTOLOAD skips presets with previously stored values and uses
the next available preset.

•

Once all available stations have been scanned, or if any TUNER
button is pressed (including the remote’s buttons), AUTOLOAD
will stop.

•

To autoload stations from the other frequency band, select that
band and restart AUTOLOAD.

3-74

) arrow.

Note:
Presets are saved when the unit is powered down. Because the
AUTOLOAD function preserves any existing presets, consider using the
CLEAR ALL function before using AUTOLOAD. Note that some channels
may be repeated in the preset section if AUTOLOAD is used more than
once since the last CLEAR ALL.

Setup

RV-8

MAIN MENU

SETUP

TUNER SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

REGION
USA
SCAN SENS
LOW
AUTOLOAD
CLEAR ALL
TUNER PRESETS
DISPLAY
RDS NAME
RADIO TEXT
ON
SCROLL RATE
MEDIUM
AUTO FREQUENCY
ON

CLEAR ALL
SETUP

TUNER SETUP

PRESS RIGHT J
TO CLEAR ALL PRESETS

TUNER PRESETS
CLEAR ALL

SETUP

Clears all of the presets. When this option is highlighted, press the
right ( ) arrow to select. The message “PRESS RIGHT
TO CLEAR
ALL PRESETS” will appear in the on-screen and front-panel displays.
(Press the left ( ) arrow to cancel the CLEAR ALL command.)

TUNER SETUP

TUNER PRESETS

This selection provides an alternative access point to the TUNER
PRESETS menu. For more information, see “Tuner Presets” on
page 5-2.

This should be used after all presets have been entered but it is
desired to rescan in order to obtain new presets. For example, if you
have moved to a new city, it would be necessary to clear all existing
presets and scan for local stations.

MAIN MENU

SETUP

TUNER SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

REGION
USA
SCAN SENS
LOW
AUTOLOAD
CLEAR ALL
TUNER PRESETS
DISPLAY
RDS NAME
RADIO TEXT
ON
SCROLL RATE
MEDIUM
AUTO FREQUENCY
ON

3-75

Setup

Lexicon

TUNER SETUP

(continued)

DISPLAY
SETUP

TUNER SETUP

MAIN MENU

SETUP

TUNER SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

REGION
USA
SCAN SENS
LOW
AUTOLOAD
CLEAR ALL
TUNER PRESETS
DISPLAY
RDS NAME
RADIO TEXT
ON
SCROLL RATE
MEDIUM
AUTO FREQUENCY
ON

RDS NAME, PRESET NAME, FREQUENCY
DISPLAY

Identifies the current channel setting, in the top right corner of the
OSD and front panel display. There are three possible selections: RDS
NAME, PRESET NAME, and FREQUENCY. The default setting is RDS
NAME.
PRESET NAME displays the name given to the preset frequency of the
currently selected channel. If the current channel is not a tuner
preset, then the channel frequency will be displayed.
RDS NAME displays the station's Program Service (PS) name, which is
intended to be used to identify a station or station program. If the
RDS information is not available, then the channel frequency will be
displayed.
FREQUENCY displays the actual frequency value of the channel
selected.

3-76

RDS NAME
PRESET NAME
FREQUENCY

Note:
In the US, some stations broadcast other information in place of the
Program Service (PS) name, such as a text messaging feature similar to
Radio Text (RT). This can make it difficult to identify the station. You may
wish to select PRESET NAME instead of an RSD NAME in this instance.

Setup

RV-8

MAIN MENU

SETUP

TUNER SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

REGION
USA
SCAN SENS
LOW
AUTOLOAD
CLEAR ALL
TUNER PRESETS
DISPLAY
RDS NAME
RADIO TEXT
ON
SCROLL RATE
MEDIUM
AUTO FREQUENCY
ON

RADIO TEXT
SETUP

TUNER SETUP

ON, OFF
RADIO TEXT

SCROLL RATE
SETUP

Activates the RADIO TEXT (RT) feature. Radio Text is presented as
scrolling text in the bottom row of the front-panel and on-screen
displays. Radio text can contain up to 64 characters and whatever
text the station broadcasts - such as the title and performer of the
current song, the station call letters or the station byline. Not all
stations broadcast RT. When tuned to a station that broadcasts Radio
Text, it will take approximately ten seconds to display the text.

ON
OFF

TUNER SETUP

SLOW, MEDIUM, FAST
SCROLL RATE

Controls the scrolling speed of the Radio Text. The default setting is
MEDIUM. For faster text scrolling, select FAST. For slower text
scrolling, select SLOW.

When Radio Text is active, additional information is displayed in the
scrolling text. After the RT from the radio station has finished
scrolling, double asterisks (**) are displayed, followed by the currently
set listening mode, volume level, and tuner frequency. A second set
of double asterisks identifies the end of the tuner information and the
beginning repeat of the station's Radio Text.
MAIN MENU

SETUP

TUNER SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

REGION
USA
SCAN SENS
LOW
AUTOLOAD
CLEAR ALL
TUNER PRESETS
DISPLAY
RDS NAME
RADIO TEXT
ON
SCROLL RATE
MEDIUM
AUTO FREQUENCY
ON

SLOW
MEDIUM
FAST

3-77

Setup

Lexicon

TUNER SETUP

(continued)

MAIN MENU

SETUP

TUNER SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

USA
REGION
LOW
SCAN SENS
AUTOLOAD
CLEAR ALL
TUNER PRESETS
DISPLAY
RDS NAME
RADIO TEXT
ON
SCROLL RATE
MEDIUM
AUTO FREQUENCY
ON

AUTO FREQUENCY
SETUP

TUNER SETUP

ON, OFF
AUTO FREQUENCY

Checks for alternate frequency broadcasts in case of station drop out
or signal fade. The default setting is ON. Many radio stations
broadcast on several frequencies simultaneously. When active, AUTO
FREQUENCY checks for these alternate frequency broadcasts when
signal failure is detected.
If the main frequency drops out and AUTO FREQUENCY is activated,
the volume will mute briefly until the alternate broadcast is received.

3-78

ON
OFF

AUTO FREQUENCY will only switch to a new frequency when
the following conditions are met:
•

The main frequency signal starts to fade.

•

The channel identification of the alternate frequency is an exact
match of the currently selected frequency.

•

The alternate frequency detected has a stronger signal strength
than the currently selected frequency.

•

The AUTO FREQUENCY feature is ON.

Setup

RV-8

LOCK OPTIONS
SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

Selecting the SETUP menu LOCK OPTIONS option opens the LOCK OPTIONS menu, which is used to protect MODE ADJUST, AUDIO CONTROLS
and SETUP menu branch parameter settings from accidental changes.
MAIN MENU

SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

MODES
UNLOCKED
AUDIO CNTRL UNLOCKED
SETUP
UNLOCKED

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

MODES

UNLOCKED

LOCKED, UNLOCKED

AUDIO CNTRL

UNLOCKED

LOCKED, UNLOCKED

SETUP

UNLOCKED

LOCKED, UNLOCKED

MODES
SETUP

LOCKED, UNLOCKED
LOCK OPTIONS

MODES

AUDIO CNTRL
SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LOCKED, UNLOCKED
AUDIO CNTRL

Controls AUDIO CONTROLS menu branch settings. When set to
LOCKED, these settings cannot be adjusted. When set to
UNLOCKED, these settings can be adjusted.

SETUP
SETUP

Controls MODE ADJUST menu branch settings, which includes all listening mode menu settings. When set to LOCKED, these settings
cannot be adjusted. When set to UNLOCKED, these settings can be
adjusted.

LOCKED
UNLOCKED

LOCKED, UNLOCKED
LOCK OPTIONS

SETUP

Controls SETUP menu branch settings. When set to LOCKED, these
settings cannot be adjusted. When set to UNLOCKED, these settings
can be adjusted.

3-79

Setup

Lexicon

LIVE! CALIBRATION
SETUP

LIVE! CALIBRATION

LIVE! (Lexicon Intelligent Variable Environment) is a proprietary mode
designed to transform the way your listening room sounds. LIVE! uses a
combination of microphones and digital signal processing (DSP) to
enhance the room acoustics and create the illusion of a larger, more
reverberant listening space. LIVE! CALIBRATION must be completed
before using any of the LIVE! modes.
Notes:
You should run automatic calibration before running LIVE! CALIBRATION.
See page 3-36 for instructions on running an automatic calibration. Any
changes to the LEVELS CALIBRATION or CROSSOVER SETUP in the
SPEAKER SETUP menu will cause LIVE! to become uncalibrated.
If power is lost during calibration of LIVE!, previous settings may be lost
and recalibration of speaker levels and distances, as well as LIVE! is
required.
The Bass, Treble, Tilt EQ and Loudness controls do not function when
LIVE! is running. While LIVE! is active, the BASS, TREBLE, and TILT EQ
parameters are shown in the AUDIO CONTROLS menu as set to 0. The
LOUDNESS parameter is shown as set to OFF.
LIVE! requires two microphones, available in a kit from your authorized
Lexicon dealer. (If you own the Lexicon four-microphone kit, there is
no need to purchase the two-microphone kit. The microphones should
be permanently mounted in the listening room. Performing LIVE!
CALIBRATION with microphones other than those in the kit can
produce undesirable results.
LIVE! requires that a minimum of four speakers (Front L/R, and either
side L/R or Rear L/R) be set up and connected to the amplifier. If no

subwoofer is present, the crossover setting of the Front L/R speakers
should be set to FULL.
Proper microphone placement, both during calibration and when
running LIVE!, is essential to achieving the desired results. Microphone
placement instructions and illustrations are included in this section.
The location of the sound source (piano, guitar, voices, etc.) is
not critical. LIVE! compensates for sounds that are closer to one
microphone or another.

CONNECTING THE MICROPHONES
CAUTION!
•

The Lexicon microphones require careful handling.
Dropping or otherwise physically abusing the microphones
can cause irreparable damage to the microphone.

•

The microphone wires also require careful handling. Do not
sharply bend the wires or place objects on them.

1. Make sure the RV-8 is powered off or in standby mode.
2. Connect the Lexicon microphones to the microphone input 1 and
2 connectors on the RV-8 rear panel. Connector 1 is for the left
microphone, connector 2 is for the right. Make sure each
microphone cable plug is fully inserted for a solid connection.
During the microphone check, the microphones will be referred to
as 1 and 2, based on the input connector to which the microphone
is connected. You should label the microphones for troubleshooting
purposes.
3. Power on the RV-8 or deactivate standby mode.

3-80

Setup

RV-8

POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR LIVE!
Refer to the microphone placement examples below to position the microphones for LIVE!

PROPER microphone positioning for LIVE!
Position the microphones:
3 On or near opposite side walls
3 Approximately halfway between the front and
side speakers
3 At an approximate height between the waist and
head of a standing person

Rear
Left

Side
Left

Rear
Right

3 In a location unobstructed by furniture and other
fixtures
3 At least 2 feet (0.61m) from all speakers
Side
Right

Note:
LIVE! can potentially create feedback in the system. The
processing is designed to prevent this, but you should
avoid placing the microphones too close to speakers.

Front
Left

Microphone

Center

The illustration to the right provides an example of
proper microphone placement during LIVE! calibration
and also for permanent location.

Subwoofer
Front
Right

3-81

Setup

Lexicon

IMPROPER microphone positioning for LIVE!
When positioning the microphones,
DO NOT:
7 Place the microphones on the front or rear walls
7 Place the microphones near the floor or ceiling
Rear
Left

7 Obstruct the microphones with furniture or other
fixtures
7 Place the microphones within 2 feet (0.61m) of
any speaker

Side
Left

Rear
Right

The illustration to the right provides an example of
improper microphone placement for LIVE! calibration or
for a permanent location.

Side
Right

Front
Left

Center

Microphone

Subwoofer
Front
Right

3-82

Setup

RV-8

PERFORMING LIVE! CALIBRATION
MAIN MENU

SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

CUSTOM
LIVE! CALIBRATION
SETUP
!CAUTION!
40 Hz
60 Hz
HIGH AUDIO
LEVELS
60 Hz
Hz 10 SEC
YOU WILL 60
HAVE
40 Hz
TO LEAVE THE
ROOM OR
OFF
SIT QUIETLY
N/A
PRESSAPART
TO BEGIN
COUNTDOWN

LIVE! CALIBRATION
TEST WILL BEGIN IN
10

LIVE! CALIBRATION
IN PROGRESS

LIVE! CALIBRATION
CALIBRATION DONE

PRESS TO SKIP
COUNTDOWN

PLEASE WAIT
PRESS

TO CONTINUE

LIVE! CALIBRATION
SIGNAL TOO LOW

PRESS

To perform LIVE! calibration:
1. Select SETUP

LIVE! CALIBRATION as shown above.

2. The !CAUTION! HIGH AUDIO LEVELS message appears to indicate
that the RV-8 generates loud calibration noise signals during LIVE!
calibration. If the signals become too loud, press the
button to
cancel LIVE! calibration. Press the
button to begin calibration.
3. The countdown display notifies you that LIVE! calibration begins in
10 seconds. The primary reason for the 10-second delay is to give
you time to leave the listening space before automatic calibration
begins. If you choose to remain in the room, your movements
could affect the calibration results. If you leave the room, you can
return in about 3 minutes (the calibration procedure should be
completed). Press the
arrow button to skip the countdown
and begin LIVE! calibration. The RV-8 automatically activates LIVE!
calibration when the countdown ends.
When the LIVE! calibration is finished, the LIVE CALIBRATION
results screen displays one of the following two messages.

TO CONTINUE

• The CALIBRATION DONE message indicates that no errors
occurred during the calibration procedure.
• The SIGNAL TOO LOW message indicates that the microphones failed to pick up sufficient calibration noise signals
for calibration to complete.
4. After reading the message, press

to continue.

If the SIGNAL TOO LOW message appears:
•

Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the
microphones are properly connected to the RV-8 in microphone inputs 1 and 2 and that microphone cable plugs are
fully inserted for a solid connection.

•

Examine the speakers and the associated amplifier to ensure
that speaker wires are connected and the amplifier is on.

•

Run a Microphone Check to determine whether a microphone
has been damaged. See page 3-40 for instructions on checking the microphones.

3-83

4
Audio Controls
Audio Controls ............................................................................4-2

Audio Controls

Lexicon

AUDIO CONTROLS
Selecting AUDIO CONTROLS opens the AUDIO CONTROLS menu, which is used to customize the Main Zone audio output connectors and to
control the balance of the Zone 2 and Zone 3 audio output connectors. The BASS, TREBLE, TILT EQ, LOUDNESS, BALANCE and FADER parameters
affect the Main Zone audio output connectors, including all Main Zone inputs and listening modes, except the 5.1a BYPASS and 2CH BYPASS
listening modes. The ZONE2 BALANCE parameter controls the balance of the Zone 2 audio output connectors, including all Zone 2 inputs. The
ZONE3 BALANCE parameter controls the balance of the Zone 3 audio output connectors, including all Zone 3 inputs.
MAIN MENU

AUDIO CONTROLS

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

BASS
+0.0dB
TREBLE
+0.0dB
TILT EQ
+0.0dB
LOUDNESS
OFF
BALANCE

FADER

ZONE2 BALANCE

ZONE3 BALANCE

BALANCE

Parameter

Default Setting Possible Settings

BASS

+0.0dB

–6.0 to +6.0dB

TREBLE

+0.0dB

–6.0 to +6.0dB

TILT EQ

+0.0dB

–3.0 to +3.0dB

LOUDNESS

OFF

ON, OFF

BALANCE

<|>

L< to <|> to >R

FADER

<|>

B< to <|> to >F

ZONE2 BALANCE <|>

L< to <|> to >R

ZONE3 BALANCE <|>

L< to <|> to >R

FADER

Note:
When LIVE! is active, the BASS, TREBLE, TILT EQ, and LOUDNESS
controls do not function and the corresponding parameters in the
AUDIO CONTROLS menu default to +0.0dB. The LOUDNESS
parameter defaults to OFF.
4-2

ON
OFF

-3.0 to +3.0dB

BASS
AUDIO CONTROLS

-6.0 to +6.0dB

–6.0dB to +6.0dB
BASS

Controls the amount of low-frequency boost or cut applied to the
Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, and
Subwoofer. The BASS Parameter Settings graph on the next page
indicates the frequency response of all BASS parameter settings.

TREBLE
AUDIO CONTROLS

–6.0dB to +6.0dB
TREBLE

Controls the amount of high-frequency boost or cut applied to the
Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R and Center.
The TREBLE Parameter Settings graph on the next page indicates
the frequency response of all TREBLE parameter settings.

Audio Controls

RV-8

BASS Parameter Settings

The BASS parameter controls the amount of low-frequency boost or cut applied to the
Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center and Sub.

TREBLE Parameter Settings

The TREBLE parameter controls the amount of high-frequency boost or cut
applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R and Center.

4-3

Audio Controls
AUDIO CONTROLS

Lexicon
(continued)

MAIN MENU

AUDIO CONTROLS

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

BASS
TREBLE
TILT EQ
LOUDNESS
BALANCE
FADER
ZONE2 BALANCE
ZONE3 BALANCE

TILT EQ
AUDIO CONTROLS

-3.0 to +3.0dB

–3.0dB to +3.0dB
TILT EQ

Controls the amount of tilt equalization applied to the Main Zone
audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center and Sub. This
parameter setting affects the entire frequency spectrum with a
hinge point at 1kHz. As the setting increases, frequencies higher
than 1kHz are boosted while frequencies lower than 1kHz are
simultaneously cut. As the setting decreases, frequencies higher
than 1kHz are cut while frequencies lower than 1kHz are
simultaneously boosted. The TILT EQ Parameter Settings graph on
the next page indicates the frequency response of all TILT EQ
parameter settings.

4-4

MAIN MENU

AUDIO CONTROLS

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

BASS
TREBLE
TILT EQ
LOUDNESS
BALANCE
FADER
ZONE2 BALANCE
ZONE3 BALANCE

LOUDNESS
AUDIO CONTROLS

ON
OFF

ON, OFF
LOUDNESS

Controls the amount of low-frequency boost that is automatically
applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R,
Center and Sub. When ON is selected, loudness compensation is
automatically applied, based on volume level. As volume level
increases, the amount of boost automatically decreases. The loudness
contour is optimized for input sources calibrated to THX reference
levels. When OFF is selected, no loudness compensation is applied.
The LOUDNESS Parameter Settings graph on the next page
indicates the frequency response that is automatically applied when
the LOUDNESS parameter is set to ON and Main Zone volume level
is adjusted.

Audio Controls

RV-8

TILT EQ Parameter Settings

The TILT EQ parameter controls the amount of tilt equalization applied to the Main
Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center and Sub.

LOUDNESS Parameter Settings

The LOUDNESS parameter controls the amount of low-frequency boost that is
automatically applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front
L/R, Center and Sub.

4-5

Audio Controls

Lexicon

AUDIO CONTROLS (continued)

MAIN MENU

AUDIO CONTROLS

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

BASS
TREBLE
TILT EQ
LOUDNESS
BALANCE
FADER
ZONE2 BALANCE
ZONE2 BALANCE

BALANCE
AUDIO CONTROLS

BALANCE

FADER

MAIN MENU

AUDIO CONTROLS

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

BASS
TREBLE
TILT EQ
LOUDNESS
BALANCE
FADER
ZONE2 BALANCE
ZONE2 BALANCE

L< <|> >R
BALANCE

ZONE2 BALANCE
AUDIO CONTROLS

Controls the left-to-right balance of the Main Zone audio output
connectors.

AUDIO CONTROLS

B< <|> >F
FADER

Controls the front-to-back balance of the Main Zone audio output
connectors.

4-6

L< <|> >R

ZONE2 BALANCE

Controls the left-to-right balance of the Zone 2 audio output
connectors.

ZONE3 BALANCE
FADER

L< ZONE2 BALANCE >R

AUDIO CONTROLS

L< <|> >R

ZONE3 BALANCE

Controls the left-to-right balance of the Zone 3 audio output
connectors.

5
Tuner Presets
Tuner Presets ..............................................................................5-2

Tuner Presets

Lexicon

TUNER PRESETS
Selecting TUNER PRESETS from the MAIN MENU displays a list of the pages of existing presets. The preset number, preset name (if available),
frequency and broadcast band is displayed.

MAIN MENU

TUNER PRESETS

EDIT PRESET 1

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

PAGE
PAGE
PAGE
PAGE

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10

FREQUENCY
BAND

1
2
3
4

0.00FM
0.00FM
0.00FM
0.00FM
0.00FM
0.00FM
0.00FM
0.00FM
0.00FM
0.00FM

0.00
FM

STATION
LOADED
EDIT STATION NAME

LISTEN TO PRESET
NAME
CLEAR PRESET

BUTTONS TO EDIT
UP TO 8 CHARACTERS
BUTTON TO ADVANCE
PRESS MENU
TO CLEAR PRESET

Each tuner preset page
allows up to 10 preset
stations.

In the US, each preset channel is identified by the station's call
letters, or what their broadcast information identifies as the call
letters. In Europe and Japan, each preset channel is identified by the
station's Program Service (PS) name. If RDS information is not
available, then the Preset name will be Preset XX, where XX is the
listed number location in the Preset menu for that position. For
example, if Preset #01 is FM 90.90 and the call letters are WABC,
then the name for that position is WABC.

To edit a preset, press the menu /
arrows until the desired
preset is highlighted, then press the menu
arrow to open the
parameters menu for the selected preset.
Parameter
LISTEN TO PRESET
NAME
CLEAR PRESET

5-2

Tuner Presets

RV-8

LISTEN TO PRESET
TUNER PRESETS

PAGE 1

CLEAR PRESET
01

LISTEN TO PRESET

Loads the current preset station. Press the menu
arrow to load
the station preset. The front panel and on-screen display will display
“STATION LOADED.”

TUNER PRESETS

PAGE 1

CLEAR PRESET

Clears the current preset entry. The front-panel and on-screen
display will display “PRESS MENU
TO CLEAR PRESET.” Press the
menu arrow to cancel without clearing the preset.

NAME
TUNER PRESETS

PAGE 1

NAME

Edits the station name. The station name can be up to 8 characters
long. The available characters are letters A to Z, numbers 0 to 9,
and 10 additional symbols: ., -, +, :, (, ), !, @, # or a blank space.

5-3

6
Mode Adjust
Mode Adjust ...............................................................................6-2
Listening Mode Activation...........................................................6-2
Listening Mode Descriptions .......................................................6-4
Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions........6-39
Mode – Parameter Relationships ...............................................6-47

Mode Adjust
MAIN MENU
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

* These listening mode
names differ depending on the current
input source, speaker
setup and parameter
settings. Refer to the
Listening Mode
Descriptions for more
information.

6-2

Lexicon

MODE ADJUST
FILM
TV
MUSIC
MUSIC SURR
PLIIx + THX*
PLIIx MOV*
PLIIx MUS*
PLII+ THX
PLII MOVIE
PLII MUSIC
PL + THX
PRO LOGIC
+ THX
CIN
MUSIC
NIGHTCLUB
CONCERT HHALL
CHURCH
CATHEDRAL
PANORAMA
2-CH SURROUND
2-CHANNEL
MONO LOGIC
MONO SURROUND
MONO
5.1 FILM
5.1 TV
5.1 MUSIC
*
MUSIC
5.1 PLIIx MOV*
5.1 PLIIx MUS*
DIGITAL EX*
5.1 2-CHANNEL
5.1 MONO LOGIC
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO
FILM*
MUSIC*
*
MUSIC*
*
2-CHAN*
5.1a FILM
5.1a MUSIC
5.1a
SurEX*
5.1a
MUSIC
5.1a STANDARD
5.1a 2-CHANNEL

MODE ADJUST
5.1a BYPASS
2CH BYPASS
HEADPHONE
HEADPHONE 5.1
HEADPHONE
HEADPHONE 5.1a
LIVE! SMALL
LIVE! MED
LIVE! LARGE

MODE ADJUST
Selecting the MODE ADJUST option opens the MODE ADJUST menu, which is
used to select a listening mode for adjustment. When the MODE ADJUST menu
opens, the currently activated Main Zone listening mode is highlighted.
Selecting a listening mode does not activate that listening mode
for the current Main Zone input source. Rather, selecting a listening
mode opens the corresponding listening mode menu, which is used to
customize the selected listening mode. These adjustments are applied
when the listening mode is selected with one of the methods described in
the Listening Mode Activation section that begins below.

LISTENING MODE ACTIVATION
Listening modes are available for 2-channel, Dolby Digital, DTS(-ES), MIC and
analog input sources. The RV-8 allows listening mode selection for all Main
Zone sources. In some cases, the RV-8 automatically activates a listening mode
in response to certain commands. For this reason, it is important to understand
the three methods through which listening mode activation occurs.
Note:
When headphones are plugged into the RV-8, all listening modes are downmixed
to two channels with the following exceptions: HEADPHONE L7, HEADPHONE 5.1,
HEADPHONE DTS and HEADPHONE 5.1a. These listening modes are described in
detail on page 6-34.
Listening mode activation occurs through:
•

the INPUT SETUP menu preferred listening mode selection parameters
(page 3-12).

•

the front-panel or remote control Mode button (page 2-17).

•

the remote control listening mode family selection buttons (page 2-17).

Mode Adjust

RV-8

PREFERRED LISTENING MODE SELECTION

LISTENING MODE SELECTION BUTTONS

The INPUT SETUP menus include four preferred listening mode
selection parameters labeled 2-CH, DOLBY D, DTS(-ES), 5.1a and
MIC. These parameters are used to select a preferred listening mode
for 2-channel, Dolby Digital, DTS(-ES), 5.1a and LIVE! input sources.
The RV-8 automatically activates the selected listening mode
whenever a new input is selected or a new input source is present.

The remote control listening mode selection buttons can be used
to activate the Logic 7 Film, Dolby, DTS(-ES), THX, Logic 7 Music,
or Logic 7 TV listening mode that is appropriate for the Main Zone
input source. For instance, if the L7 button is pressed while a
2-channel source is present, the L7 FILM listening mode is
activated. The table below indicates the listening modes associated
with each mode family selection button.

MODE

AND

BUTTONS

The front-panel and remote-control Mode arrow buttons can be
used to audition listening modes with the current Main Zone input
source. Pressing these buttons scrolls up ( ) or down ( ) through
listening modes available for the current Main Zone source.
Listening modes are scrolled in the order that appears in the MODE
ADJUST menu.
For example, if a 2-channel input source is present, press the
or
arrow buttons to scroll through available 2-channel listening
modes. The selected listening mode appears in the bottom-left
corner of the Main Zone two-line status.
Dynamic Listening Mode Selection
Dynamic listening modes are only available under certain conditions. For example, many of the dynamic modes are only available
when the RV-8 is configured for seven main output channels and
source material with specific encoding is played. All dynamic
listening modes are available through the remote control or front
panel Mode button.

Button

2-Channel
Sources

Dolby Digital
Sources

DTS(-ES)
Sources

5.1a
Sources

L7 F

L7 FILM

5.1 L7 FILM

DTS(-ES) L7 FILM

5.1a L7 FILM

L7 M

L7 MUSIC

5.1 L7 MUSIC

DTS(-ES) L7 MUSIC

5.1a L7 MUSIC

L7 TV

5.1 L7 TV

MODE SELECTION
NOT AVAILABLE**

N/A

L7 MS

L7 MUSIC
SURROUND

5.1 L7 MUSIC

DTS(-ES) L7 MUSIC

N/A

DOLBY

DOLBY PLIIx MOV

DD 5.1 PLIIx MOV*

MODE SELECTION
NOT AVAILABLE**

N/A

DTS

DTS NEO:6 CIN

MODE SELECTION
NOT AVAILABLE**

DTS(-ES)

N/A

THX

DOLBY PLIIx + THX

THX UL2CIN

DTS THX
DTS THX UL2 CIN
DTS(-ES) THX***

5.1a THX Sur
EX

* These listening mode names differ depending on the input source, the speaker configuration and certain parameter settings. For 5.1 systems with only side or rear speakers (but not both), pressing the
button loads the DOLBY DIGITAL mode.
** The “MODE SELECTION NOT AVAILABLE” message appears in the on-screen and
front-panel displays when no listening mode is available for the Main Zone input
source that is present.
*** For ES source.

See “Dynamic Listening Modes” on page 3-13 for a complete
listing of dynamic listening modes.

6-3

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

LISTENING MODE DESCRIPTIONS
Each listening mode description lists the default and possible settings for each listening mode menu parameter. All listening mode menus are
shown in the Appendix. Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 6-39.

L7 FILM
MODE ADJUST

L7 TV
FILM

MODE ADJUST

This listening mode is designed for enhanced playback of 2-channel
stereo or matrix-encoded film sources.

This listening mode is designed for playback of 2-channel stereo or
matrix-encoded television broadcast sources.

Logic 7 FILM is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode that derives
seven channels from 2-channel input sources. Logic 7 also derives
full-frequency stereo surround channels that realistically increase
the perceived width, length and sense of envelopment of the
listening space. Logic 7 provides remarkable improvement
compared to other decoders.

Logic 7 TV is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode based on the
Logic 7 FILM listening mode, but specifically tailored for broadcast
sources.

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

AUTO AZIMUTH

ON, OFF

VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB

+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

RE-EQUALIZER

ON, OFF

SOUND STAGE

REAR

FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR

5 SPKR ENHANCE

ON, OFF

BASS ENHANCE

OFF

ON, OFF

SURR ROLLOFF

7.0kHz

500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

15ms

OFF, 1 to 30ms

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for
detailed descriptions.

6-4

Parameter

Default Setting Possible Settings

AUTO AZIMUTH

ON, OFF

VOCAL ENHANCE

+0.0dB

+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

FRONT STEERING

FILM

OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM

RE-EQUALIZER

OFF

ON, OFF

SOUND STAGE

REAR

FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR

5 SPKR ENHANCE

ON, OFF

BASS ENHANCE

OFF

ON, OFF

SURR ROLLOFF

7.0kHz

500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

15ms

OFF, 1 to 30ms

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for
detailed descriptions.

Mode Adjust

RV-8

L7 MUSIC
MODE ADJUST

L7 MUSIC SURR
MODE ADJUST

MUSIC

This listening mode is designed for playback of 2-channel stereo or
matrix-encoded music sources.
Logic 7 MUSIC is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode based on the
Logic 7 FILM listening mode, but specifically tailored for music
sources.
Parameter

Default Setting Possible Settings

VOCAL ENHANCE

+0.0dB

+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

FRONT STEERING

MUSIC

OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM

SOUND STAGE

NEUTRAL

FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR

5 SPKR ENHANCE

ON, OFF

BASS ENHANCE

OFF

ON, OFF

SURR ROLLOFF

7.0kHz

500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

15ms

OFF, 1 to 30ms

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for
detailed descriptions.

MUSIC SURR

This listening mode is designed for playback of 2-channel stereo
music sources recorded in real spaces and for playback of
recordings that contain added reverb. It is recommended for
classical music sources, which are often recorded in real spaces with
added reverb to enhance the stereo mix.
Logic 7 MUSIC SURR is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode that is
similar to the MUSIC SURROUND listening mode in other Lexicon
products. Logic 7 extracts ambient sounds from the input source
and sends these sounds to all speakers. Ambient sounds are heard
from all directions, creating a realistic playback presentation that
simulates what listeners experience in real spaces.
Parameter

Default Setting Possible Settings

VOCAL ENHANCE

+0.0dB

+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

FRONT STEERING

MSURR

OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM

SOUND STAGE

NEUTRAL

FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR

5 SPKR ENHANCE

ON, OFF

BASS ENHANCE

OFF

ON, OFF

SURR ROLLOFF

7.0kHz

500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

15ms

OFF, 1 to 30ms

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for
detailed descriptions.

6-5

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

DOLBY PLIIx + THX & DOLBY PLII + THX
MODE ADJUST

PLIIX +

MODE ADJUST

PLII +

Dolby Pro Logic IIx technology is an extension to Dolby Pro Logic II
that enables the listener to experience natural and seamless 6.1- or
7.1-channel (six or seven speakers and a subwoofer) surround sound
from any native two-channel (stereo) or 5.1-channel source.

Note:
The PLIIx mode does not appear in the list of available listening modes if
either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration.

The modes are recommended for home theaters with THX-certified
speakers. Dolby PLII(x) + THX encoding:

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

•

RE-EQUALIZER

ON, OFF

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

•

Applies THX re-equalization to simulate high-frequency rolloffs
that occur in movie theaters. Most films are mixed for movie
theaters, and might sound too bright when played back in
home theaters without re-equalization.
Applies THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences
between the front and surround channels, which results in
smoother sound movements between them.

The PLIIx listening mode is only available when the front, side and rear
speakers are present. The PLII listening mode is available when the
front and side speakers are present.
Activating the DOLBY PLIIx + THX listening mode
The DOLBY PLIIx + THX listening mode is a dynamic listening mode
and cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for 2-channel
Dolby Surround-encoded sources. To activate this listening mode, play
the 2-channel Dolby Surround-encoded source, then select DOLBY
PLIIx + THX using the front-panel or remote control Mode buttons.
When the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will automatically activate the DOLBY PLIIx + THX listening mode if this listening
mode was activated the last time a 2-channel Dolby Surroundencoded source was present.

6-6

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for
detailed descriptions.

Mode Adjust

RV-8

DOLBY PLIIx MOV & DOLBY PLII MOVIE
MODE ADJUST

PLIIx MOVIE

MODE ADJUST

PLII MOVIE

Note:
The PLIIx MOV mode does not appear in the list of available listening modes
if either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration.
Parameter

•

Are designed for playback of Dolby Surround-encoded sources.

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

•

Provide impressive enhancement compared to Dolby Pro Logic
decoding.

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

•

Are appropriate for Dolby Surround-encoded film sources.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for
detailed descriptions.

The PLIIx listening mode is only available when the front, side and rear
speakers are present.
Activating the DOLBY PLIIx MOV listening mode
The DOLBY PLIIx MOV listening mode is a dynamic listening mode
and cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for 2-channel
Dolby Surround-encoded film sources. To activate the DOLBY PLIIx
Mov listening mode, play the 2-channel source input, and select the
DOLBY PLIIx MOV listening mode using the front-panel or remote
control Mode buttons.
When the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will automatically activate the DOLBY PLIIx MOV listening mode if this listening
mode was activated the last time a 2-channel Dolby Surroundencoded film source was present.

6-7

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

DOLBY PLIIx MUS & DOLBY PLII MUSIC
MODE ADJUST

PLIIx MUS

MODE ADJUST

PLII MUSIC

Note:
The DOLBY PLIIx MUS mode does not appear in the list of available listening
modes if either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration.
Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

PANORAMA

OFF

ON, OFF

Activating the DOLBY PLIIx MUS listening mode

CTR WIDTH

MIN, 1 to 6, MAX

The DOLBY PLIIx MUS listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and
cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for 2-channel Dolby
Surround-encoded film sources. To activate the DOLBY PLIIx MUS
listening mode, play the 2-channel source input, and select the DOLBY
PLIIx MUS listening mode using the front-panel or remote control
Mode buttons.

DIMENSION

NEUTRAL

FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR

SURROUND DLY

10ms

0 to 15ms

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

When the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will automatically activate the DOLBY PLIIx MUS listening mode if this listening
mode was activated the last time a 2-channel Dolby Surroundencoded film source was present.

6-8

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for
detailed descriptions.

Mode Adjust

RV-8

DOLBY PL + THX
MODE ADJUST

DOLBY PRO LOGIC

PL +

MODE ADJUST

This mode is designed for playback of Dolby Surround-encoded
sources and decodes four channels: three front channels and one
mono surround channel with a high-frequency rolloff above 7kHz.
This mode is recommended for home theaters with THX-certified
speakers. Dolby PL + THX mode:
•

•

Applies THX re-equalization to simulate high-frequency rolloffs
that occur in movie theaters. Most films are mixed for movie
theaters, and may sound too bright when played back in home
theaters without re-equalization.
Applies THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences
between the front and surround channels, which results in
smoother sound movements between them.

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

RE-EQUALIZER

ON, OFF

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

PRO LOGIC

The Dolby PRO LOGIC mode is designed for playback of Dolby
Surround-encoded sources. It decodes four channels from Dolby
Surround-encoded sources, and uses a mono surround channel
with a high-frequency rolloff above 7kHz.
This mode is useful for comparison purposes, particularly with the
L7 FILM, Dolby PLIIx MOVIE and DTS Neo:6 CIN listening mode.
Parameter
OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for
detailed descriptions.

6-9

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

DTS NEO:6 + THX
MODE ADJUST

DTS NEO:6 CIN & DTS NEO:6 MUSIC

MODE ADJUST

This mode is designed for playback of matrix-encoded digital stereo
film sources. DTS Neo:6 derives six channels when both side and rear
speakers are present (rear channels will be in parallel). It derives five
channels when only side or rear speakers are present.
In addition to THX processing, THX re-equalization is applied to
simulate high-frequency rolloffs that occur in movie theaters. Most
films are mixed for movie theaters, and may sound too bright when
played back in home theaters without re-equalization.
This listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and cannot be
assigned as a preferred listening mode. To select this listening mode
use the remote control or front-panel Mode button. When the
2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will automatically
activate a DTS Neo:6 + THX listening mode if this mode was
activated the last time a 2-channel source was present.
Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

RE-EQUALIZER

ON, OFF

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

CIN

MUSIC

These modes are designed for playback of matrix-encoded digital
stereo film or music sources. DTS Neo:6 derives six channels when
both side and rear speakers are present (rear channels will be in
parallel). It derives five channels when only side or rear speakers are
present.
These listening modes are dynamic listening modes and cannot be
assigned as preferred listening modes. To select either of these
listening modes, use the remote control or front-panel Mode
button. When the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will
automatically activate a DTS Neo:6 listening mode if this mode was
activated the last time a 2-channel source was present.
Note:
•

The RV-8 will not automatically activate a DTS NEO:6 listening
mode unless a 44.1kHz or 48kHz PCM digital source is present.
The DTS Neo:6 listening modes are not available with 88.2kHz or
96kHz, Dolby Digital or analog sources.

•

The DTS Neo:6 MUSIC listening mode can be activated with the
front-panel or remote control Mode buttons. The DTS Neo:6 CIN
listening mode can also activated with the remote control DTS
button when a 2-channel input source is present.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for
detailed descriptions.

Parameter
OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for
detailed descriptions.

6-10

Mode Adjust

RV-8

NIGHTCLUB

CONCERT HALL

MODE ADJUST

NIGHTCLUB

The NIGHTCLUB mode is designed for playback of “dry” music
sources that benefit from the addition of room reflections,
especially music sources that lack ambience in the recording. The
NIGHTCLUB mode generates early reflections and sends them to
the front, side and rear channels to simulate small, intimate
listening spaces.
The NIGHTCLUB mode is a superior room simulation listening
mode because it uses a proprietary reverb algorithm inherited from
Lexicon professional products.

CONCERT HALL

The CONCERT HALL mode generates early reflections and sends
them to the front, side and rear channels to simulate large listening
spaces.
The CONCERT HALL mode is a superior room simulation listening
mode because it uses a proprietary reverb algorithm inherited from
Lexicon professional products.
Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

CENTER DEPTH

0 to 18

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

SPEECH DETECT

ON, OFF

CENTER DEPTH

0 to 18

SIZE

20m

4 to 20m

SPEECH DETECT

ON, OFF

LIVENESS

1.72s

30ms to 20.2s

SIZE

4 to 20m

PRE-DELAY

OFF

OFF, 1 to 100ms

LIVENESS

196ms

30ms to 20.2s

ROLLOFF

2.4kHz

500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

PRE-DELAY

5ms

OFF, 1 to 100ms

EFFECT LVL

–2dB

–12 to +6dB

ROLLOFF

9.0kHz

500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

EFFECT LVL

+3dB

–12 to +6dB

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for
detailed descriptions.

6-11

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

CHURCH
MODE ADJUST

CATHEDRAL
MODE ADJUST

CHURCH

CATHEDRAL

The CHURCH mode uses a reverb algorithm to emphasize the rich,
smooth, reverberant decay characteristic of small and medium
listening spaces – such as churches and chambers – with long reverberation time relative to their sizes.

The CATHEDRAL mode is similar to the CHURCH listening mode. It
uses a reverb algorithm to emphasize the rich, smooth, reverberant
decay characteristic of large listening spaces – such as cathedrals –
with long reverberation time relative to their size.

The CHURCH mode is a superior room simulation listening mode
because it uses a proprietary reverb algorithm inherited from
Lexicon professional products.

The CATHEDRAL mode is a superior room simulation listening
mode because it uses a proprietary reverb algorithm inherited from
Lexicon professional products.

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

CENTER DEPTH

0 to 18

CENTER DEPTH

0 to 18

SPEECH DETECT

ON, OFF

SPEECH DETECT

ON, OFF

SIZE*

20m

4 to 30m

SIZE*

30m

4 to 30m

MID RT*

1.56s

24ms to 24.3s

MID RT*

3.72s

24ms to 24.3s

BASS RT*

1.87s

5ms to 48.6s

BASS RT*

4.47s

5ms to 48.6s

PRE-DELAY

24ms

OFF, 1 to 100ms

PRE-DELAY

23ms

OFF, 1 to 100ms

ROLLOFF

2.4kHz

500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

ROLLOFF

3.1kHz

500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

EFFECT LVL

–3dB

–12 to +6dB

EFFECT LVL

–8dB

–12 to +6dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

* BASS RT, MID RT and SIZE parameter settings are interdependent, meaning that the full
parameter range might not be available depending on the other parameter settings.
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for
detailed descriptions.

6-12

Mode Adjust

RV-8

PANORAMA
MODE ADJUST

PANORAMA CALIBRATION

PANORAMA

MODE ADJUST

The PANORAMA mode is designed for playback of stereo and
matrix-encoded sources. PANORAMA uses proprietary Lexicon
algorithms to move the stereo image outward from the front
speakers, producing a wider stereo field with greater depth.
Sound quality depends on proper location of the listening position
and front speakers. When the front speakers are positioned close to
either side of the display device, the effect is produced over a wider
area than when the front speakers are positioned at a large angle
from the display device.
Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

EFFECT LVL

+4dB

–12 to +6dB

BASS CONTENT

STEREO

BINAURL, MONO, STEREO

PANORAMA

PANORAMA CALIBRATION
SOURCE LEFT & RIGHT
SPEAKER ANGLE 30deg
LISTENER POS
+0
NOTE:
ENSURE THAT
“SPEAKER SETUP” HAS
BEEN PROPERLY
PERFORMED

CALIBRATION

Select PANORAMA
CALIBRATION to open
the PANORAMA CALIBRATION menu shown
to the left, to calibrate the PANORAMA
listening mode. This listening mode must be
calibrated to take full advantage of its
effects.

For best results, you should center the
primary listening position between the front
left and right speakers as shown in the Center illustration at the top
of the next page. Otherwise, the PANORAMA listening mode will be
calibrated with varying results.
An external calibration source is required to calibrate the
PANORAMA listening mode. You should select a familiar stereo
source.

LOW FREQ WIDTH +0

–25 to +25dB

SURR ROLLOFF

3.1kHz

500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

15ms

OFF, 1 to 30ms

Parameter

Default Setting Possible Settings

INPUT BALANCE

<|>

L< to <|> to >R

SOURCE

LEFT & RIGHT

RIGHT, LEFT & RIGHT, LEFT

CALIBRATION

Refer to next column

SPEAKER ANGLE

30deg

10 to 90deg

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

LISTENER POS

-127 to +127

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for
detailed descriptions.

6-13

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

LEFT

CENTER

RIGHT

To calibrate the PANORAMA listening mode:
1. Remove all obstructions between the speakers and the primary
listening position.
2. Make sure the distances between the speakers and the primary
listening position are properly measured. To do this, select one
of the following options.
•

Select the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu DISTANCES option to
have the RV-8 automatically calibrate speaker distances.

•

Measure the distance between the primary listening position and the front baffle of each speaker. Then, set the corresponding SPEAKER DISTANCES menu parameters to the
closest available value.

3. Sit in the primary listening position. If the primary listening
position is not centered between the front left and right
speakers as shown in illustration B (above), set the PANORAMA
CALIBRATION
LISTENER POS parameter to compensate for
the difference using the remote control
and
arrow

6-14

buttons. Each increment within the –127 to +127 parameter
range represents about one-third of an inch. The Left illustration shows the left-of-center position. The Right illustration
shows the right- of-center position
4. Set the SOURCE parameter to RIGHT.
5. Begin playback of the external calibration source.
6. When playback of the external calibration source is in progress,
set the SPEAKER ANGLE parameter so the sound is not heard in
the right ear.
7. To confirm the LISTENER POS and SPEAKER ANGLE parameter
settings, set the SOURCE parameter to LEFT & RIGHT. If the
PANORAMA listening mode is properly calibrated, the sound
should be perceived to come from all around the primary
listening position. If not, go back to Step 1 and repeat the
calibration procedure.

Mode Adjust

RV-8

2-CH SURROUND

MONO LOGIC

MODE ADJUST

2-CH SURROUND

MONO LOGIC

This mode, designed for playback of stereo sources, sends the left
channel to Front, Side and Rear Left channels and the right channel
to Front, Side and Rear Right channels, and sums the Left and Right
for the center. It is recommended for background music.

This mode, designed for playback of mono sources, uses proprietary
Lexicon reverb algorithms to realistically expand mono sources to
use all channels. This dramatically increases the perceived width
and sense of envelopment of the listening space.

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

EFFECT LVL

–9dB

–12 to +6dB

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

ACADEMY FILTER

ON, OFF

SURR ROLLOFF

3.1kHz

500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

2-CHANNEL
MODE ADJUST

2-CHANNEL

This mode, designed for playback of stereo sources, sends the left and
right channels to the Front L/R and Subwoofer channels. It is recommended for two-speaker playback with subwoofers and for
comparison purposes with other listening modes.
Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

SUB LEVEL

+0dB

OFF, –30 to +12dB

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for
detailed descriptions.

6-15

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

MONO SURROUND
MODE ADJUST

5.1 L7 FILM

MONO SURROUND

MODE ADJUST

This mode, designed for playback of mono sources, sends the
mono source to all channels.
Parameter
OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

MONO
MODE ADJUST

MONO

This mode, designed for playback of mono sources, sends mono
sources to the center channel and subwoofer.

5.1

FILM

The 5.1 L7 FILM mode is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode
designed for playback of 5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded film
sources, and provides remarkable improvement compared to other
decoders.
It derives seven channels from 5.1-channel input sources with
enhanced front steering. When both side and rear speakers are
present, the 5.1 L7 FILM listening mode also increases the perceived
length and sense of envelopment of the listening space.
Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

VOCAL ENHANCE

+0.0dB

+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

RE-EQUALIZER

ON, OFF

SOUND STAGE

REAR

REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT

5 SPKR ENHANCE

ON, OFF

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

BASS ENHANCE

OFF

ON, OFF

SUB LEVEL

+0dB

OFF, –30 to +12dB

SURR ROLLOFF

7kHz

500HZ to 20kHz, OFF

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

REAR DLY OFFSET

15ms

OFF, 1ms to 30ms

COMPRESSION

OFF

AUTO, ON, OFF

LFE MIX

+0.0dB

–10.0dB to +0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for
detailed descriptions.

6-16

Mode Adjust

RV-8

5.1 L7 TV
MODE ADJUST

5.1 L7 MUSIC
5.1

MODE ADJUST

5.1

MUSIC

This proprietary Lexicon listening mode is designed for playback of
5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded broadcast sources. Based on the
5.1 L7 FILM listening mode, 5.1 L7 TV derives seven channels from
5.1-channel input sources with enhanced front steering.

This proprietary Lexicon listening mode is designed for playback of
5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded music sources. Based on the 5.1
L7 FILM listening mode, 5.1 L7 MUSIC derives seven channels from
5.1-channel input sources with enhanced front steering.

Parameter

Possible Settings

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB

+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

VOCAL ENHANCE

+0.0dB

+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

FRONT STEERING FILM

OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM

FRONT STEERING

MUSIC

OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM

RE-EQUALIZER

OFF

ON, OFF

RE-EQUALIZER

OFF

ON, OFF

SOUND STAGE

REAR

REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT

SOUND STAGE

NEUTRAL

REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT

5 SPKR ENHANCE ON

ON, OFF

5 SPKR ENHANCE

ON, OFF

BASS ENHANCE

OFF

ON, OFF

BASS ENHANCE

OFF

ON, OFF

SURR ROLLOFF

7kHz

500HZ to 20kHz, OFF

SURR ROLLOFF

7kHz

500HZ to 20kHz, OFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

15ms

OFF, 1ms to 30ms

REAR DLY OFFSET

15ms

OFF, 1ms to 30ms

COMPRESSION

OFF

AUTO, ON, OFF

COMPRESSION

OFF

AUTO, ON, OFF

LFE MIX

+0.0dB

–10.0dB to +0.0dB

LFE MIX

+0.0dB

–10.0dB to +0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

Default Setting

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for
detailed descriptions.

6-17

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

THX, THX UL2Cin & THX SurEX
MODE ADJUST

UL2Cin OR

SurEX

These modes are designed for 7-channel playback of 5.1-channel Dolby
Digital film sources that do not have THX Surround EX encoding. They
apply THX re-equalization to simulate high-frequency rolloffs that occur
in movie theaters. Most films are mixed for movie theaters, and might
sound too bright when played back in home theaters without re-equalization. THX timbre matching is applied to minimize timbre differences
between the front and surround channels, which results in smoother
sound movements between them. These modes are recommended for
home theaters with THX-certified speakers.

5.1-channel Dolby Digital source with or without THX Surround
EX encoding is detected.
•

The THX SurEX listening mode is available when both the side and
rear speakers are present and THX Surround EX decoding is
engaged. THX Surround EX decoding is engaged when the
SURROUND EX parameter is set to ON or AUTO and a flagged
5.1-channel Dolby Digital source with THX Surround EX encoding
is detected.

•

The THX listening mode is available when both Ultra2 and THX
Surround EX decoding are deactivated.

The listening mode name differs, depending on the encoding present
in the input source, the SURROUND EX parameter setting and the
speaker setup.
The table at the bottom of the page shows the conditions for the
behavior of the THX Ultra2 and THX Surround EX modes when
activated:
•

The THX UL2Cin listening mode is available when both the side
and rear speakers are present and THX ULTRA2 decoding is
engaged. THX Ultra2 decoding is engaged when the SURROUND
EX parameter is set to OFF or AUTO and a non-flagged

Note:
Some EX-encoded sources are not flagged, and require manually
setting the SURROUND EX parameter to ON for EX decoding.
When THX Ultra2 decoding is active:
•

Input Source
Parameter Setting

5.1-Channel Dolby Digital

5.1-Channel THX Surround EX
Dolby Digital (Flagged)

5.1-Channel THX Surround EX
Dolby Digital (Non-Flagged)

SURROUND EX: AUTO

THX ULTRA2

THX SurEX

THX ULTRA2

SURROUND EX: ON

THX SurEX

SURROUND EX: OFF

THX ULTRA2

6-18

Mode Adjust

RV-8
•

ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers.
Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3-31 for more
information.

When THX Surround EX decoding is active:
Matrix decoding is applied to derive three surround channels from
5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources.

THX MUSIC
MODE ADJUST

MUSIC

This listening mode is designed for playback of 5.1-channel Dolby
Digital music sources, and cannot be activated unless side and rear
speakers are present. ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the
rear speakers. See “ASA” on page 3-35 for more information. For
best results, place the rear speakers close together in your home
theater.

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

RE-EQUALIZER

ON, OFF

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

SURROUND EX

AUTO

AUTO, ON, OFF

COMPRESSION

OFF

AUTO, ON, OFF

COMPRESSION

OFF

AUTO, ON, OFF

LFE MIX

+0.0dB

–10.0 to +0.0dB

LFE MIX

+0.0dB

–10.0 to +0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for
detailed descriptions.

Note:
Note:
The THX UL2Cin listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and cannot
be assigned as a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital sources.
Activate this listening mode with the front-panel or remote control Mode
buttons.
When the DOLBY D parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will automatically activate a THX UL2Cin listening mode if this mode was activated
the last time a Dolby Digital source was present.

The THX MUSIC listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and
cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital
sources. Activate this listening mode with the front-panel or remote
control Mode arrow buttons.
When the DOLBY D parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will automatically activate a THX MUSIC listening mode if this mode was activated
the last time a Dolby Digital source was present.

6-19

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

5.1 PLIIx MOV
MODE ADJUST

5.1 PLIIx MOV

The 5.1 PLIIx MOV (MOVIE) listening mode is designed to play back
7.1 discrete channels decoded from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital film
sources. The seven main channels are full-frequency. The .1 channel,
often referred to as LFE information, has a limited frequency range of
up to 120Hz.

Note:

The 5.1 PLIIx MOV listening mode is only available when the front, side
and rear speakers are present.

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

EX DECODING
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

AUTO
OFF
+0.0dB
Refer to page 6-37
Refer to page 6-37

AUTO, ON, OFF
AUTO, ON, OFF
–10.0 to +0.0dB

Note:
The RV-8 cannot detect Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in
non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital input sources.

The 5.1 PLIIx MOV mode will not appear in the list of available listening
modes if either the side or rear speakers are missing from the
configuration.

Activating the 5.1 PLIIx MOV listening mode
The 5.1 PLIIx MOV listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and
cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital film
sources. To activate this listening mode, use the front-panel or remote
control Mode buttons.
When the DOLBY D parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will
automatically activate the dynamic 5.1 PLIIx MOV listening mode if
this listening mode was activated the last time a Dolby Digital
source was present.

6-20

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for
detailed descriptions.

Mode Adjust

RV-8

5.1 PLIIx MUS
MODE ADJUST

5.1 PLIIx MUS

The 5.1 PLIIx MUS (MUSIC) listening mode is designed to playback 7.1
discrete channels decoded from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital music
sources. The seven main channels are full–frequency. The .1 channel,
often referred to as LFE information, has a limited frequency range of
up to 120Hz.
Note:
The RV-8 cannot detect Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in
non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital input sources.
Activating the 5.1 PLIIx MUS listening mode
The 5.1 PLIIx MUS listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and
cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital
sources. To activate this listening mode, use the front-panel or remote
control Mode buttons.

Note:
The 5.1 PLIIx MUS mode does not appear in the list of available listening
modes if either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration.
Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

EX DECODING
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

AUTO
OFF
+0.0dB
Refer to page 6-37
Refer to page 6-37

AUTO, ON, OFF
AUTO, ON, OFF
–10.0 to +0.0dB

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for
detailed descriptions.

When the DOLBY D parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will
automatically activate the dynamic 5.1 PLIIx MUS listening mode if
this listening mode was activated the last time a Dolby Digital
source was present.

6-21

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

DOLBY DIGITAL & DOLBY DIGITAL EX
MODE ADJUST

DIGITAL

DIGITAL EX

These listening modes are designed to decode and play back 5.1
discrete channels from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. The five
main channels are full-frequency. The .1 channel, often referred to
as LFE information, has a limited frequency range of 120Hz.
The mode name differs, depending on the encoding present in the
input source, the EX DECODING parameter setting and the speaker
setup.
The Dolby DIGITAL EX listening mode is recommended for Dolby
Digital sources recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX
encoding. This listening mode can also be used with other types
of 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources with mixed results. The table
at the bottom of the page shows the conditions for the behavior
of the Dolby Digital EX mode when activated.
The Dolby DIGITAL EX listening mode is available when both the
side and rear speakers are present and Dolby Digital Surround EX
decoding is activated. Matrix decoding is then applied to derive a
surround back channel from the other surround channels.
•

Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is activated when the EX
DECODING parameter is set to ON or AUTO and a flagged
5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded with Dolby Digital
Surround EX encoding is detected.

•

Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is not activated when the
EX DECODING parameter is set to OFF or AUTO and a nonflagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded with or
without Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding is detected.

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

EX DECODING

AUTO

AUTO, ON, OFF

COMPRESSION

OFF

AUTO, ON, OFF

LFE MIX

+0.0dB

–10.0 to +0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

Note:
The RV-8 cannot detect Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in nonflagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital input sources because they do not
include information in the input signal that identifies Dolby Digital
Surround EX encoding.

Input Source
Parameter Setting

5.1-Channel Dolby Digital

5.1-Channel Surround EX
(Flagged)

5.1-Channel Surround EX
(Non-Flagged)

EX DECODING: AUTO

DOLBY DIGITAL

DOLBY DIGITAL EX

DOLBY DIGITAL

EX DECODING: ON

DOLBY DIGITAL EX

EX DECODING: OFF

DOLBY DIGITAL

6-22

Mode Adjust

RV-8

5.1 2-CHANNEL
MODE ADJUST

5.1 MONO LOGIC

5.1 2-CHANNEL

MODE ADJUST

This mode, recommended for recording purposes, is designed for
converting 5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded input sources into
2-channel Logic 7-encoded output signals.
The downmixed 5.1-channel Dolby Digital input signals are sent to
the Front L/R speakers and subwoofer.

5.1 MONO LOGIC

This listening mode, designed for playback of Dolby Digital-encoded
mono sources, uses proprietary Lexicon reverb algorithms to realistically expand mono sources to use all channels. This dramatically
increases the perceived width and sense of envelopment of the
listening space.
Note that:

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

CENTER MIX

+0dB

–25 to +5dB

SURROUND MIX

+0dB

–5 to +5dB

CNTR DLY SAMPLES

–127 to +127

MASTER LEVEL

+0dB

–5 to +5dB

COMPRESSION

OFF

AUTO, ON, OFF

LFE MIX

+0.0dB

–20.0 to +0.0dB

SUB LEVEL

+0dB

OFF, -30 to +12dB

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for
detailed descriptions.

When a 1.0 Dolby Digital source is present, the RV-8 automatically
activates the 5.1 MONO LOGIC listening mode.
Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

EFFECT LVL

–9dB

–12 to +6dB

ACADEMY FILTER

ON, OFF

SURR ROLLOFF

3.1kHz

500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for
detailed descriptions.

6-23

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

5.1 MONO SURR
MODE ADJUST

5.1 MONO
MODE ADJUST

5.1 MONO SURR

This listening mode, designed for playback of Dolby Digital-encoded
mono sources, sends mono signals to all channels.

5.1 MONO

This listening mode, designed for playback of Dolby Digital-encoded
mono sources, sends mono signals to the center channel and
subwoofer.

Parameter
OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for
detailed descriptions.

6-24

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

SUB LEVEL

+0dB

OFF, –30 to +12dB

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for
detailed descriptions.

Mode Adjust

RV-8

DTS-ES DECODING
The DTS, DTS-ES, and DTS-ES Discr listening modes are designed
for, at a minimum, playback of 5.1-channel DTS, 5.1-channel
matrix-encoded DTS-ES and 6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES
sources.
The DTS, DTS-ES, and DTS-ES Discr listening mode names differ
depending on the encoding present in the input source, the
DECODING parameter setting and the speaker setup.
DTS-ES listening modes are available when DTS-ES decoding is
activated. The table at the bottom of the page shows the conditions
for the behavior of DTS-ES decoding when it is activated.
•

DTS-ES decoding is activated when both the side and rear
speakers are present and the ES DECODING parameter is set to
ON or AUTO and a 5.1-channel matrix-encoded or a
6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES source is detected.

•

DTS-ES decoding is deactivated when the ES DECODING
parameter is set to OFF or when the ES DECODING parameter
is set to AUTO and a 5.1-channel DTS source is detected.

•

DTS-ES Discr mode decodes 6.1-channel discrete-encoded
DTS-ES sources when ES decoding is set to AUTO or ON in the
MODE ADJUST menu. The mode appears in the Setup menu
when a DTS 6.1 source is present and seven speakers are
selected in the SPEAKER SETUP menu.

Note:
The table below is not applicable to the DTS-ES THX, DTS THX ULTRA2
and DTS THX MUSIC listening modes. These listening modes will be
explained in greater detail later in this manual.

Input Source
5.1-Channel DTS

5.1-Channel
Matrix-Encoded DTS-ES

6.1-Channel
Discrete-Encoded DTS-ES

DTS

DTS-ES

ES DECODING: ON

DTS-ES

ES DECODING: OFF

DTS

Parameter Setting
ES DECODING: AUTO

6-25

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

DTS-ES L7 FILM & DTS L7 FILM
MODE ADJUST

FILM OR

DTS-ES L7 MUSIC & DTS L7 MUSIC
MODE ADJUST

FILM

MUSIC OR

MUSIC

These proprietary Lexicon listening modes use an advanced matrix to
decode seven channels from 5.1- and 6.1-channel film sources with
enhanced front steering. When both side and rear speakers are
present, the DTS-ES L7 FILM listening mode also increases the
perceived length and sense of envelopment of the listening space.

These proprietary Lexicon listening modes, similar to the DTS-ES
L7 FILM listening mode, use an advanced matrix to decode seven
c h a n n e l s f r o m 5 . 1 a n d 6 . 1 - c h a n n e l m u s i c s o u rc e s w i t h
e n h a n c e d f r o n t s t e e r i n g t o p r o v i d e remarkable sound
improvement compared to other decoders.

The listening modes are designed for enhanced playback of 5.1-channel
DTS, 5.1-channel matrix-encoded DTS-ES, or 6.1-channel discreteencoded DTS-ES film sources. The listening mode name differs,
depending on the encoding present in the input source, the ES
DECODING parameter setting and the speaker setup.

The listening modes are designed for enhanced playback of
5.1-channel DTS, 5.1-channel matrix-encoded DTS-ES, or
6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES music sources. The
listening mode name differs, depending on the encoding
present in the input source, the ES DECODING parameter
setting and the speaker setups.

Option/Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

VOCAL ENHANCE

+0.0dB

+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

RE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

Option/Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

ON, OFF

VOCAL ENHANCE

+0.0dB

+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

REAR

REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT

FRONT STEERING

MUSIC

OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM

5 SPKR ENHANCE

ON, OFF

RE-EQUALIZER

OFF

ON, OFF

BASS ENHANCE

OFF

ON, OFF

SOUND STAGE

NEUTRAL

REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT

SURR ROLLOFF

7kHz

500Hz to 20kHz, OFF

5 SPKR ENHANCE

ON, OFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

15ms

OFF, 1 to 30ms

BASS ENHANCE

OFF

ON, OFF

LFE MIX

+0.0dB

-10.0 to +0.0dB

SURR ROLLOFF

7kHz

500Hz to 20kHz, OFF

ES DECODING

AUTO

AUTO, ON, OFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

15ms

OFF, 1 to 30ms

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

LFE MIX

+0.0dB

–10.0 to +0.0dB

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

ES DECODING

AUTO

AUTO, ON, OFF

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for
detailed descriptions.

6-26

Mode Adjust

RV-8

DTS-ES THX & DTS THX UL2Cin
MODE ADJUST

UL2Cin

The DTS THX UL2Cin (ULTRA2 CINEMA) and DTS-ES THX listening
modes allow 7-channel playback of 5.1-channel DTS sources that
lack DTS-ES encoding. They are designed for playback of 5.1-channel
DTS, 5.1-channel matrix-encoded DTS-ES, or 6.1-channel DTS-ES
discrete-encoded film sources. DTS THX UL2Cin and DTS-ES THX
are recommended for home theaters with THX-certified speakers.
These modes apply:
•

•

THX re-equalization to simulate high-frequency rolloffs that
occur in movie theaters. Most films are mixed for movie
theaters, and might sound too bright when played back in
home theaters without re-equalization.
THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences between
the front and surround channels, which results in smoother
sound movements between them.

The listening mode name differs, depending on the encoding present
in the input source, the ES DECODING parameter setting and the
speaker setup.
The DTS THX UL2Cin listening mode
The DTS THX UL2Cin listening mode is available when both side and
rear speakers are present and THX Ultra2 decoding is activated.
To activate DTS THX UL2Cin decoding:
1. Press MODE ADJUST
2. Use the

DECODING.

arrow to select either AUTO (the default) or OFF.

When the ES DECODING parameter is set to OFF, the DTS-ES THX
UL2 Cin listening mode is always active. When the parameter is set
to AUTO, the DTS-ES THX UL2 Cin listening mode activates when
a 5.1-channel DTS source is detected.

When THX UL2Cin decoding is activated:
•

•

ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers.
Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3-35 for more
information.

The DTS-ES THX listening mode
The DTS-ES THX listening mode is available when both the side and
rear speakers are present and DTS-ES decoding is active.
DTS-ES decoding is activated when the ES DECODING parameter is
set to AUTO (the default) or ON and a 5.1-channel matrix-encoded
or 6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES source is detected.
The table on the next page shows the conditions for the behavior of
the DTS THX UL2Cin and DTS-ES THX modes when activated:
Option/Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

RE-EQUALIZER

ON, OFF

LFE MIX

+0.0dB

–10.0 to +0.0dB

ES DECODING

AUTO

AUTO, ON, OFF

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for
detailed descriptions.

6-27

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

DTS-ES THX & DTS THX UL2CIN

(continued)

Input Source
Parameter Setting

5.1-Channel DTS

5.1-Channel
Matrix-Encoded DTS-ES

6.1-Channel
Discrete-Encoded DTS-ES

ES DECODING: AUTO

DTS THX UL2Cin

DTS-ES THX

ES DECODING: ON

DTS-ES THX

ES DECODING: OFF

DTS THX UL2Cin

DTS THX MUSIC
MODE ADJUST

DTS, DTS-ES & DTS(-ES) Discr
MODE ADJUST

MUSIC

Discr

The DTS THX MUSIC listening mode is designed for playback of
5.1-channel DTS music sources when the side and rear speakers are
present. ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear
speakers. Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3-35 for
more information. This mode is recommended for home theaters
with THX-certified speaker setups.

This mode decodes 5.1 matrix or 6.1 discrete channels from DTS-ES
sources. It is designed for playback of 5.1-channel DTS, 5.1-channel
matrix-encoded DTS-ES, and 6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES
sources.

Option/Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

LFE MIX

+0.0dB

–10.0 to +0.0dB

The listening mode name differs, depending on the encoding
present in the input source, the DECODING parameter setting, and
the speaker setup. Refer to page 6-25 for more information.

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

The six decoded main channels are full-frequency. The .1 channel,
often referred to as LFE information, has a limited frequency range
of 120Hz.

Option/Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

LFE MIX

+0.0dB

–10.0 to +0.0dB

ES DECODING

AUTO

AUTO, ON, OFF

Note:

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

The DTS THX MUSIC is a dynamic listening mode and can only be
activated with the front-panel or remote control Mode
and
buttons.

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for
detailed descriptions.

6-28

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for
detailed descriptions.

Mode Adjust

RV-8

DTS 2-CHAN & DTS-ES 2-CHAN
MODE ADJUST

2-CHAN OR

5.1a L7 FILM

2-CHAN

MODE ADJUST

These modes, recommended for recording purposes, send
downmixed 5.1-channel or 6.1-channel DTS-ES input signals to the
front speakers and subwoofer as 2-channel Logic 7-encoded output
signals.

5.1

FILM

The 5.1a LOGIC7 FILM listening mode is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode that uses LOGIC7 decoding to derive seven channels
from 5.1-channel analog film sources with enhanced front steering.
This listening mode allows 5.1-channel analog sources to use bass
management, speaker crossovers, speaker distance calibration, and
audio controls (tone controls).

Option/Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

CENTER MIX

+0dB

–25 to +5dB

SURROUND MIX

+0dB

–5 to +5dB

Option/Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

CNTR DLY SAMPLES

–127 to +127

VOCAL ENHANCE

+0.0dB

+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

MASTER LEVEL

+0dB

–5 to +5dB

RE-EQUALIZER

ON, OFF

LFE MIX

+0.0dB

–20.0 to +0.0dB

SOUND STAGE

REAR

REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT

ES DECODING

AUTO

AUTO, ON, OFF

5 SPKR ENHANCE

ON, OFF

SUB LEVEL

+0dB

OFF, –30 to +12dB

BASS ENHANCE

OFF

ON, OFF

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

SURR ROLLOFF

7kHz

500Hz to 20kHz, OFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

15ms

OFF, 1 to 30ms

LFE MIX

+0.0dB

-10.0 to +0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for
detailed descriptions.

6-29

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

5.1a L7 MUSIC
MODE ADJUST

5.1a

5.1a THX UL2Cin, 5.1a THX SurEX & 5.1a THX
MUSIC

MODE ADJUST

The 5.1a LOGIC7 MUSIC listening mode is similar to the 5.1a
LOGIC7 FILM listening mode, but specifically tailored for music
sources. This mode is designed and recommended for playback of
5.1-channel analog music sources.
Option/Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

VOCAL ENHANCE

+0.0dB

+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

FRONT STEERING

MUSIC

OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM

RE-EQUALIZER

OFF

ON, OFF

SOUND STAGE

NEUTRAL

REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT

5 SPKR ENHANCE

ON, OFF

BASS ENHANCE

OFF

ON, OFF

SURR ROLLOFF

7kHz

500Hz to 20kHz, OFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

15ms

OFF, 1 to 30ms

LFE MIX

+0.0dB

-10.0 to +0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for
detailed descriptions.

6-30

5.1a

UL2Cin

5.1a

SurEX

5.1a

The 5.1a THX UL2Cin, 5.1a THX SurEX, and 5.1a THX listening
modes are designed to convert 5.1-channel analog film sources that
lack THX Surround EX encoding into seven channel audio. The
modes also allow 5.1-channel analog sources to use bass management, speaker crossovers, speaker distance calibration, and audio
controls (tone controls). The 5.1a THX UL2Cin, 5.1a THX SurEX,
and 5.1a THX listening modes are recommended for home theaters
with THX-certified speakers. These modes apply:
•

•

THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences between
the front and surround channels, which results in smoother
sound movements between them.

The listening mode name differs depending on the encoding present
in the input source, the SURROUND EX parameter setting, and the
speaker setup.
The table at the top of the next page indicates the conditions in
which THX Ultra2 and THX Surround EX decoding are activated.

Mode Adjust

RV-8

Input Source
5.1-Channel Analog

5.1-Channel THX Surround EX
Analog (Flagged)

5.1-Channel THX Surround EX
Analog (Non-Flagged)

SURROUND EX: ON

5.1a THX SurEX

SURROUND EX: OFF

5.1a THX ULTRA2

Parameter Setting

The 5.1a THX UL2Cin listening mode
The 5.1a THX UL2Cin listening mode is available when both side
and rear speakers are present and THX Ultra2 decoding is active.
THX Ultra2 decoding is activated when the SURROUND EX parameter is set to OFF. When THX Ultra2 decoding is activated:
•

•

Adaptive de-correlation is applied to increase the perceived
width of the listening space. De-correlation of the mono surround channel increases the perceived width of the surround
field in home theaters.
ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers.
Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3-35 for more
information.

The 5.1a THX SurEX listening mode
The 5.1a THX SurEX listening mode is available when both side and
rear speakers are present and THX surround EX decoding is active.
THX Surround EX decoding is activated when the SURROUND EX
parameter is set to ON.

The 5.1a THX listening mode
The 5.1a THX listening mode is available when neither THX Ultra2
nor THX Surround EX decoding is active.
Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

RE-EQUALIZER

ON, OFF

SURROUND EX

OFF

ON, OFF

LFE MIX

+0.0dB

-10.0 to +0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for
detailed descriptions.

When THX Surround EX decoding is activated Matrix decoding is
applied to derive three surround channels from 5.1-channel analog
sources.

6-31

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

5.1a THX MUSIC
MODE ADJUST

5.1a

5.1a STANDARD
MODE ADJUST

MUSIC

The 5.1a THX MUSIC listening mode is designed for playback of
5.1-channel analog music sources. It cannot be activated unless
side and rear speakers are present. This mode performs best in
home theaters where the rear speaker are placed close together.
ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers. Refer
to the ASA parameter description on page 3-35 for more information.

5.1a STANDARD

This mode allows 5.1-channel analog sources to use bass
management, speaker crossovers, speaker distance calibration, and
audio controls (tone controls). When these features are not used,
the 5.1a STANDARD listening mode is similar to the 5.1a BYPASS
listening mode. The 5.1a STANDARD mode sends identical signals
(with appropriate time delays) to the Main Zone audio output
connectors labeled Side L and Rear as well as Side R and Rear R.
Parameter

Option/Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

LFE MIX

+0.0dB

-10.0 to +0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for
detailed descriptions.

Note:
The 5.1a THX MUSIC listening mode can only be activated with the frontpanel or remote control Mode buttons.

6-32

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for
detailed descriptions.

Mode Adjust

RV-8

5.1a 2-CHANNEL
MODE ADJUST

5.1a BYPASS

5.1a 2-CHANNEL

MODE ADJUST

This mode downmixes 5.1-channel analog input signals into
2-channel LOGIC7-encoded output signals. It sends these signals to
the front speakers and the subwoofer. It is recommended for
recording purposes, particularly for recording from a DVD-A or
multi-channel SACD player to a CD-R or another 2-channel recording format.
Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

CENTER MIX

+0dB

-25 to +5dB

SURROUND MIX

+0dB

-5 to +5dB

CNTR DLY SAMPLES +0

-127 to +127

MASTER LEVEL

+0dB

-5 to +5dB

LFE MIX

+0.0dB

-20.0 to +0.0dB

SUB L/R LVL

+0dB

OFF, -30 to +12dB

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for
detailed descriptions.

5.1a BYPASS

•

Designed for playback of 5.1-channel analog sources, such as
DVD-A or SACD players.

•

Sends the 5.1-channel analog audio input connector directly to
the Main Zone volume control and audio output connectors, as
shown on pages 2-9 and 3-59. These signals receive no internal
processing.

•

When both side and rear speakers are present, surround
channel signals are sent in parallel to the side and rear speakers.
To configure a 5-channel speaker setup, set the OUTPUT
LEVELS menu SIDE L/R or REAR L/R parameter to OFF to
deactivate the associated surround speakers.

•

Pressing the remote control HOME/MAIN/AGE2/A BYP then
2CH buttons toggles the MAIN ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS
parameter between ON and OFF.

Parameter

Default Setting

OUTPUT LEVELS

Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

Possible Settings

Note:
Speaker crossover settings, speaker distances and audio (tone) controls
are not available when the 5.1a BYPASS listening mode is activated.

6-33

Mode Adjust
2CH BYPASS
MODE ADJUST

2CH BYPASS

This listening mode sends 2-channel analog audio input signals to
the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R with no
internal processing.
The 2CH BYPASS listening mode is automatically activated
whenever a 2-channel analog source is present and the MAIN ADV
menu ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to ON. The 2CH BYPASS
listening mode is not available when a digital source is present and
the MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT parameter is set to AUTO.
Pressing the remote control HOME/MAIN/PAGE2/A BYP button then
2CH buttons toggles the MAIN ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS
parameter between ON and OFF.
Note:
Speaker crossover settings, speaker distances and audio controls (tone) are
not available when the 2CH BYPASS listening mode is activated.

Lexicon

HEADPHONE L7
MODE ADJUST

HEADPHONE

HEADPHONE L7 is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode designed
for enhanced playback of 2-channel sources through headphones.
This listening mode uses LOGIC7 processing and Head Related
Transfer Functions to realistically increase the perceived sense of
envelopment when listening through headphones.
The HEADPHONE listening mode is recommended for 2-channel
sources when listening through headphones. No parameters for the
HEADPHONE listening mode are available.

HEADPHONE 5.1
MODE ADJUST

HEADPHONE 5.1

HEADPHONE 5.1 is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode designed
for enhanced playback of Dolby Digital-encoded music or film
sources through headphones. This listening mode uses LOGIC7
processing and Head Related Transfer Functions to realistically
increase the perceived sense of envelopment when listening
through headphones.
The HEADPHONE 5.1 listening mode is recommended for Dolby
Digital-encoded sources when listening through headphones. No
parameters for the HEADPHONE 5.1 listening mode are available.

6-34

Mode Adjust

RV-8

HEADPHONE DTS
MODE ADJUST

HEADPHONE

HEADPHONE DTS is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode designed
for enhanced playback of DTS(-ES)-encoded music or film sources
through headphones. This listening mode uses LOGIC7 processing
and Head Related Transfer Functions to realistically increase the
perceived sense of envelopment when listening through
headphones.
The HEADPHONE DTS listening mode is recommended for DTSencoded sources when listening through headphones. No parameters for the HEADPHONE DTS listening mode are available.

LIVE! SMALL, LIVE! MED & LIVE! LARGE
MODE ADJUST

LIVE! SMALL

LIVE! MED

LIVE! LARGE

LIVE! (Lexicon Intelligent Variable Environment) is a proprietary mode
designed to transform the way your listening room sounds. It provides
a realistic illusion of a larger, more reverberant listening space. LIVE!
SMALL simulates the reverberations of a room that is small, but larger
than an average living room. LIVE! MED simulates the reverberations of
a small hall. LIVE! LARGE simulates the reverberations of a large hall.
LIVE! requires two permanently mounted microphones. (See “LIVE!
CALIBRATION” on page 3-80 for placement and calibration instructions.) LIVE! cannot be used with prerecorded sources such as CDs or
DVDs.
LIVE! SMALL parameter settings:

HEADPHONE 5.1a
MODE ADJUST

HEADPHONE 5.1a

HEADPHONE 5.1a is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode designed
for enhanced playback of 5.1-channel analog music or film sources
through headphones. This listening mode uses LOGIC7 processing
and Head Related Transfer Functions to realistically increase the
perceived sense of envelopment when listening through
headphones.
The HEADPHONE 5.1a listening mode is recommended for
5.1-channel analog sources when listening through headphones.
No parameters for the HEADPHONE 5.1a listening mode are
available.

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

MID RT
BASS RT
ROLLOFF
TREB CUT RT
PRE-DELAY
ADVANCED
CUSTOM

597ms
597ms
3.1kHz
3.1kHz
10ms

115ms to 15.4s
23ms to 30.8ms
500Hz to 20kHz
500Hz to 20kHz
10ms to 100ms

Refer to page 6-37

LIVE! SMALL ADVANCED parameter settings:
Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

REVERB LVL
EARLY RFLX LVL
BASS XOVER
SHAPE
SPREAD
SIZE

+0dB
–13dB
156Hz
0
0%
19m

–80dB to +0dB
–80dB to +12dB
30Hz to 19.9kHz, OFF
0 to 4
0% to 100%
4m to 60m
6-35

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

LIVE! MED parameter settings:

LIVE! LARGE parameter settings:

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

MID RT

1.84s

115ms to 15.4s

BASS RT

2.76s

23ms to 30.8ms

ROLLOFF

2.4kHz

500Hz to 20kHz

TREB CUT RT

3.1kHz

500Hz to 20kHz

PRE-DELAY

18ms

10ms to 100ms

ADVANCED
CUSTOM

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

MID RT

4.71s

115ms to 30.8s

BASS RT

4.71s

23ms to 30.8ms

ROLLOFF

3.1kHz

500Hz to 20kHz

TREB CUT RT

2.4kHz

500Hz to 20kHz

PRE-DELAY

20ms

10ms to 100ms

ADVANCED

Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM

LIVE! MED ADVANCED parameter settings:
Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

REVERB LVL

–4dB

–80dB to +0dB

EARLY RFLX LVL

–14dB

–80dB to +12dB

BASS XOVER

156Hz

30Hz to 19.9kHz, OFF

SHAPE

0 to 4

SPREAD

25%

0% to 100%

SIZE

30m

4m to 60m

Refer to page 6-37

LIVE! LARGE ADVANCED parameter settings:
Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

REVERB LVL

–6dB

–80dB to +0dB

EARLY RFLX LVL

–17dB

–80dB to +12dB

BASS XOVER

156Hz

30Hz to 19.9kHz, OFF

SHAPE

0 to 4

SPREAD

28%

0% to 100%

SIZE

38m

4m to 60m

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for
detailed descriptions.

6-36

Mode Adjust

RV-8

OUTPUT LEVELS
MODE ADJUST

OUTPUT LEVELS
CENTER
SIDE L/R
REAR L/R
SUB

CUSTOM VS PRESET

Listening Mode

+0dB
+0dB
+0dB
+0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

MODE ADJUST

Opens the OUTPUT LEVELS menu, which is
used to adjust output levels for the Main
Zone audio output connectors labeled
Center, Subwoofer, Side L/R and Rear L/R.

The OUTPUT LEVELS option does not appear on listening mode
menus when the selected listening mode does not accommodate
multichannel output signals. Instead, an output-specific parameter
appears. For example, the MONO listening mode menu includes a
SUB LVL parameter.

(Listening Mode)

CUSTOM

CUSTOM VS PRESET

Allows comparison listening between the custom and factory-default
versions of the selected listening mode. When PRESET is selected, the
listening mode is heard in its factory-default condition, as if all listening
mode menu parameters were set to their factory-default settings.
When CUSTOM is selected, the listening mode is heard in its custom
condition, including all current listening mode menu parameter settings.
The PRESET and CUSTOM versions of the selected listening mode will
sound identical when all listening mode menu parameters are set to
their factory-default settings.
Note:

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

CENTER

+0dB

OFF, –30 to +12dB

SIDE L/R

+0dB

OFF, –30 to +12dB

REAR L/R

+0dB

OFF, –30 to +12dB

SUB

+0dB

OFF, –30 to +12dB

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for
detailed descriptions.

CUSTOM
MODE ADJUST

(Listening Mode)

CUSTOM

Opens the CUSTOM menu, which can be used to compare custom
and factory-default versions of the selected listening mode and to
restore the factory-default version of the selected listening mode.

The CUSTOM VS PRESET option does not affect current listening mode
menu parameter settings.
CUSTOM
CUSTOM VS PRESET
RESET MODE

PRESET
CUSTOM

To toggle between the custom and factory-default versions of
the selected listening mode:
1. Follow the CUSTOM VS PRESET menu path to open the CUSTOM VS PRESET drop-down menu.
2. When the CUSTOM VS PRESET option drop-down menu is
open, press the remote control
and
arrow buttons to
toggle between the PRESET (factory-default) and CUSTOM
versions of the selected listening mode.
3. When finished, press the
arrow button to close the CUSTOM
VS PRESET drop-down menu.

6-37

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

RESET MODE
MODE ADJUST

(Listening Mode)

CUSTOM

RESET MODE

Restores the factory-default version of the selected listening mode,
restoring all listening mode menu parameters to their factory default
settings.

2. Press the
arrow button to restore the factory-default version of
the selected listening mode. Press the
arrow button to close the
message without restoring the factory-default.

To restore the factory-default version of the selected listening mode:

Note:

1. Follow the RESET MODE menu path to select the RESET MODE
option. The PRESS RIGHT V TO RESTORE MODE message
appears in the on-screen display.

When the CUSTOM menu RESET MODE option is selected to restore the
factory-default version of the selected listening mode, the corresponding TRIGGER SETUP menu listening mode parameter is
automatically set to OFF.

CUSTOM
CUSTOM VS PRESET
RESET MODE

6-38

PRESS RIGHT V
TO RESTORE MODE

Mode Adjust

RV-8

LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION and PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
5 SPKR ENHANCE

ON, OFF

Simulates 7-channel playback in 5-channel speaker configurations.
When set to ON, the RV-8 provides an increased sense of
spaciousness and envelopment through the surround speakers. This
enhancement is most noticeable when the surround speakers are
positioned to the side of the primary listening position, or when the
primary listening position is located against the rear wall. The effectiveness of this parameter varies within the listening space. For best
results, it is recommended that you position the surround speakers
to the left and right sides of the primary listening position.

ACADEMY FILTER

ON, OFF

Maximizes matrix steering accuracy. When set to ON, the RV-8
continually monitors the 2-channel input signal and automatically
adjusts the relative level and time offset of the input channels to
ensure that signals are sent to the appropriate channels with
maximum separation. When set to OFF, the accuracy of the selected
listening mode varies among sources. It is recommended that you
set this parameter to ON for film and broadcast sources and to OFF
for music sources.

BASS CONTENT

BASS ENHANCE

ON, OFF

Enhances stereo bass, which results in low-frequency reproduction
that is less localizable and more realistic in the listening space. The
effectiveness of the BASS ENHANCE parameter varies, depending
on room acoustics and the ability of the surround speakers to
reproduce low frequencies. It is recommended that you use front,
side or rear speakers that are capable of reproducing frequencies of
40Hz or lower.

ON, OFF

When set to ON, restores the proper tonal balance of older mono
film sources that have much narrower frequency responses than
more recent mono film sources.

AUTO AZIMUTH

recorded with mono bass. Select the STEREO setting for sources
recorded with stereo bass.

BINAURAL, MONO, STEREO

Adjusts the bass content of binaural, mono and stereo recordings.
When set to BINAURL, the RV-8 activates low-frequency compensation. Select this setting for true binaural sources recorded with
dummy head microphones. Select the MONO setting for sources

BASS RT

5ms to 48.6s

Works with the MID RT and SIZE parameters to adjust the amount
of time required for low-frequency information to decay below 60dB
in level. The BASS RT parameter setting should match the MID RT
parameter setting for more natural effects in smaller listening spaces.

CAUTION!
Setting the BASS RT, MID RT and SIZE parameters to a high
value may produce undesirable or damaging audio.

BASS XOVER

30Hz to 19.9kHz, OFF

Sets the frequency to which BASS RT applies.

CALIBRATION
Opens the PANORAMA listening mode CALIBRATION menu, which
is used to calibrate the PANORAMA listening mode. Refer to
“PANORAMA” on page 6-13 for more information.

6-39

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION and PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
CENTER

OFF, –30 to +12dB

Controls the output level of the audio output connector labeled Center.
Available in all except 2 CH modes (2-CHANNEL, 2 CH BYPASS,
DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 5.1 2-CHANNEL), MONO, 5.1 MONO and LIVE!
modes.

CENTER DEPTH

0 to 18

Adjusts the amount of processing applied to the center channel,
changing the perceived distance of the center speaker. Higher
settings increase and lower settings decrease the perceived distance
of the center speaker from the listening position. Available in
NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH and CATHEDRAL modes.

CENTER MIX

–25 to +5dB

Indicates the relative center channel level for downmixing. Set this
parameter to +0dB for film sources and –5dB for music sources.
Available in 5.1 2-CHANNEL and DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN modes.

CNTR DLY SAMPLES

–127 to +127

Controls the relative time offset of the center channel. Set this
parameter to +0 unless the center channel is not properly timed
and the value of the error is known. Available in 5.1 2-CHANNEL and
DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN modes.

COMPRESSION

AUTO, ON, OFF

Reduces wide volume level changes and increases dialogue intelligibility at lower listening levels for Dolby Digital input sources. When
ON, full compression is applied, regardless of volume level. When OFF,
compression is not applied. Set this parameter to AUTO or ON for
Dolby Digital input sources that are listened to at lower volume levels,

6-40

(continued)

especially for nighttime viewing to avoid disturbing others. Available in
all Dolby Digital modes.

CTR WIDTH

MIN, 1 to 6, MAX

Adjusts the center image. When set to MIN, the center image is heard
from just the center speaker. When set to MAX, the center image is
heard as a “phantom” center image from the front left and right
speakers. When set on the 1 to 6 scale, the center image is heard in
various combinations of the front and center speakers. Available in
Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC modes.

CUSTOM
Opens the CUSTOM menu, which is used to compare custom and
factory-default versions of the selected listening mode and to restore
the factory default version of the selected listening mode. Available in
all modes.

CUSTOM VS PRESET
Allows comparison listening to the custom and factory-default versions
of the selected listening mode. Refer to page 5-32 for information.
Available in all modes.

DIMENSION

FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR

Controls the relative balance of the sound field, which can be useful
with certain recordings to achieve a more suitable balance among
all speakers. When set to FRONT, the sound field is balanced toward
the front of the listening space. When set to NEUTRAL, the sound
field is balanced at the center of the listening space. When set to
REAR, the sound field is balanced toward the rear of the listening
space. Available in Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC modes.

Mode Adjust

RV-8

EARLY RFLX LVL
–80dB to +12dB, OFF
Controls the amount of additional early reflections. Available in all
LIVE! modes.

This parameter is available in all DTS modes.

EFFECT LVL

EX DECODING

–12 to +6dB

Adjusts the amount of effect applied to the listening mode. Available
in NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL, PANORAMA,
MONO LOGIC and 5.1 MONO LOGIC modes.

ES DECODING

AUTO, ON, OFF

Controls DTS-ES decoding, which extracts a rear channel from
5.1-channel DTS, 5.1-channel matrix-encoded DTS-ES and
6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES sources. When ON is
selected, DTS-ES decoding is activated for all DTS-ES sources. When
OFF is selected, DTS-ES decoding is deactivated for all DTS-ES sources.
DTS-ES decoding is activated when AUTO is selected and a 5.1-channel
matrix-encoded or a 6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES source is
detected. DTS-ES decoding is deactivated when a 5.1-channel DTS
source is detected.
DTS-ES listening modes are available when DTS-ES decoding is
engaged. DTS listening modes are available when DTS-ES decoding
is not engaged. Refer to the DTS-ES Decoding section that begins
on page 5-25 for more information.
Note the following:
•

DTS-ES decoding cannot be engaged unless both side and rear
speakers are present.

•

The DTS-ES STATUS menu includes an SB level meter when the
ES DECODING parameter is set to ON and a 5.1-channel DTS
source is present or when the ES DECODING parameter is set to
AUTO and a 5.1-channel matrix-encoded or 6.1-channel

discrete-encoded DTS-ES source is present.

AUTO, ON, OFF

Controls Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding, which extracts a rear
channel from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources recorded with or
without Dolby Digital Surround EX. When ON, Dolby Digital
Surround EX decoding is engaged for all 5.1-channel Dolby Digital
sources. When OFF, Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is disengaged for all 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources.
When AUTO is selected, Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is
engaged when a flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded
with Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding is detected. Dolby Digital
Surround EX decoding is not engaged when a non- flagged
5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded with or without Dolby
Digital Surround EX encoding is detected.
Note:
The RV-8 cannot automatically detect Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding
in non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. A non-flagged input
source does not identify Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in the input
signal.
The Dolby DIGITAL EX listening mode is available when Dolby
Digital Surround EX decoding is engaged. The Dolby DIGITAL
listening mode is available when Dolby Digital Surround EX
decoding is not engaged. Refer to the Dolby DIGITAL EX & Dolby
DIGITAL listening mode descriptions that begin on page 5-22 for
more information.
Note the following:
•

Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding cannot be engaged unless
both side and rear speakers are present.

6-41

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION and PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
•

This parameter is available in 5.1 PLIIx MOV, 5.1 PLIIx MUS,
DOLBY DIGITAL EX and DOLBY DIGITAL modes.

•

When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing the
remote control DOLBY button while a 5.1-channel Dolby
Digital source is present activates the Dolby DIGITAL EX or
Dolby DIGITAL listening mode. Subsequent presses adjust the
EX DECODING parameter, cycling through the AUTO, ON and
OFF settings.

(continued)

Careful adjustment of this parameter allows achievement of proper
tonal balance and reduces the risk of subwoofer overload. When the
speaker setup does not include a subwoofer, LFE information is mixed
into speakers for which the corresponding CUSTOM SETUP menu
parameter is set to FULL or to the lowest crossover points. Available in
all Dolby Digital modes except MONO modes (5.1 MONO LOGIC, 5.1
MONO SURR, 5.1 MONO) and all DTS modes.

LISTENER POS
FRONT STEERING

OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM

Adjusts front steering between the front left, front right, and center
speakers. When set to FILM, maximum front steering is applied to
the center channel. When set to MUSIC, moderate front steering is
applied. When set to MSURR, minimum front steering is applied.
When set to OFF, no front steering is applied. It is recommended
that you set this parameter to FILM for film and broadcast sources
and to MUSIC, MSURR or OFF for music sources. Available in L7 TV,
L7 MUSIC, L7 MUSIC SURR, all 5.1 L7 modes and all DTS L7 modes.

INPUT BALANCE

L< to <|> to >R

Controls the balance of the selected stereo analog audio input
connectors, compensating for audio input sources with audible
channel imbalance. Available in PANORAMA mode.

LFE MIX

–20.0 or -10.0 to +0.0dB

Controls the output level of LFE information – the .1 channel in a 5.1or 6.1-channel input source – that is sent to the audio output labeled
Subwoofer. Low frequencies from up to seven other channels might be
combined with the LFE information to create the subwoofer output
signal, which significantly increases subwoofer output levels.

6-42

–127 to +127

Compensates for primary listening positions that are not centered
between the front left and right speakers. Each increment within the
–127 to +127 parameter range represents about one-third of an inch.
Refer to the Calibration section that begins on page 5-13 for more
information. Available in PANORAMA CALIBRATION mode.
Note:
The LISTENER POS parameter range might extend past the location of the
front left and right speakers.

LIVENESS

30ms to 20.2s

Depends on the SIZE parameter setting. The LIVENESS parameter
adjusts the amount of effect recirculation. Higher settings mimic
more reflective surfaces and increase decay time. Available in
NIGHTCLUB and CONCERT HALL modes.

LOW FREQ WIDTH

–25 to +25dB

Applies low-frequency spatial correction to the input signal. This
correction is applied to uncorrelated input signals below 60Hz.
Available in PANORAMA mode.

Mode Adjust

RV-8

MASTER LEVEL

–5 to +5dB

Adjusts the output level of 2-channel Logic 7-encoded sources.
Available in 5.1 2-CHANNEL and DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN modes.

MID RT

24ms to 24.3s

Works with the SIZE parameters to adjust the amount of time
required for mid-frequency information to decay below 60dB in
level. The full parameter range might not be available depending
on the SIZE parameter setting. Available in CHURCH, CATHEDRAL
and all LIVE! modes.

CAUTION!
Setting the BASS RT, MID RT or SIZE parameters to a high
value may produce undesirable or damaging audio.

Note:
The PANORAMA parameter within the Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx
MUSIC listening modes should not be confused with the separate
PANORAMA listening mode (page 6-13).

PRE-DELAY

1 to 100ms, OFF

Adjusts delay time between the direct sound and the onset of reverberation. Higher settings make the simulated space sound larger.
Because some pre-delay is inherent in all source material, you
should begin with the parameter set to the lowest setting, then
make adjustments accordingly. Available in NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT
HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes.

RE-EQUALIZER

ON, OFF

Opens the OUTPUT LEVELS menu, which is used to adjust output
levels for the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Center,
Subwoofer, Side L/R and Rear L/R. Refer to page 5-32 for more
information. Available in all except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1
2-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO, DTS (-ES) 2-CHAN, 2CH BYPASS and
LIVE! modes.

Simulates high-frequency rolloffs that occur in movie theaters.
When set to ON, the RV-8 applies a high-frequency filter. When set
to OFF, the RV-8 does not apply a high-frequency filter. It is recommended that you set this parameter to ON for film sources, as many
films are mixed for movie theaters and might sound too bright
when played back in home theaters without re-equalization.
Available in L7 FILM, L7 TV, Dolby PLII + THX, Dolby PLIIx + THX, 5.1
L7 FILM, 5.1 L7 TV, THX ULTRA2, THX SurEX, THX, DTS (-ES) L7 FILM,
DTS(-ES) THX ULTRA2 and DTS(-ES) THX modes.

PANORAMA

REAR DLY OFFSET

OUTPUT LEVELS

ON, OFF

When set to ON, Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC listening
modes extend the front stereo image to include surround channel
signals, which creates a “wraparound” effect with side wall imaging.
Available in Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC modes.

OFF, 1 to 30ms

Increases the perceived depth of the listening space by delaying the
arrival time of rear speaker signals. It is recommended that you
increase the setting when using side and rear speakers that are
located close together or when a greater sense of depth is desired in
the listening space. Available in all Logic 7 modes and PANORAMA
mode.

6-43

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION and PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
REAR L/R

–30 to +12dB, OFF

Controls the output level of the Main Zone audio output connector
labeled Rear L/R. Available in all except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1
2-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO, DTS (-ES) 2-CHAN, 2CH BYPASS and
LIVE! modes.

(continued)

SIDE L/R

Controls the level of the Side L/R audio output connectors in the Main
Zone. Available in all except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1 2-CHANNEL,
5.1 MONO, DTS (-ES) 2-CHAN, 2CH BYPASS and LIVE! modes.

SIZE
RESET MODE

–30 to +12dB, OFF

4 to 20 or 30m

Restores the factory-default version of the selected listening mode,
restoring all listening mode menu parameters to their factorydefault settings. Available in all modes.

Adjusts the length of the listening space within a 4m to 20m or
30m range (depending on the listening mode). Increase the size of
the space to increase the reverb effect. Available in NIGHTCLUB,
CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes.

REVERB LVL

CAUTION!

–80 to +0dB, OFF

Controls the amount of added reverb. Available in all LIVE! modes.

ROLLOFF

500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

Simulates the absorption of high frequencies in a real space. It is
recommended that you begin with a low setting to simulate highfrequency absorptive spaces. Available in NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT
HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes.

SHAPE

0 TO 4

Controls the buildup of the energy that most audibly creates the
sound of a real room. SHAPE and SPREAD work together – if either is
set to zero, the other has no effect. Available in all LIVE! modes.

6-44

Setting the BASS RT, MID RT and SIZE parameters to a high
value may produce undesirable or damaging audio.

SOUND STAGE

FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR

Dynamically controls the relative balance of the audio output
connectors. When set to FRONT, Side L/R and Rear L/R output levels
are attenuated by 6dB, shifting the perceived balance of the sound
field to the front of the listening space. When set to NEUTRAL, Side L/R
and Rear L/R output levels are slightly attenuated by 3dB, shifting the
perceived balance of the sound field to the center of the listening
space. When set to REAR, Side L/R and Rear L/R output levels are not
attenuated, preserving the intended balance of the sound field.
Available in all Logic 7 modes.

Mode Adjust

RV-8

SOURCE

RIGHT, LEFT & RIGHT, LEFT

Controls the perceived direction of the PANORAMA listening mode
external calibration source signal. When RIGHT is selected, the
sound is perceived to come from the right of the primary listening
position. When LEFT is selected, the sound is perceived to come
from the left of the primary listening position. When LEFT & RIGHT
is selected, the sound is perceived to come from all around the
primary listening position. Refer to the Calibration section that
begins on page 6-13 for more information about the SOURCE
parameter. Available in PANORAMA CALIBRATION.
Note:
The SOURCE parameter controls the perceived direction of the sound,
although both the front left and right speakers generate the external
calibration source signal.

SPEAKER ANGLE

10 to 90deg

Compensates for a wide or narrow speaker angle relative to the
primary listening position. Select the setting closest to the angle
between the front left and right speakers and the primary listening
position. Refer to the Calibration section that begins on page 6-13
for more information about the SPEAKER ANGLE parameter.
Available in PANORAMA CALIBRATION.

SPEECH DETECT

ON, OFF

Distinguishes monaural speech from other input sources. When set to
ON, effects are lowered to minimize interference and unnatural echo
in monaural speech. When stereo input sources are present, the front
left and right channels are independently used as inputs for ambience
synthesis. When strong monaural speech is present in the input source,
the monaural component of the ambience effect is reduced and the
stereo component of the effect is increased. When set to OFF, the
amount of ambience synthesis is dynamically controlled. Available in
NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH and CATHEDRAL modes.

SPREAD

0 to 100%

Controls the timing between the initial reflections that most audibly
create the sound of a real room. SHAPE and SPREAD work together; if
either is set to 0, the other has no effect. Available in all LIVE! modes.

SUB & SUB LVL

OFF, –30 to +12dB

Controls the output level of the Main Zone audio output connector
labeled Subwoofer. The SUB parameter appears on the listening
mode OUTPUT LEVELS menu. The SUB LVL parameter appears on
listening mode menus when the listening mode does not accommodate multichannel output signals. Available in all except LIVE!
modes.

SURR ROLLOFF

500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

Applies high-frequency attenuation control to the audio output
connectors labeled Side L/R and Rear L/R. This filter is only applied to
output signals generated by the RV-8. Available in all Logic 7 modes.

SURROUND DLY

0 to 15ms

Increases the perceived depth of the listening space by delaying the
arrival time of signals from the side and rear speakers. It is recommended that you increase the setting when a greater sense of
depth is desired in the listening space.

SURROUND EX

AUTO, ON, OFF

Controls the THX Surround EX decoding feature, which can be used to
extract a rear channel from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. When
ON is selected, THX Surround EX decoding is engaged for all
5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. When OFF is selected, THX
Surround EX decoding is not engaged for all 5.1-channel Dolby Digital
sources. Available in THX ULTRA2, THX SurEX and THX modes.

6-45

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION and PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
When AUTO is selected, THX Surround EX decoding is engaged
when a flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source with THX Surround EX encoding is detected. THX Surround EX decoding is not
engaged when a non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source
with or without THX Surround EX encoding is detected.
LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION and PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
(continued)

not engaged when a non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source
with or without THX Surround EX encoding is detected.
Note:
The RV-8 cannot automatically detect THX Surround EX encoding in nonflagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. A non-flagged input source
does not include information in the input signal that identifies THX
Surround EX encoding.

(continued)

SURROUND MIX

Controls the relative level of surround channel information sent to the
audio output connectors labeled Front L/R. It is recommended that
you set this parameter to +2dB or +3dB for all input sources. Available
in 5.1 2-CHANNEL and DTS (-ES) 2-CHAN modes.

TREB CUT RT

Note the following:
•

Toggling the SURROUND EX parameter setting produces low
level clicks in the front speakers.

•

THX Surround EX decoding cannot be engaged unless both
side and rear speakers are present.

6-46

500Hz to 20kHz

Sets the frequency above which high frequencies are rolled off in
the reverberated signal, causing reverberated signals to grow
progressively darker. This results in a more natural sound because it
simulates the effect of air absorption in a real hall. Setting this
parameter to a low frequency dampens the audio as it re-circulates,
and consequently can actually shorten the reverb time. Available in
all LIVE! modes.

VOCAL ENHANCE
THX Surround EX listening modes are available when Dolby Digital
Surround EX decoding is engaged. THX or THX ULTRA2 listening
modes are available when THX Surround EX decoding is not
engaged. Refer to the 5.1 THX ULTRA2, 5.1 THX SurEX and 5.1 THX
listening mode descriptions that begin on page 6-18, or the DTS
THX ULTRA2 and DTS-ES THX listening mode descriptions that
begin on page 6-27 for more information.

-5 to +5dB

+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

Controls the level of dialog-boost in the audio output connector
labeled Center. Increase this setting to improve dialog intelligibility,
particularly at lower volume levels. Available in all Logic 7 modes.

Mode Adjust

RV-8

MODE – PARAMETER RELATIONSHIPS
The following table lists each parameter and the modes in which it is used.
The parameter...

Is used in these modes

5 SPKR ENHANCE

All L7 modes

ACADEMY FILTER

MONO LOGIC and 5.1 MONO LOGIC

AUTO AZIMUTH

L7 FILM and L7 TV

BASS CONTENT

PANORAMA

BASS ENHANCE

All L7 modes

BASS RT

CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes

CALIBRATION

PANORAMA

CENTER

All except 2 CH modes (2-CHANNEL, 2 CH BYPASS, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 5.1 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1 MONO and
LIVE! modes)

CENTER DEPTH

NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL

CENTER MIX

5.1 2-CHANNEL, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN

CNTR DLY SAMPLES

5.1 2-CHANNEL, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN

COMPRESSION

All Dolby Digital modes

CTR WIDTH

Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC

CUSTOM

All modes

CUSTOM VS PRESET

All modes

DIMENSION

Dolby DPLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC

EARLY RFLX LVL

All LIVE! modes

EFFECT LVL

NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL, PANORAMA, MONO LOGIC and 5.1 MONO LOGIC

ES DECODING

All DTS modes
6-47

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

MODE-PARAMETER RELATIONSHIPS

(continued)

The parameter...

Is used in these modes

EX DECODING

5.1 PLIIx MOV, 5.1 PLIIx MUS, DOLBY DIGITAL EX and DOLBY DIGITAL

FRONT STEERING

L7 TV, L7 MUSIC, L7 MUSIC SURR, all 5.1 L7 modes and all DTS L7 modes

INPUT BALANCE

PANORAMA

LFE MIX

All Dolby Digital modes except MONO modes (5.1 MONO LOGIC, 5.1 MONO SURR, 5.1 MONO), all DTS modes
and 5.1a BYPASS

LISTENER POS

PANORAMA CALIBRATION

LIVENESS

NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL

LOW FREQ WIDTH

PANORAMA

MASTER LEVEL

5.1 2-CHANNEL, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN

MID RT

CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes

OUTPUT LEVELS

All except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1 2-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 2CH BYPASS and LIVE! modes

PANORAMA

Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC

PRE-DELAY

NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes

RE-EQUALIZER

L7 FILM, L7 TV, Dolby PLII + THX, Dolby PLIIx + THX, 5.1 L7 FILM, 5.1 L7 TV, THX ULTRA2, THX SurEX, THX, DTS
(-ES) L7 FILM, DTS (-ES) THX ULTRA2 and DTS (-ES) THX

REAR DLY OFFSET

All L7 modes and PANORAMA

REAR L/R

All except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1 2-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 2CH BYPASS and LIVE! modes

RESET MODE

All modes

REVERB LVL

All LIVE! modes

ROLLOFF

NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes

SHAPE

All LIVE! modes

SIDE L/R

All except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1 2-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 2CH BYPASS and LIVE! modes

6-48

Mode Adjust

RV-8

The parameter...

Is used in these modes

SIZE

NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes

SOUND STAGE

All L7 modes

SOURCE

PANORAMA CALIBRATION

SPEAKER ANGLE

PANORAMA CALIBRATION

SPEECH DETECT

NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH and CATHEDRAL

SPREAD

All LIVE! modes

SUB & SUB LVL

All except LIVE! modes

SURR ROLLOFF

All L7 modes

SURROUND DLY

Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC

SURROUND EX

THX ULTRA2, THX SurEX, THX

SURROUND MIX

5.1 2-CHANNEL and DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN

TREB CUT RT

All LIVE! modes

VOCAL ENHANCE

All L7 modes

6-49

7
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Troubleshooting..........................................................................7-2
Routine Maintenance ..................................................................7-4
Restoring Factory-Default Settings...............................................7-4

Troubleshooting and Maintenance

Lexicon

TROUBLESHOOTING
The RV-8 does not power on.
1. Make sure the rear-panel power switch is set to the | (“on”)
position.
2. Attempt to power on the RV-8 with the front-panel Standby
button and remote control On button.
3. Examine the power cord to ensure a good connection between
the rear-panel AC input connector and the wall outlet.

front-panel displays when audio has been muted. To deactivate
mute, press the Mute button or adjust the volume level.
3. Check the INPUT SETUP menu DIGITAL IN and ANALOG IN
parameters to ensure the appropriate audio connector is assigned
to the selected input.
4. Make sure the RV-8 is receiving an audio signal. To do this,
follow the instructions that begin on page 2-29 to open the
STATUS menu for the current input source.

4. Check the electrical circuit and breaker.
Dialogue sounds muffled.
The remote control does not work.
1. Eliminate obstructions between the remote control and the
front-panel IR receiver. When the RV-8 is not using the rearpanel IR IN connector, the remote control must be in line of
sight with the front-panel IR receiver for proper operation. The
remote control might also become unreliable if strong sunlight
or fluorescent light is shining on the IR receiver.
2. Make sure the remote control batteries are correctly inserted
with the proper polarity (page 1-6).
3. Replace the remote control batteries. When the batteries are
low on power, the remote control enters a low-voltage
condition that prevents it from operating the RV-8.
The RV-8 is powered on, but there is no audio.
1. Make sure volume level is audible. Volume level can be
increased with the front-panel volume knob or the remote
control VOL
and
buttons.
2. Make sure audio has not been muted. The message “MUTE
ON” or “FULL MUTE ON” will appear in the on-screen and

7-2

If the speaker setup does not include a center speaker, make sure a
custom – as opposed to a THX – speaker setup is selected. Then,
make sure the CUSTOM SETUP menu CENTER parameter is set to
NONE (page 3-31).
A humming sound is present in the audio.
1. If a cable TV connection is present, disconnect the cable from
the wall outlet. If this eliminates the humming sound, a ground
loop isolation device is required. Contact your dealer or the
cable provider for assistance.
2. Disconnect components one at a time to isolate the problem.
Once the problem is identified, make sure the associated
component is properly grounded and connected to the same
electrical circuit as the RV-8.
The RV-8 is powered on, but there is no video.
1. Examine the video cables – particularly the S-Video cables –
to ensure a good connection to the associated component.

Troubleshooting and Maintenance

RV-8
2. Check the INPUT SETUP menu VIDEO IN and COMPONENT IN
(page 3-11) parameters to ensure the appropriate video
connector is assigned to the selected input.
RF interference is present in the audio or video.
1. Make sure the RV-8 is not positioned near unshielded TV or FM
antennas, cable TV decoders and other RF-emitting devices.

2. Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer.
3. Contact Lexicon customer service at 781-280-0300 or
www.lexicon.com.
Note:
Visit the knowledgebase at http://www.lexicon.com/kbase for
answers to frequently asked questions and additional troubleshooting information.

2. Replace unshielded cables with shielded cables wherever possible.
The RV-8 is exhibiting erratic behavior.
1. Set the rear-panel power switch to the c (“off”) position. Wait
10 seconds. Then set the rear-panel power switch to the |
(“on”) position.
2. Use the RV-8 configuration tool to download the current RV-8
configuration to a personal computer (PC) or document all userdefined settings on the Installation Worksheet that begins on
page D-2. Then, follow the instructions on the next page to
restore factory-default settings.
If all else fails...

The tuner volume suddenly went mute, then after a minute it
resumed. This seems to happen occasionally.
Under the TUNER SETUP menu, is the AUTO FREQUENCY option
active? You may be experiencing broadcast station dropouts. When
the broadcast signal drops out, the volume is muted and AUTO
FREQUENCY activates, scanning for alternate broadcast frequencies
and then verifying that the station ID is an exact match. If the
station ID matches and the alternate frequency is a stronger signal,
then the tuner switches to the alternate frequency and turns off the
volume mute. Otherwise, auto frequency scans for another
alternate frequency and repeats the procedure. If there are a lot of
alternate broadcast frequencies, this process can take a noticeable
amount of time. To stop this behavior, simply turn off the Auto
frequency option.

1. Document all user-defined settings on the Installation
Worksheet that begins on page D-2. Then, follow the instructions on page 7-4 to restore factory-default settings.

7-3

Troubleshooting and Maintenance

Lexicon

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
low-pressure blower can be used to remove dust from its
exterior surface.

The bulleted items below describe routine maintenance that should
be performed on a periodic basis.
•

Clean the RV-8 exterior surface with a soft, lint-free cloth. Do
not use alcohol, benzene, acetone-based cleaners or strong
commercial cleaners. Do not use a cloth made with steel wool
or metal polish. If the RV-8 is exposed to a dusty environment, a

•

Replace the remote control batteries as needed. The remote
control requires four AAA batteries. When these batteries are
low on power, the remote control enters a low-voltage
condition that prevents it from operating the RV-8. Normal
operation will resume when new batteries are installed.

RESTORING FACTORY-DEFAULT SETTINGS
When factory-default settings are restored, all parameters and userdefined values are restored to their factory-default settings. Before
restoring factory-default settings, record all user-defined settings in
the Installation Worksheet in the Appendix on page D-2.
FACTORY SETTINGS
EXIT
RESTORE DEFAULTS

FACTORY SETTINGS
HAVE BEEN RESTORED
PRESS ANY KEY
TO RESTART

To restore factory-default settings:
1. Record all user-defined settings on the Installation Worksheet
that begins on page D-2. When factory-default settings are
restored, all parameters and user-defined values are restored to
their factory-default settings.
2. If the RV-8 is powered on, press the front-panel standby button
or the remote control Off button to activate standby mode and
deactivate the RV-8. If the RV-8 is in standby mode, proceed to
step 3.
7-4

3. Press the front-panel standby button or the remote control On
button to deactivate standby mode and activate the RV-8.
4. Quickly press and hold the front-panel or remote control Mute
button until the FACTORY SETTINGS menu opens in the onscreen and front-panel displays.
5. Press the remote control
and
arrow buttons to highlight
the desired option. Highlight the RESTORE DEFAULTS option to
restore factory-default settings. Highlight the EXIT option to
close the FACTORY SETTINGS menu without restoring factorydefault settings.
6. When the desired option is highlighted, press the remote
control
arrow button to select this option.
•

If the RESTORE DEFAULTS option was selected, the
FACTORY SETTINGS message shown in the previous page
will appear in the on-screen and front-panel displays. When
this message appears, press a front-panel or remote control
button to restart the RV-8.

•

If the EXIT option is selected, the FACTORY SETTINGS menu
will close and the two-line status will open in the on-screen
and front-panel displays.

A
Appendix
Specifications ............................................................................ A-2
Declaration of Conformity ......................................................... A-4

Appendix A

Lexicon

SPECIFICATIONS

Main Zone Audio Performance
Input Sensitivity

200mV Rms (2V Rms for maximum output level) at 0dB
input gain

Input Impedance

100kΩ in parallel with 150pF

Audio Input & Output Connectors
Analog Audio Inputs

Eight stereo (RCA) or five stereo and one 5.1-channel or 2
stereo and two 5.1-channel connectors

Digital Audio Inputs

• Four S/PDIF coaxial (RCA) and four S/PDIF optical
connectors
• Coaxial and optical input connectors conform to IEC958, S/PDIF standards
• Accepts 44.1, 48, 88.2 and 96kHz sample rates
• Accepts 16-24-bit PCM audio, Dolby Digital, DTS, DTSES discrete and DTS-96K data formats

Main Zone Audio
Outputs

Eight unbalanced (RCA) connectors for Front L/R, Center,
Sub, Side L/R and Rear L/R

Zone 2 Audio Outputs • One unbalanced (RCA, variable output level) stereo connector
• One unbalanced (RCA, fixed output level) stereo connector
• One S/PDIF coaxial (RCA) connector and one optical connector
Zone 3 Audio Outputs One stereo (RCA, variable output level) connector
Headphone

One stereo (1/4-inch phone) connector

Amplifier

Seven channels, two channels can be assigned to Zone 2 or
Zone 3

Main Zone Audio Performance

Preamp Output Level • 150mV Rms typical, 6V Rms maximum (RCA connectors)
• Maximum value with full-scale input signal and volume
at +12dB
Preamp Output
Impedance

500Ω in parallel with 150pF (RCA connectors)

Zone 2 and Zone 3 Audio Performance
A/D Conversion

24-Bit, 44.1 to 96kHz, multibit ΔΣ architecture (Zone 2 only)

D/A Conversion

24-Bit, 44.1 to 192kHz, multibit ΔΣ architecture

Frequency Response

10Hz to 20kHz, +0.1dB/–0.25dB, –0.75dB at 40kHz,
reference 1kHz

THD + Noise

Below 0.005% at 1kHz, (1V Rms output level)

Dynamic Range

101dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth

Signal-to-Noise Ratio

101dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth

Input Sensitivity

200mV Rms (4V Rms for maximum output level)

Input Impedance

100kΩ in parallel with 150pF

Preamp Output Level • 200mV Rms typical, 4V Rms maximum
• Maximum value with full-scale input signal and volume
at 0dB
Preamp Output
Impedance

300Ω in parallel with 150pF

A/D Conversion

24-Bit, 96kHz, dual-bit ΔΣ architecture

D/A Conversion

24-Bit, 44.1 to 192kHz, multibit ΔΣ architecture

*Frequency Response

20Hz to 20kHz, +0.1dB/–0.1dB, –0.25dB at 40kHz,
–0.5dB at 40kHz, reference 1kHz

Video Input & Output Connectors

*THD + Noise

Below 0.02%, 20Hz to 20kHz, 140W Rms all channels driven

Video Inputs

*Dynamic Range

• 105dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth, “A” weighted
• 102dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth, unweighted

Five composite (RCA), five S-Video and three component
video (RCA)

Video Outputs

Two composite (RCA, one monitor and one Zone 2), two
S-Video (one monitor and one Zone 2) and one component
(RCA)

*Signal-to-Noise Ratio • 105dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth, “A” weighted
• 102dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth, unweighted

A-2

Appendix A

RV-8
Composite & S-Video Performance

FM Tuner Performance

Compatibility

NTSC, PAL and SECAM

Selectivity

>87dBmV, 93dBmV typical

Switching

Active

Frequency Response

50Hz to 16kHz, +0.1dB/-1.0dB

Output Level

<0.4% at 1 kHz (stereo)

1.0V peak-to-peak

THD + Noise

Impedance

75Ω

Signal-to-Noise Ratio 50dB minimum at 60dBmV

Input Return Loss

>40dB

Image Rejection

>50dB, >60dB typical

Differential Gain

<0.5%

AM Suppression

>45dB, >55dB typical

Differential Phase

<0.5°

Bandwidth

>25MHz

K Factor

<0.3%

Gain

±0.15dB

Signal-to-Noise Ratio >65dB
Frequency Response

10Hz to 10MHz + 0.1/–0.3dB

AM Tuner Performance
Tuning Range

520 to 1720kHz

Usable Sensitivity

<8uV, 4uV typical

THD + Noise

< 0.56%, 0.20% typical (1kHz, 60dBmV, 30% mod)

Wideband AGC

>80dBmV

Component Video Performance

Phono Performance (MM)

Compatibility

3-Channel (Y, Pr, Pb), format-independent

Frequency Response

50Hz to 20kHz, +0.5dB/-0.5dB, rumble filter -4dB at 10Hz

Switching

Passive

THD + Noise

< 0.20%, 20Hz to 10kHz, 4.7mV input

Impedance

75Ω

Signal-to-Noise Ratio 72dB minimum

Insertion Loss

<3dB

Bandwidth

>150MHz

Video Converter

NTSC, PAL, SECAM, to Y/Pb/Pr

Compatible Amplifier Connectors
Banana Plugs

Microphone Input Connectors
Inputs

Two microphone jacks

Input Sensitivity

10mV Rms (400mV maximum input level)

Input Impedance

20kΩ (accepts balanced or unbalanced input signals)

Spade Connectors

Size 10-12 gauge

Bare Wire

Up to 10 gauge bare wire

Other
Trigger Outputs

One power on/off and one programmable connector on
detachable screw terminals (+12 VDC, 0.5 amps each)

RS-232 Serial Input/
Output

Two 9-pin D-sub connectors

FM Tuner Performance
Tuning Range

64MHz to 108MHz

Usable Sensitivity

<4uV, 1.6mV typical

Standard 0.75 inch plugs

A-3

Appendix A

Lexicon

Other
Power Requirements

120-230 VAC, 50-60Hz, 60W (universal line input), detachable power cord

RV-8
Dimensions &
Weight

•
•
•
•

Rack-Mounting

• Optional brackets are available for installation in a standard 19" equipment rack (two rack units required)

Environment

• Operating temperature: 0° to 35°C (32° to 95°F)
• Storage temperature: –30° to 75°C (–22° to 167°F)
• Relative humidity: 95% maximum without condensation

Remote Control

Height (with feet): 7.76 inches (197.1mm)
Width: 17.3 inches (440mm)
Depth: 21.2 inches (538.48mm)
Weight: 65 lb. (29.48kg)

• Handheld, backlit infrared remote control unit, preprogrammed and learning
• Requires four AAA batteries (alkaline batteries recommended)

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Application of Council Directive(s):
89/336/EEC and 93/68/EEC
Standard(s) to Which Conformity is Declared:
EN 55013:2001
EN 55020:2002
EN 61000-3-2-2000
EN 61000-3-3:1995+A1:2001
EN 61000-3-11:2000
EN 60065:1998
Manufacturer:

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Harman Specialty Group
3 Oak Park
Bedford, MA 01730-1413 USA

The equipment identified here conforms to the Directive(s) and Standard(s) specified above.
Type of Equipment: Digital Controller
Model:

Lexicon RV-8

Date:

August 2005

Harman Specialty Group
Vice President of Engineering
3 Oak Park
Bedford, MA 01730-1413 USA
Tel: 781-280-0300
Fax: 781-280-0490

A-4

B
Appendix
Menu Tree ..................................................................................B-2

Appendix B

Lexicon

MENU TREE
TRIGGER SETUP

MAIN MENU

SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

INPUT SETUP

I/O CONFIG

TUNER SETUP

DVD1
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
PHONO

ANALOG INPUTS
AMP OUTPUTS

REGION
USA
SCAN SENS
LOW
AUTOLOAD
CLEAR ALL
TUNER PRESETS
DISPLAY
RDS NAME
RADIO TEXT
ON
SCROLL RATE
MEDIUM
AUTO FREQUENCY
ON

continued on page B-6

SPEAKER SETUP
SETUP CROSSOVERS
CHECK MICROPHONES
AUTOMATIC
MANUAL
SET CROSSOVERS
BEFORE CALIBRATING
continued on page B-8

POWER MANAGEMENT

continued on page B-13

DISPLAY SETUP
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
A/V SYNC DELAY
OFF
CUSTOM NAME
OFF
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
continued on page B-13

VOLUME CONTROL SETUP
MAIN POWER ON
MUTE LEVEL
Z2 PWR ON
Z3 PWR ON
HEADPHONE
MAX VOLUME

LAST LVL, -80 to +12dB

BROWNOUT PROTECT ON
CAUTION!
IF SET TO OFF
THIS ACTION WILL
DISABLE INTERNAL
BROWNOUT PROTECTION

B-2

-30dB
-30dB
-30dB
-30dB
-30dB
+12dB

-10dB
-20dB
-30dB
-40dB
FULL MUTE

continued on page B-14

LOCK OPTIONS
MODES
UNLOCKED
AUDIO CNTRL UNLOCKED
SETUP
UNLOCKED
LOCKED
UNLOCKED

LIVE! CALIBRATION
!CAUTION!
HIGH AUDIO LEVELS
YOU WILL HAVE 10 SEC
TO LEAVE THE ROOM OR
SIT QUIETLY
PRESS ssTO BEGIN
COUNTDOWN
continued on page B-14

REMOTE ONLY
DVD1
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
PHONO
ZONE2 INPUTS
ZONE3 INPUTS
FILM
TV
MUSIC
MUSIC SURR
PLIIx +
PLIIx MOV
PLIIx MUS
PLII+
PLII MOVIE
PLII MUSIC
PL +
PRO LOGIC
+
CIN
MUSIC
NIGHTCLUB
CONCERT HALL
CHURCH
CATHEDRAL
PANORAMA
2-CH SURROUND
2-CHANNEL
MONO LOGIC
MONO SURROUND
MONO
5.1 FILM
5.1 TV
5.1 MUSIC
SurEX
MUSIC
5.1 PLIIx MOV
5.1 PLIIx MUS
DIGITAL EX
5.1 2-CHANNEL
5.1 MONO LOGIC
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO
FILM
MUSIC

MUSIC
2-CHAN
5.1a FILM
5.1a MUSIC
5.1a
SurEX
5.1a
MUSIC
5.1a STANDARD
5.1a 2-CHANNEL
5.1a BYPASS
2CH BYPASS
HEADPHONE
HEADPHONE 5.1
HEADPHONE
HEADPHONE 5.1a
LIVE! SMALL
LIVE! MED
LIVE! LARGE

ON
OFF

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

Appendix B

RV-8

SETUP MENU: INPUTS
MAIN MENU

SETUP

INPUT SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

DVD1
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
PHONO

Selecting SETUP
INPUTS prompts the selection of the desired input (for example,
DVD1). Selecting an input opens the corresponding INPUT SETUP menu shown below.
The parameters on the left side of the INPUT SETUP menus are identical regardless of
which input is selected. The parameter settings on the right side are adjustable. Default
parameter settings differ from input to input. The INPUT SETUP menus shown below
indicate default parameter settings for each input.

DVD1 INPUT SETUP
NAME
DVD1
DIGITAL IN
COAX-1
ANALOG IN
NONE
ANLG IN LVL
AUTO
VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO-1
COMPONENT IN
1
2-CH
FILM
D
5.1
FILM
FILM
5.1a
5.1a
FILM
MIC
LIVE! MED
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
ZONE2 ADVANCED

SAT INPUT SETUP
NAME
SAT
DIGITAL IN
OPTICAL-1
ANALOG IN ANALOG-1
ANLG IN LVL
AUTO
VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO-3
COMPONENT IN
3
2-CH
TV
D
5.1
TV
FILM
5.1a
5.1a
FILM
MIC
LIVE! MED
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
ANLG
ZONE2 ADVANCED

TV INPUT SETUP
NAME
TV
DIGITAL IN
OPTICAL-2
ANALOG IN
ANALOG-3
ANLG IN LVL
AUTO
VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO-5
COMPONENT IN
3
2-CH
TV
D
5.1
TV
FILM
5.1a
5.1a
FILM
MIC
LIVE! MED
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
ANLG
ZONE2 ADVANCED

TUNER INPUT SETUP
NAME
TUNER
DIGITAL IN
NONE
ANALOG IN
TUNER
ANLG IN LVL
AUTO
VIDEO IN
NONE
COMPONENT IN
NONE
2-CH
MUSIC
D
5.1
MUSIC
MUSIC
5.1a
5.1a
MUSIC
MIC
LIVE! MED
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
ANLG
ZONE2 ADVANCED

DVD2 INPUT SETUP
NAME
DVD2
DIGITAL IN
COAX-2
ANALOG IN
NONE
ANLG IN LVL
AUTO
VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO-2
COMPONENT IN
2
2-CH
FILM
D
5.1
FILM
FILM
5.1a
5.1a
FILM
MIC
LIVE! MED
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
ZONE2 ADVANCED

VCR INPUT SETUP
NAME
VCR
DIGITAL IN
NONE
ANALOG IN
ANALOG-2
ANLG IN LVL
AUTO
VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO-4
COMPONENT IN
3
2-CH
FILM
D
5.1
FILM
FILM
5.1a
5.1a
FILM
MIC
LIVE! MED
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
ANLG
ZONE2 ADVANCED

CD INPUT SETUP
NAME
CD
DIGITAL IN
COAX-3
ANALOG IN
NONE
ANLG IN LVL
AUTO
VIDEO IN
NON
COMPONENT IN
NONE
2-CH
MUSIC
D
5.1
MUSIC
MUSIC
5.1a
5.1a
MUSIC
MIC
LIVE! MED
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
ZONE2 ADVANCED

PHONO INPUT SETUP
NAME
PHONO
DIGITAL IN
NONE
ANALOG IN
PHONO
ANLG IN LVL
AUTO
VIDEO IN
NONE
COMPONENT IN
NONE
2-CH
MUSIC
D
5.1
MUSIC
MUSIC
5.1a
5.1a
MUSIC
MIC
LIVE! MED
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
ANLG
ZONE2 ADVANCED

B-3

Appendix B

Lexicon

SETUP MENU: INPUTS

(continued)

MAIN MENU

SETUP

INPUT SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

DVD1
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
PHONO

DIGITAL
ANLG
DMIX

DVD1 INPUT NAME

DVD1 ANALOG IN

DVD1 VIDEO IN

DVD1 2-CH MODE

EDIT INPUT NAME
RESTORE DEFAULT NAME

ANALOG-1
ANALOG-2
ANALOG-3
ANALOG-4
ANALOG-5
ANALOG-6
ANALOG-7
ANALOG-8
PHONO
TUNER
NONE
LIVE!

COMPOSITE-1
COMPOSITE-2
COMPOSITE-3
COMPOSITE-4
COMPOSITE-5

FILM
TV
MUSIC
MUSIC SURR
PLII +
PLII MOVIE
PLII MUSIC
PL +
PRO LOGIC
NIGHTCLUB
CONCERT HALL
CHURCH
CATHEDRAL
PANORAMA
2-CH SURROUND
2-CHANNEL
MONO LOGIC
MONO SURROUND
MONO
HEADPHONE
USE LAST

PRESS MENU TO
RESTORE INPUT NAME

EDIT INPUT NAME
DVD1
BUTTONS TO EDIT
UP TO 8 CHARACTERS
BUTTON TO ADVANCE
DVD1 DIGITAL IN
COAX-1
COAX-2
COAX-3
COAX-4

OPTICAL-1
OPTICAL-2
OPTICAL-3
OPTICAL-4
NONE

S-VIDEO-2
S-VIDEO-3
S-VIDEO-4
S-VIDEO-5
NONE

The appearance of the ANALOG
IN menu depends on the configuration of the analog audio input
connectors. Refer to page 3-8 for
more information.

DVD1 ANLG IN LVL
ON
+0.dB

AUTO
MANUAL

DVD1 COMPONENT
COMPONENT-1
COMPONENT-2
COMPONENT-3
VIDEO
NONE
ON
OFF
-18 to +12dB

AUTO GAIN
dB L
0
-6
-15
-30
-45

B-4

S-VIDEO-1

+0.0dB

Indicates the current amount of
analog audio input level adjustment for the selected analog
audio input connector. This
parameter cannot be adjusted.

Selecting an INPUT SETUP menu item opens the corresponding menu shown below. These menus are
identical regardless of which input is selected.

DVD1
5.1
5.1
5.1

D MODE

FILM
TV
MUSIC

DIGITAL EX
5.1 2-CHANNEL
5.1 MONO LOGIC
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO
HEADPHONE 5.1
USE LAST
DVD1

MODE
FILM
MUSIC

2-CHAN
HEADPHONE
USE LAST

AUTO
OFF
DIGITAL
ANALOG
AUTO
DVD1 MAIN ADV

DIGITAL
INPUT SELECT
OFF
ANALOG BYPASS
AUTO
S-VIDEO 16:9
ON
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
ON
COMPONENT OSD
A
LEGACY VIDEO
FORMAT DETECT NORMAL
NORMAL
FAST
ON
OFF
A
B

DVD1 5.1a MODE

DVD1 ZONE2 ADV

5.1a
FILM
5.1a
MUSIC
5.1a
5.1a STANDARD

+0dB
ANLG IN LVL
OFF
DIGITAL BYPASS
44.1kHz
DIG OUT RATE
ENABLED
RECORD

5.1a 2-CHANNEL
HEADPHONE 5.1a
USE LAST
DVD1 MIC MODE
LIVE! SMALL
LIVE! MED
LIVE! LARGE
USE LAST

BLOCKED
ENABLED
-18 to +12dB
44.1kHz
48kHz
88.2kHz
96kHz
ON
OFF

Appendix B

RV-8

SETUP MENU: SPEAKERS
MAIN MENU

SETUP

SPEAKER SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

SET CROSSOVERS
CHECK MICROPHONES
AUTOMATIC
MANUAL

CUSTOM
CROSSOVER
SETUP
SETUP
CUSTOM SETUP
THX SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS
BEFORE CALIBRATING

80Hz
C
80Hz
M
SUB
80Hz

L
80Hz

SL RL
80Hz

80Hz

THX SPEAKER SETUP

CUSTOM SETUP
80 Hz
FRONT L/R
80 Hz
CENTER
80 Hz
SIDE L/R
80 Hz
REAR L/R
SUBWOOFER
80 Hz
ULTRA2 SUB OFF
N/A
BGC
APART
ASA

40 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
40RRHz
SR
OFF
80Hz
80Hz
N/A
APART

ON
OFF
APART
CLOSE
TOGETHER

!CAUTION!
PRESSING THE
BUTTON WILL
AUTOMATICALLY CHANGE
THE OUTPUTS TO A THX
SPEAKER
CONFIGURATION

THX SETUP

THX REAR SPEAKERS

THX 80Hz
FRONT L/R
THX 80Hz
CENTER
THX 80Hz
SIDE L/R
THX 80Hz
REAR L/R
SUBWOOFER THX 80Hz
ULTRA2 SUB OFF
BGC
N/A
ASA
APART

THX 80Hz
NONE

F R O N T L / R S P E AK E R S

CENTER SPEAKERS

SIDE L/R SPEAKERS

REAR L/R SPEAKERS

S U B WO O F E R

FULL
FULL + SUB
3 0 Hz
4 0 Hz
5 0 Hz
6 0 Hz
7 0 Hz
80Hz
THX 8 0 Hz
90Hz
1 0 0 Hz
1 1 0 Hz
1 2 0 Hz

FULL
FULL + SUB
3 0Hz
4 0Hz
5 0Hz
6 0Hz
7 0Hz
80Hz
THX 80 Hz
90Hz
1 0 0Hz
1 1 0Hz
1 2 0Hz
NONE

FULL
FULL + SUB
3 0 Hz
4 0 Hz
5 0 Hz
6 0 Hz
7 0 Hz
80Hz
THX 8 0 Hz
90Hz
1 0 0 Hz
1 1 0 Hz
1 2 0 Hz
NONE

FULL
3 0 Hz
4 0 Hz
5 0 Hz
6 0 Hz
7 0 Hz
80Hz
THX 8 0 Hz
90Hz
1 0 0 Hz
1 1 0 Hz
1 2 0 Hz
NONE

ON
OFF
APART
CLOSE
TOGETHER

B-5

Appendix B

Lexicon

SETUP MENU: SPEAKERS (continued)

MAIN MENU

SETUP

SPEAKER SETUP

CHECK MICROPHONES

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

SET CROSSOVERS
CHECK MICROPHONES
AUTOMATIC
MANUAL

GROUP MICROPHONES
INTO A BUNDLE IN THE
MIDDLE OF THE ROOM

CHECKING FOR SILENCE

CHECKING MICROPHONES

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP
DISTANCES & LEVELS
DISTANCES
OUTPUT LEVELS
PLACE MICROPHONES
AROUND PREFERRED
LISTENING POSITIONS

SET CROSSOVERS
BEFORE CALIBRATING

CHECK MICROPHONES

SET CROSSOVERS
CHECK MICROPHONES
AUTOMATIC
MANUAL

MIC 1
MIC 2

When an ERROR message appears on the last CHECK
MICROPHONES screen, pressing the
arrow button opens the SPEAKER SETUP menu. When no
ERROR message appears on the last CHECK MICROPHONES screen, pressing the arrow button opens
the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu.

B-6

PLEASE WAIT

PRESS TO
BEGIN MIC CHECK

SPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS
BEFORE CALIBRATING

PLEASE WAIT

ERROR
OK

PRESS TO VIEW
DETAILS
PRESS TO CONTINUE
(MICROPHONE)
OK

(MICROPHONE)
NOT DETECTED
or
(MICROPHONE)
SIGNAL TOO LOW
or
(MICROPHONE)
OUT OF RANGE
or
(MICROPHONE)
TOO MUCH ROOM NOISE

When an ERROR message appears on the last
CHECK MICROPHONES
screen, press the
or
arrow button to highlight
the desired microphone.
Then, press the
arrow
button to view more
details about the error.
One of the messages
shown to the left will
appear in the on-screen
display.

Appendix B

RV-8

MAIN MENU

SETUP

SPEAKER SETUP

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

SET CROSSOVERS
CHECK MICROPHONES
AUTOMATIC
MANUAL

DISTANCES & LEVELS
DISTANCES
OUTPUT LEVELS

SETTING SETUP
DISTANCES
CUSTOM
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER

SETTING SETUP
LEVELS
CUSTOM
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft

FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER

SET CROSSOVERS
BEFORE CALIBRATING
MIC CHECK REQUIRED
FOR AUTO CALIBRATION

CUSTOM
AUTO SPEAKER
SETUP SETUP
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB

PLACE MICROPHONES
AROUND PREFERRED
LISTENING POSITIONS

OK
OK

DISTANCES
LEVELS

AUTO VALUES APPLIED
PRESS TO VIEW
DETAILS

CUSTOM
AUTO SPEAKER
SETUP SETUP
DISTANCES
LEVELS

ERROR
ERROR

AUTO VALUES APPLIED
PRESS TO VIEW
DETAILS

LEVELS
OK
DISTANCES

CUSTOM
AUTO SPEAKER
SETUP SETUP
!CAUTION!
40 Hz
HIGH AUDIO
60 HzLEVELS
60 Hz
Hz 10 SEC
YOU WILL60
HAVE
TO LEAVE 40
THEHzROOM OR
OFF
SIT QUIETLY
N/A
PRESSAPART
TO BEGIN
COUNTDOWN

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP
TEST WILL BEGIN IN
10
PRESS TO SKIP
COUNTDOWN

When the RV-8 is finished calibrating speaker distances and output levels, the AUTO SPEAKER
SETUP results screen shown at the left will open in
the on-screen display, indicating the results for
each calibration procedure. If there is an error,
press the
or
arrow button to highlight the
desired calibration procedure. Then, press the
arrow button to select this procedure. Selecting
DISTANCES opens the AUTO DISTANCES screen
shown below. Selecting the LEVELS option opens
the AUTO LEVELS screen shown below.

The AUTO DISTANCES and AUTO LEVELS screens
shown on the right indicate the individual calibration results for each speaker. Press the
and
arrow buttons to highlight the desired speaker calibration parameter. Then, press the
arrow button to view more detailed results for the selected
speaker.
Press the
arrow button to return to the AUTO
SPEAKER SETUP results screen shown above (right).
Then, press the
arrow button to select the other
calibration procedure or press the
arrow button
to return to the SPEAKER SETUP menu.

AUTO LEVELS
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER
(SPEAKER)

ERROR
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB

(SPEAKER)
SPKR OUTPUT TOO HIGH
(SPEAKER)
SPKR OUTPUT TOO LOW

AUTO DISTANCES
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER

(SPEAKER)
SPEAKER OUT OF PHASE
(SPEAKER)
SIGNAL TOO LOW
(SPEAKER)
UNABLE TO CALCULATE
(SPEAKER)
MAY NOT BE ACCURATE

(SPEAKER)
OK

ERROR
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft

B-7

Appendix B

Lexicon

SETUP MENU: SPEAKERS

(continued)

MAIN MENU

SETUP

SPEAKER SETUP

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

SET CROSSOVERS
CHECK MICROPHONES
AUTOMATIC
MANUAL

DISTANCES & LEVELS
DISTANCES
OUTPUT LEVELS

SETTING SETUP
DISTANCES
CUSTOM
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft

FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER

AUTO DISTANCES

AUTO DISTANCES
ORIGINAL DISTANCES

FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUB (MONO)

RR
0.0ft

0.0ft

ERROR
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft

0.0ft
M
SUB
0.0ft

L
0.0ft

SL RL
0.0ft

0.0ft

ORIGINAL DISTANCES
APPLIED

B-8

MIC CHECK REQUIRED
FOR AUTO CALIBRATION

The AUTO DISTANCES screen shown below indicates
the individual calibration results for each speaker. Press
the
and
arrow buttons to highlight the desired
speaker calibration parameter. Then, press the
arrow button to view more detailed results for the
selected speaker.

SET DISTANCES

0.0ft

SET CROSSOVERS
BEFORE CALIBRATING

AUTO DISTANCES
APPLIED

PLACE MICROPHONES
AROUND PREFERRED
LISTENING POSITIONS

(SPEAKER)
SPEAKER OUT OF PHASE
(SPEAKER)
SIGNAL TOO LOW

SETTING SETUP
LEVELS
CUSTOM

AUTO LEVELS
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER

RR
0.0dB

0.0dB

(SPEAKER)
MAY NOT BE ACCURATE

0.0dB
M
SUB
0.0dB

L
0.0dB

SL RL
0.0dB

ORIGINAL LEVELS
APPLIED

0.0dB

TEST WILL BEGIN IN
10
PRESS TO SKIP
COUNTDOWN

The AUTO LEVELS screen shown below indicates the
individual calibration results for each speaker. Press the
and
arrow buttons to highlight the desired
speaker calibration parameter. Then, press the
arrow button to view more detailed results for the
selected speaker.

AUTO LEVELS
ORIGINAL LEVELS

0.0dB

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP

!CAUTION!
40 Hz
60 HzLEVELS
HIGH AUDIO
60 Hz
Hz 10 SEC
YOU WILL60
HAVE
TO LEAVE 40
THEHzROOM OR
OFF
SIT QUIETLY
N/A
PRESSAPART
TO BEGIN
COUNTDOWN

SET LEVELS

(SPEAKER)
UNABLE TO CALCULATE

(SPEAKER)

+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB

FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER

CUSTOM
AUTO SPEAKER
SETUP SETUP

AUTO LEVELS
APPLIED

ERROR
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB

(SPEAKER)
SPKR OUTPUT TOO HIGH
(SPEAKER)
SPKR OUTPUT TOO LOW
(SPEAKER)

Appendix B

RV-8

MAIN MENU

SETUP

SPEAKER SETUP

MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP

LEVELS CALIBRATION

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

SET CROSSOVERS
CHECK MICROPHONES
AUTOMATIC
MANUAL

SPEAKER DISTANCES
LEVELS CALIBRATION

INTERNAL NOISE TEST
EXTERNAL NOISE TEST
BASS PEAK LIMITER

SET CROSSOVERS
BEFORE CALIBRATING

RR
60Hz

60Hz

40Hz
C
60Hz
M
SUB
40Hz

L
40Hz

SL RL
60Hz

60Hz

SPEAKER
DISTANCES
CUSTOM
SETUP
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER
UNITS

METERS
FEET

0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
FEET

INTERNAL NOISE
!CAUTION!
HIGH AUDIO LEVELS

SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST

BASS PEAK LIMITER

FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER

CAL NOISE
LIMITER
LIMIT ADJ

+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB

ON
ON
100dB

!CAUTION!
HIGH AUDIO LEVELS

0.0 to 30.0ft or 12.0m
-18 to 12dB

75 to 120dB

ON
OFF

B-9

Appendix B

Lexicon

SETUP MENU: I/O CONFIG
MAIN MENU

SETUP

I/O CONFIG

REAR PANEL CONFIG

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

ANALOG INPUTS
AMP OUTPUTS

8 STEREO INPUTS
OR
5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG
OR
2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG

AMP OUTPUTS
MAIN 7.1
MAIN 5.1 & ZONE2 2.0
MAIN 5.1 & ZONE3 2.0

8 STEREO INPUTS
FOR REAR PANEL CFG
2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG
FOR REAR PANEL CFG
5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG
FOR REAR PANEL CFG

SETUP MENU: DISPLAYS
MAIN MENU

SETUP

DISPLAY SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
A/V SYNC DELAY
OFF
CUSTOM NAME
OFF
EDIT CUSTOM NAME

OFF, 1 to 60ms

ON
OFF

B-10

EDIT CUSTOM NAME
RV-8
BUTTONS TO EDIT
UP TO 20 CHARACTERS
BUTTON TO ADVANCE

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
ALWAYS ON
STATUS
100%
BRIGHTNESS
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
2 SECONDS
STATUS
TOP
POSITION
NTSC
FORMAT
ON
BACKGROUND

ON
OFF

100%
75%
50%
25%

ALWAYS ON
2 SECONDS
ALWAYS OFF
TOP
CENTER
BOTTOM
SECAM
PAL
NTSC

Appendix B

RV-8

SETUP MENU: TUNER SETUP
MAIN MENU

SETUP

TUNER SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

REGION
USA
SCAN SENS
LOW
AUTOLOAD
CLEAR ALL
TUNER PRESETS
DISPLAY
RDS NAME
RADIO TEXT
ON
SCROLL RATE MEDIUM
AUTO FREQUENCY
ON

PRESS RIGHT J
TO START AUTOLOAD
PRESS RIGHT J
TO CLEAR ALL PRESETS
PAGE 1
PAGE 2
PAGE 3
PAGE 4

FAST
MEDIUM
SLOW

USA
EUROPE
JAPAN
E. EUR

ON
OFF

PRESET NAME
RDS NAME
FREQUENCY

HIGH
MED
LOW

SETUP MENU: LIVE! CALIBRATION
MAIN MENU

SETUP

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT

LIVE! CALIBRATION

!CAUTION!
HIGH AUDIO LEVELS

TEST WILL BEGIN IN
10

IN PROGRESS

CALIBRATION DONE

YOU WILL HAVE 10 SEC
TO LEAVE THE ROOM OR
SIT QUIETLY

PRESS TO SKIP
COUNTDOWN

LIVE! CALIBRATION

PLEASE WAIT
PRESS

PRESS TO BEGIN
COUNTDOWN

TO CONTINUE

OR
LIVE! CALIBRATION
SIGNAL TOO LOW

PRESS

TO CONTINUE

B-11

Appendix B

Lexicon

MAIN MENU: TUNER PRESETS
MAIN MENU

TUNER PRESETS

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

PAGE 1
PAGE 2
PAGE 3
PAGE 4

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10

EDIT PRESET 1
0.00FM
0.00FM
0.00FM
0.00FM
0.00FM
0.00FM
0.00FM
0.00FM
0.00FM
0.00FM

Each tuner preset page allows up
to 10 preset stations.

FREQUENCY
BAND

0.00
FM

LISTEN TO PRESET
NAME
CLEAR PRESET

STATION
LOADED
PRESS MENU
TO CLEAR PRESET

EDIT STATION NAME
BUTTONS TO EDIT
UP TO 8 CHARACTERS
BUTTON TO ADVANCE

MAIN MENU: AUDIO CONTROLS
MAIN MENU

AUDIO CONTROLS

MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

BASS
+0.0dB
TREBLE
+0.0dB
TILT EQ
+0.0dB
LOUDNESS
OFF
BALANCE

FADER

ZONE2 BALANCE

ZONE3 BALANCE

B-12

BALANCE

FADER

ON
OFF

-3.0 to +3.0dB

-6.0 to +6.0dB

Appendix B

RV-8

MAIN MENU: MODE ADJUST
MAIN MENU
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP

* These listening mode
names differ depending on the current
input source, speaker
setup and parameter
settings. Refer to the
Listening Mode
Descriptions for more
information.

MODE ADJUST
FILM
TV
MUSIC
MUSIC SURR
PLIIx +
*
PLIIx MOV*
PLIIx MUS*
PLII+
PLII MOVIE
PLII MUSIC
PL +
PRO LOGIC
+
CIN
MUSIC
NIGHTCLUB
CONCERT HHALL
CHURCH
CATHEDRAL
PANORAMA
2-CH SURROUND
2-CHANNEL
MONO LOGIC
MONO SURROUND
MONO
5.1 FILM
5.1 TV
5.1 MUSIC
*
MUSIC
5.1 PLIIx MOV*
5.1 PLIIx MUS*
DIGITAL EX*
5.1 2-CHANNEL
5.1 MONO LOGIC
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO
FILM*
MUSIC*
*
MUSIC*
*
2-CHAN*
5.1a FILM
5.1a MUSIC
5.1a
*
5.1a
MUSIC
5.1a STANDARD
5.1a 2-CHANNEL

MODE ADJUST
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

5.1a BYPASS
2CH BYPASS
HEADPHONE
HEADPHONE 5.1
HEADPHONE
HEADPHONE 5.1a
LIVE! SMALL
LIVE! MED
LIVE! LARGE

FILM
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

ON
AUTO AZIMUTH
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB
RE-EQUALIZER
ON
SOUND STAGE
REAR
ON
5 SPKR ENHANCE
OFF
BASS ENHANCE
7.0kHz
SURR ROLLOFF
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
TV
ON
AUTO AZIMUTH
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB
FILM
FRONT STEERING
RE-EQUALIZER
OFF
SOUND STAGE
REAR
5 SPKR ENHANCE
ON
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
SURR ROLLOFF
7.0kHz
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

PLIIx +

RE-EQUALIZER
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
MUSIC

PLIIx MUS

PANORAMA
OFF
CTR WIDTH
3
DIMENSION
NEUTRAL
SURROUND DLY
10ms
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
PLII +
ON

PLII MOVIE
MUSIC
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB
FRONT STEERING MUSIC
NEUTRAL
SOUND STAGE
5 SPKR ENHANCE
ON
OFF
BASS ENHANCE
7.0kHz
SURR ROLLOFF
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
MUSIC SURR

ON
OFF

VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB
FRONT STEERING MSURR
SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL
5 SPKR ENHANCE
ON
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
SURR ROLLOFF 7.0kHz
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

CIN

PLIIx MOV

OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

RE-EQUALIZER
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

CATHEDRAL

RE-EQUALIZER
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

PANORAMA

NIGHTCLUB
CENTER DEPTH
11
SPEECH DETECT
ON
SIZE
5m
LIVENESS
196ms
PRE-DELAY
5ms
ROLLOFF
9.0kHz
EFFECT LVL
+3dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

PANORAMA
OFF
CTR WIDTH
3
DIMENSION
NEUTRAL
SURROUND DLY
10ms
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

CENTER DEPTH
12
SPEECH DETECT
ON
SIZE
20m
LIVENESS
1.72ms
PRE-DELAY
OFF
ROLLOFF
2.4kHz
EFFECT LVL
-2dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

PL +
RE-EQUALIZER
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
PRO LOGIC
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

CHURCH
CENTER DEPTH
SPEECH DETECT
SIZE
MID RT
BASS RT
PRE-DELAY
ROLLOFF
EFFECT LVL
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

EFFECT LVL
+4dB
BASS CONTENT STEREO
LOW FREQ WIDTH
+0
SURR ROLLOFF 3.1kHz
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms
INPUT BALANCE

CALIBRATION
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
2-CH SURROUND
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

CONCERT HALL

PLII MUSIC

CENTER DEPTH
12
SPEECH DETECT
ON
SIZE
30m
MID RT
3.72s
BASS RT
4.47s
PRE-DELAY
23ms
ROLLOFF
3.1kHz
EFFECT LVL
-8dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

5
ON
20m
1.56s
1.87s
24ms
2.4kHz
-3dB

2-CHANNEL

SUB LEVEL
CUSTOM

+0dB

MONO LOGIC

EFFECT LVL
-9dB
ACADMY FILTER
ON
SURR ROLLOFF 3.1kHz
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
MONO SURROUND

OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
MONO

SUB LVL
CUSTOM

+0dB

B-13

Appendix B

Lexicon

MAIN MENU: MODE ADJUST
5.1 FILM
VOCAL ENHANCE
RE-EQUALIZER
SOUND STAGE
5 SPKR ENHANCE
BASS ENHANCE
SURR ROLLOFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
5.1 TV
VOCAL ENHANCE
FRONT STEERING
RE-EQUALIZER
SOUND STAGE
5 SPKR ENHANCE
BASS ENHANCE
SURR ROLLOFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
5.1

+0.0dB
ON
REAR
ON
OFF
7.0kHz
15ms
OFF
+0.0dB

+0.0dB
FILM
OFF
REAR
ON
OFF
7.0kHz
15ms
OFF
+0.0dB

MUSIC

B-14

OFF
+0.0dB

5.1 PLIIx MOV
EX DECODING
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

AUTO
OFF
+0.0dB

5.1 PLIIx MUS
EX DECODING
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

AUTO
OFF
+0.0dB

5.1 MONO

DIGITAL EX
EX DECODING
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

AUTO
OFF
+0.0dB

5.1 2-CHANNEL

VOCAL ENHANCE
+0.0dB
FRONT STEERING
MUSIC
RE-EQUALIZER
OFF
SOUND STAGE
NEUTRAL
5 SPKR ENHANCE
ON
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
SURR ROLLOFF
7.0kHz
REAR DLY OFFSET
15ms
COMPRESSION
OFF
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

RE-EQUALIZER
SURROUND EX
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

MUSIC
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

ON
AUTO
OFF
+0.0dB

(continued)

+0dB
CENTER MIX
SURROUND MIX
+0dB
CNTR DLY SAMPLES +0
MASTER LEVEL
+0dB
COMPRESSION
OFF
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
SUB LEVEL
+0dB
CUSTOM

SUB LEVEL
CUSTOM
FILM
VOCAL ENHANCE
RE-EQUALIZER
SOUND STAGE
5 SPKR ENHANCE
BASS ENHANCE
SURR ROLLOFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
LFE MIX
DECODING
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

+0.0dB
ON
REAR
ON
OFF
7.0kHz
15ms
+0.0dB
AUTO

MUSIC
VOCAL ENHANCE
+0.0dB
FRONT STEERING
MUSIC
RE-EQUALIZER
OFF
SOUND STAGE
NEUTRAL
5 SPKR ENHANCE
ON
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
SURR ROLLOFF
7.0kHz
REAR DLY OFFSET
15ms
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
DECODING
AUTO
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

RE-EQUALIZER
LFE MIX
DECODING
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

ON
+0.0dB
AUTO

5.1 MONO LOGIC
EFFECT LVL
-9dB
ACADEMY FI8LTER +ON
SURR ROLLOFF 3.1kHz
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
5.1 MONO SURR
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

MUSIC
LFE MIX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

+0.0dB

+0dB
CENTER MIX
+0dB
SURROUND MIX
+0
CNTR DLY SAMPLES
+0dB
MASTER LEVEL
+0.0dB
LFE MIX
AUTO
DECODING
+0dB
SUB L/R LVL
CUSTOM

CENTER MIX
+0dB
SURROUND MIX
+0dB
CNTR DLY SAMPLES +0
MASTER LEVEL
+0dB
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
SUB LEVEL
+0dB
CUSTOM

5.1a FILM
VOCAL ENHANCE
RE-EQUALIZER
SOUND STAGE
5 SPKR ENHANCE
BASS ENHANCE
SURR ROLLOFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
LFE MIX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

RE-EQUALIZER
SURROUND EX
LFE MIX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

ON
OFF
+0.0dB

MUSIC

5.1a STANDARD
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

5.1a BYPASS

+0.0dB

LIVE! MED
MID RT
BASS RT
ROLLOFF
TREB CUT RT
PRE DELAY
ADVANCED
CUSTOM

1.84s
2.76s
2.4kHz
3.1kHz
18ms

LIVE! MED ADVANCED
REVERB LVL
-4dB
EARLY RFLX LVL
-14dB
BASS XOVER
156Hz
SHAPE
2
SPREAD
25%
SIZE
30m

2CH BYPASS
NO PARAMETERS
HEADPHONES
NO PARAMETERS

LIVE! LARGE
MID RT
BASS RT
ROLLOFF
TREB CUT RT
PRE DELAY
ADVANCED
CUSTOM

HEADPHONES 5.1
NO PARAMETERS

5.1a

+0.0dB
AUTO

+0.0dB
ON
REAR
ON
OFF
7.0kHz
15ms
+0.0dB

5.1a MUSIC
VOCAL ENHANCE
+0.0dB
FRONT STEERING
MUSIC
RE-EQUALIZER
OFF
SOUND STAGE
NEUTRAL
5 SPKR ENHANCE
ON
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
SURR ROLLOFF
7.0kHz
REAR DLY OFFSET
15ms
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

LFE MIX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
LFE MIX
DECODING
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

5.1a 2-CHANNEL

2-CHAN
+0dB

HEADPHONES
NO PARAMETERS
HEADPHONES 5.1a
NO PARAMETERS
LIVE! SMALL
MID RT
BASS RT
ROLLOFF
TREB CUT RT
PRE DELAY
ADVANCED
CUSTOM

597ms
597ms
3.1kHz
3.1kHz
10ms

LIVE! SMALL ADVANCED
REVERB LVL
+0dB
EARLY RFLX LVL
-13dB
BASS XOVER
156Hz
SHAPE
0
SPREAD
0%
SIZE
19m

4.71s
4.71s
3.1kHz
2.4kHz
20ms

LIVE! LARGE ADVANCED
REVERB LVL
-6dB
EARLY RFLX LVL
-17dB
BASS XOVER
156Hz
SHAPE
2
SPREAD
28%
SIZE
38m

Appendix B

RV-8

Selecting the listening mode menu CALIBRATION, OUTPUT LEVELS or CUSTOM option opens the corresponding menu path shown below. The CALIBRATION option is available for
the PANORAMA listening mode. The OUTPUT LEVELS and CUSTOM options are available for most listening modes. These menus are identical regardless of which listening mode is
selected. Listening mode menu parameter drop-down menus are shown below and on the next page.

PANORAMA
EFFECT LVL
BASS CONTENT
LOW FREQ WIDTH
SURR ROLLOFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
INPUT BALANCE
CALIBRATION
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

+4dB
STEREO
+0
3.1kHz
15ms

PANORAMA CALIBRATION

MONO LOGIC

SOURCE
LEFT & RIGHT
SPEAKER ANGLE
30deg
LISTENER POS
+0

EFFECT LVL
ACADMY FILTER
SURR ROLLOFF
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

NOTE:
ENSURE THAT
“SPEAKER SETUP” HAS
BEEN PROPERLY
PERFORMED

MONO LOGIC

OUTPUT LEVELS
-9dB
ON
3.1kHz
3.1kHz

CENTER
SIDE L/R
REAR L/R
SUB

+0dB
+0dB
+0dB
+0dB

EFFECT LVL
ACADMY FILTER
SURR ROLLOFF
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM

CUSTOM
-9dB
ON
+0
3.1kHz

CUSTOM VS PRESET
RESET MODE

Selecting a listening mode menu parameter opens the corresponding parameter drop-down menu shown below and on the next page. These drop-down menus are identical
regardless of which listening mode is selected. However, certain parameter ranges differ from listening mode to listening mode.
5 SPKR ENHANCE
ON
OFF

ACADEMY FILTER

BASS CONTENT
BINAURL
MONO
STEREO

BASS ENHANCE

ON
OFF

AUTO AZIMUTH
ON
OFF

CENTER

CNTR DLY SAMPLES

OFF, -30 to +12dB

CENTER DEPTH

ON
OFF

BASS RT

COMPRESSION
0 to 18

CENTER MIX
5ms to 48.6s

-127 to +127

-25 to +5dB

AUTO
ON
OFF

CTR WIDTH
MIN,1 to 6, MAX

CUSTOM VS PRESET
PRESET
CUSTOM

DIMENSION
FRONT
NEUTRAL
REAR

EFFECT LVL
-12 to +6dB

DECODING
AUTO
ON
OFF

EX DECODING
AUTO
ON
OFF

FRONT STEERING
OFF
MSURR
MUSIC
FILM

B-15

Appendix B

Lexicon

MAIN MENU: MODE ADJUST

INPUT BALANCE
L<

MASTER LEVEL

LFE MIX

MID RT

-20.0 or -10.0 to +0.0dB

CENTER MIX
-127

+127

24ms to 48.6s

ON
OFF

PRE-DELAY

30ms to 20.2s

LOW FREQ WIDTH
-25 to +25

REAR DLY OFFSET
OFF, 1 to 30ms

REAR L/R

PANORAMA

LIVENESS

B-16

-5 to +5dB

(continued)

10 to 100ms

RE-EQUALIZER
ON
OFF

OFF, -30 to 12dB

RESET MODE
PRESS RIGHT
TO RESTORE MODE

ROLLOFF
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

SIDE L/R
OFF, -30 to 12dB

SIZE

SPEECH DETECT
4 to 20 or 30ms

SOUND STAGE
FRONT
NEUTRAL
REAR

SOURCE

ON
OFF

SUB LEVEL
OFF, -30 to 12dB

SUB L/R LVL

RIGHT
LEFT & RIGHT
LEFT

SPEAKER ANGLE
10 to 90deg

OFF, -30 to 12dB

SURR ROLLOFF
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

SURROUND DLY
0 to 15ms

SURROUND EX
AUTO
ON
OFF

SURROUND MIX
+5 to +5dB

VOCAL ENHANCE
+6.0dB
+3.0dB
+0.0dB

Appendix B

RV-8

MAIN MENU: RESTORE DEFAULTS
FACTORY SETTINGS

Refer to the Restoring Factory-Default Settings section that begins on page 7-4 for more information.

FACTORY SETTINGS

EXIT
RESTORE DEFAULTS

HAVE BEEN RESTORED
PRESS ANY KEY
TO RESTART

2CH STATUS

STATUS MENUS

STATUS

PG1

INPUT
MODE
CHANNELS
BIT RATE
ENCODING
dB L
0
-6
-15
-30

SL SR

STATUS
WORD LENGTH
SAMPLE RATE

PG2

D STATUS

INPUT
MODE
INPUT TYPE
SAMPLE RATE

INPUT
MODE
CHANNELS
BIT RATE
EX ENCODED

dB L
0
-6
-15
-30

PG1

SL SR

LFE

D STATUS

-45

5.1a STATUS

5.1a BYPASS STATUS

2CH BYPASS STATUS

DIGITAL STATUS

INPUT
MODE
INPUT TYPE
SAMPLE RATE

INPUT
MODE
INPUT TYPE

INPUT
MODE
INPUT TYPE
SAMPLE RATE

ANLG
96kHz

PG2

SAMPLE RATE
2.0 ENCODING
DIALOG OFFSET
MIX ROOM
CENTER MIX LVL
SURR MIX LVL

LFE

-45

Refer to the Status Menus section that begins on page 2-29 for more information.

B-17

C
Appendix
Remote Control Programming .................................................. C-2
Three-Digit Preprogrammed Codes ......................................... C-18

Appendix C

Lexicon

REMOTE CONTROL PROGRAMMING
The RV-8 remote control has been designed to provide a new standard
in remote control technology offering a very powerful and flexible
preprogrammed and learning product.
The RV-8 remote control can operate up to 10 home entertainment
and home automation components by using the preprogrammed
code library in the remote control, by teaching up to 530 commands
into the RV-8 remote from your original remote controls, or a
combination of both. The RV-8 remote has many additional operating
features to add convenience and enjoyment to the operation of any
home entertainment system. You can create your own button labels on
the LCD screen; program 50 favorite channel buttons; operate the
volume, channel and transport buttons from one device when you are
in another device; and perform multiple tasks with the press of a single
button.
The RV-8 remote control features extensive preprogrammed IR codes
for practically all major audio and video equipment. It can set up and
operate various components by simply entering a threedigit code
number assigned to the brand of component. The code numbers for
the various brands of components are listed beginning on page C-18.
Refer to the programming instructions on page C-5 for additional
information.

C-2

DEVICE ACTIVATION
In addition to controlling the RV-8, the remote is designed to operate
up to seven components including Satellite Boxes, TV, DVD (LD), VCR,
CD and Phono. Remote control buttons perform different commands
depending on whether the Main Zone, Zone 2, Zone 3 or another
device is activated.
However, each of the device buttons and corresponding functions cab
be changed to meet individual requirements.
The Phono function could be used to operate lighting controls; the
second DVD (DVD2) could be changed to operate a second TV, etc.
Each device button on the main screen contains two subpages of
commands and the name of any LCD button can be changed, using
up to five alphabet characters, numbers and symbols to customize the
unit to fit your audio/video devices. Refer to ““Edit Text on Function/
Device Buttons” on page 13 for more information.

Appendix C

RV-8

MACRO OPERATIONS
A “macro” is a series of commands that can be sent out with the push
of a single button. Any function available on an original remote control
or in the preprogrammed database can be added to a macro to
completely automate what would normally be done by pushing
buttons one at a time. A macro can be configured to power on a TV or
projector, RV-8, and RT-10 Disc Player, change to the appropriate
inputs and outputs, dim lights and start a movie. It can be as simple or
as comprehensive as desired. There are two types of buttons that can
be used for macro operations: M1, M2, M3; POWER and SYSTEM OFF
Buttons, as well as the programmable device buttons.

The remote has 10 device buttons which can send out a series of up to
20 programmed commands when pressed for more than one second.
These buttons are commonly used in sending audio input codes when
you press the button to go to a device. The audio receiver would make
an automatic input switch according to the device button pressed.
However, these buttons can be programmed with any desired macro.

The M1, M2 and M3 are called ”system-wide” buttons because they
send out the same signal no matter what device is currently controlled.
The POWER and SYSTEM OFF buttons can be made “system-wide” if
they are programmed with macros.

Note:

Note:
Programming the POWER or SYSTEM OFF buttons with a macro overrides
the preprogrammed or learned code on the button.
See page C-10 for further information. Each of these five buttons is
designed to be able to send out a series of up to 20 commands that are
programmed into the buttons. One common use is to turn on and
turn off all A/V components with one button press. Device buttons can
be programmed with any macro sequence desired.

Up to 50 favorite channel buttons can be programmed into the RV-8
remote. Each of these buttons can send out up to 10 commands. Refer
to “Programming Favorite Channels” on page 9 for more information.

The last Device selected will remain active when on the HOME page and will
be shown at the bottom of the LCD screen. For example, if you are using
“TV” and then return to the HOME page, the hard buttons remain in TV
mode. The LCD buttons only change when another device is selected.
The remote can be set up to operate audio component volume control
buttons (UP, DOWN and MUTE) while all the other buttons control
other equipment. The remote can also be set up to operate channel
control and transport functions (PLAY, STOP, REWIND, FAST
FORWARD, SKIP-, SKIP+, PAUSE and RECORD buttons) from VCR,
DVD, LD, CD or any other mode while all other buttons in the remote
control are controlling other components. See page C-12 for more
information.

C-3

Appendix C

Lexicon

REMOTE PROGRAMMING OVERVIEW
The first task is to get all original remote controls together. You may
have one or more components that do not have original remote
c o n t r o l s . T h e s e c a n s t i l l b e c o n t r o l l e d b y t h e R V- 8 . T h e
preprogrammed method must be used for those devices. For the rest,
you can program the RV-8 to make it compatible with all components
by following the preprogrammed method instructions, by using the
original remote controls to teach the RV-8, or through both methods.
Next, it is recommended that you decide whether a “device-based,” or
an “activity-based” configuration is desired.
A “device-based” configuration centers on each device with its two
LCD pages controlling one component. All of the functions that the
original remote control has programmed in it would be put onto one
device. The RV-8 remote comes with the labels and preprogrammed
codes in a “device-based” setup.
When a preprogrammed code is chosen for a component from the
Three-Digit Preprogrammed Codes tables which start on page C-18,
that code will be applied to one device only.
An “activity-based” configuration centers on what you are doing at the
time. If you are watching a DVD on your TV, and are using the RV-8 to
control the sound, you may want to start by setting up the DVD device
using the preprogrammed method described in the next column, and
then add functions from the other devices you will be using while
watching your DVD video to the DVD device.
For example, while playing a DVD, to adjust the volume of the RV-8,
use the “Punch Through” method described on page C-12 to put the
RV-8’s volume control into the DVD device. To adjust other functions of

C-4

the RV-8 while staying in the DVD device, use the learning method
described on page C-7 to add those functions to the DVD device, such
as surround sound controls, the receiver's
DVD input code, the TV's power code, etc. In that instance, everything
that is needed for watching a DVD on your TV without having to
switch back and forth from device to device is available.
All programming is done by first entering the SETUP mode in the
remote control. Press both the HOME and ENT (enter) buttons,
simultaneously for three seconds to access the SETUP mode shown
below. “SETUP” will be displayed at the top of the LCD screen. Specific
programming instructions begin on the next page.

SETUP
P-PRO LEARN
FAV
MACRO
PUNCH RECAL
ERASE
EDIT
LIGHT CLONE

Appendix C

RV-8

USING PREPROGRAMMED CODES

Note:

To program the remote to make it compatible with other
components:

When using the Preprogramming method, always use the appropriate
button as shown in the column when asked ”FROM TABLE.” The
labels of the buttons may have been changed, but the codes are in
the positons as shown to the left. For example, the AUDIO Code table
will always be the top left button. The CD Code table will always be
the fourth button down on the right side of the LCD screen, etc.

1. Manually power on the device to be operated.
2. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing both the HOME and ENT
buttons simultaneously for three seconds until SETUP appears at
the top of the LCD screen.
3. Press the P-PRO button next to the LCD screen.
4. The remote will be flashing “SELECT BUTTON” at the bottom of
the LCD screen. Press the button for the device you wish to
program. For example, to program a TV, press the TV button.
5. The remote will be flashing “FROM TABLE” at the bottom of the
LCD screen. Select the device from which to access the code table.

Use DVD2, not DVD1, to access the DVD code library. DVD1 has
been preprogrammed to control the Lexicon RT-10 Disc Player.
6. The remote will be flashing “ENTER NUMBER.” Refer to the tables
starting on page C-18 and find the manufacturer/brand of your
device. (If programming the remote for the TV device, find the
TV’s device code table, and so on.)
7. Point the remote control toward the device and enter the first
three-digit code number selected for your device. There is no way
of knowing which code is the one that will have the functions that
more closely match your device than the others, so it is wise to try
them all. See step 9 on the next page. (Enter the code number
within 20 seconds of beginning the programming; otherwise the
remote will revert to the SETUP menu, and then after a period of
time, it will go back to the MAIN device page.) If there is more
than one code number assigned to your brand, try one code
number at a time until the right code number is found (the
number that turns off the device). If the device turns off when the
three-digit code is entered, make note of the code. It will have at
least some of the functions in it that are needed to control the
device.
8. Confirm that it is the right code by pressing the Power button. The
device should turn on. After it is confirmed that the right code is
entered, save the code by pressing the SAVE button on the LCD.
9. At this point try ALL of the buttons on the remote, and see which
ones work with the device. The majority of the buttons should

C-5

Appendix C
work with the device. Make note of the code if it seems to be the
right one, and try the next one. You are trying to find the one that
has the most functions to operate your equipment. If there are any
functions missing, you will learn them from your original remote in
the “Using Learning Method” section on page C-7.
10. Continue to program other components by repeating from Step 1
above.

Lexicon

AUTO SCAN WITH THREE-DIGIT NUMBER
You can also program the remote control by sending out a series of
Power Off commands for different brands stored in the library by using
the following steps. This is similar to the first method, except it is easier
to move through all of the device codes for your device and make note
of each one that turns your device OFF.

11. Press EXIT at any time to stop the procedure.

To program the remote to make it compatible with other
components:

12. When you are finished programming the remote, exit from the
preprogramming mode by pressing the HOME button and then exit
from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button once again.

1. Manually turn on the device you plan to operate.

Note:
A programmed code for each device can be changed at any time by
using the preprogrammed method which starts on the previous page.
A new code will override an old code. For example, this would be done
if a TV is replaced with a new TV. The code table for Laserdisc is stored
under DVD2. The code table for cable box is stored under Zone 2. The
code table for cassette player is stored under Zone 3.

2. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing both the HOME and ENT
buttons simultaneously for three seconds.
3. Press the P-PRO button next to the LCD screen.
4. The remote will be flashing “SELECT BUTTON.” Press the device you
wish to program. (For example, to program TV, press the TV button.)
5. The remote will be flashing “FROM TABLE.” Select the device from
which the scanned code will be selected. (Important: If you have
already relabeled your device keys, the LCD screen will not look
like the illustration on page C-5. Select the appropriate LCD
button for the “FROM TABLE” using the labels as shown in the
illustration on page C-4. For example, if you have relabeled
PHONO as LIGHTS, you would still push the bottom right button
to access the AUX Code Table.)
6. Point the remote control toward the component and press either
the UP or DOWN button on the LCD. (It will send out a series of
Power Off codes when the button is kept pressed and the code
numbers that are being sent are shown on the LCD.) If the right
code number is sent, the component will turn off right after the
code number is transmitted.
7. Release the UP or DOWN button as soon as the device is turned
off. If you passed the one that turned off the device, manually turn
the device back on, and reverse your UP or DOWN one press at a
time, until the unit turns off. There is no way of knowing which

C-6

Appendix C

RV-8
code is the one that will have the functions that more closely
match the device than the others, so it is advised to try them all.
See Step 9 below. (Press the UP or DOWN button within 20
seconds of beginning programming; otherwise the remote will
revert to the SETUP menu, and then after a period of time, it will
go back to the MAIN device page.) If there is more than one code
number assigned to your brand, try one code number at a time
until the correct code number is found (the number that turns off
the device). If the device turns off when you enter the three-digit
code, make note of the code. It will have at least some of the
functions in it that are needed to control the device.
8. Confirm that it is the right code by pressing the Power button.
After ensuring that the right code is entered, save the code by
pressing the SAVE button on the LCD.

Apart from the PAGE, HOME and FAV buttons, which cannot be taught,
the RV-8 remote has the capability of learning up to 530 commands.
Note:
Function buttons are buttons that can be assigned a command to control
a particular action for a device. Commonly used function buttons include
the 2 pages of sub-commands within each of the 10 devices: channel up/
down, volume up/down, menu, guide, exit, info, digits 0-9 and the center
of the joystick (thumbpad).

CAUTION! Do not edit the Main, Zone 2 or Zone 3 buttons. Doing so will remove RV-8 control.

9. Confirm that the right code number that matches the component
was entered by pressing other functional buttons. If any of the
buttons do not operate as they should, repeat from step 1.

IMPORTANT POINTS TO REMEMBER

10. Continue to program other components by repeating from step 1
(previous page).

•

Keep the remotes stable by placing them on a flat surface.

•

Make sure the original remote is pointed at the learning eye at
the top end of the case and is not at an angle.

12. Exit from Preprogrammed mode by pressing the HOME button
and then exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button
once again.

•

Make sure both remotes’ batteries aren't low.

•

Avoid programming the RV-8 remote under bright lights,
which can interfere with the infrared signals.

USING LEARNING METHOD

•

Some buttons require a single, short push of the original
remote's button; other “repeating” buttons, such as the VOL
button, require that you “press and hold” the original remote’s
button until “Good” flashes twice on the LCD screen.

•

Try varying the distance between the remotes to find an optimal
distance at which the codes are learned on the first or second try.

If the remote control fails to learn a function after a first attempt:

11. Press EXIT at any time if you do not wish to proceed.

The RV-8 remote can be programmed to operate a device by
“teaching” the correct commands to the device buttons on the main
screen menu; to the two sub-pages within each device button; to the
31 buttons and the joystick located in the middle of the remote control.
The RV-8 remote learns these commands by receiving infrared signals
directly from your existing remote controls. The RV-8 remote receives
these signals through its learning eye, located at the top of the unit.

C-7

Appendix C
PROGRAMMING THE FUNCTION BUTTONS
To program the Function Buttons:
1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing both the HOME and ENT
buttons simultaneously for three seconds.

Lexicon
example, to erase a punch through from a TV to a SAT device, just
“punch” through the TV to the TV.
See “Programming “Punch Through” Functions” on page 12 for more
information.

2. Press the LEARN button next to the LCD screen.

PROGRAMMING THE TEN DEVICE BUTTONS

3. Select the DEVICE that contains the function button you wish to
program.

This procedure will program ONE learned code onto the Device
button, so that when that Device is selected, it will send out the
learned signal as it changes to that Device's function pages.

4. Press the PAGE button to go to page 2 of the device if necessary.
5. Place the original remote control head to head with the RV-8
remote about 2 inches apart on a flat surface.
6. Press the button on the RV-8 remote you wish to program. Only
the three HOME, PAGE and FAV buttons cannot be programmed.
It is not recommended that you re-program the Main, Zone 2 or
Zone 3 buttons.
7. Press the button on the original remote control that you wish to
program onto the RV-8 remote. Once the RV-8 remote has
received the signal, the RV-8 remote will flash “GOOD” on the
LCD screen, indicating it learned the code correctly. (Perform Step
6 within 20 seconds of step 5; otherwise the remote will revert to
the SETUP menu, and then after a period of time, it will go back to
the MAIN device page.) If it flashes “Fail,” repeat from step 4 until
it learns successfully.
8. Repeat from step 3 until you have programmed all of the buttons
that are required.
9. Once you complete the programming and wish to exit the
LEARNING mode, press the HOME button. Exit from the SETUP
mode by pressing the HOME button again.
If you are having problems learning to the Volume, Channel and
Transport buttons, it may be because you have previously assigned a
“Punch Through” from another device to that device. To remove a
Punch Through, just “punch through” the device to itself. For
C-8

To program the one learned code onto the Device button:
1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing both the HOME and ENT
buttons simultaneously for three seconds.
2. Press the LEARN button next to the LCD screen.
3. Important: Press the PAGE button.
4. Place the original remote control head-to-head with the RV-8
remote about 2 inches apart on a flat surface.
5. Select any of the 10 device buttons to program onto the RV-8
remote. Press the button on the original remote control to
program into the Device button chosen on the RV-8 remote. Once
the RV-8 remote hasreceived the signal, the RV-8 remote will flash
“GOOD” on the LCD screen, indicating it learned the code
correctly. If it flashes ”FAIL,” repeat from step 4 until it learns
successfully. (Make sure to enter the code signal within 20 seconds
of programming.)
6. Return to step 5 until all Device buttons have been programmed.
7. When done programming, press the HOME button to exit the
Learning mode. Exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME
button once again.

Appendix C

RV-8
Note:
Follow these instructions only if you actually want a code sent when
changing devices. It may not be desired to send out codes when changing
to a device. For example, you program the RV-8’s TV input code on the TV
device, and are currently in the DVD device pages. The RV-8’s input is set to
DVD. Now you want to quickly adjust the picture on the TV. If the TV
device button is pushed, it will change the input on the RV-8 to TV and you
will not be able to adjust the picture for the DVD. In this case, it would be
better to not program a code to the TV device.

PROGRAMMING FAVORITE CHANNELS
Up to 50Favorite Channel buttons can be programmed and saved.
Each favorite channel button can send up to 10 commands with one
button press.
To program Favorite Channel Buttons:
1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing both the HOME and ENT
buttons simultaneously for three seconds.

6. Repeat from Step 3 until all the desired FAV channel buttons have
been programmed.
7. Once programming is completed, press the HOME button to exit
from the Favorite Channel mode. Exit from the SETUP mode by
pressing the HOME button once again.
There are five pages of LCD screens for favorite channel programming.
Scroll to other pages by pressing the PAGE or FAV button. In the
Favorite Channels macro, the following buttons can be used: 0-9,
ENTER, DISPLAY, POWER, SYSTEM OFF and INFO/PAUSE.
Note:
To make even more powerful FAV macros, codes can be learned from
original remote(s) to the 0-9, ENTER, DISPLAY, POWER, SYSTEM OFF and
INFO/PAUSE buttons in any device, and used in your FAV macros. (This will
not work if a preprogrammed device code has been applied to those
buttons.) For example, some TVs require a code be sent after the digits
other than the ENTER code in order to change channels. In this case, you
could learn the proper code to the ENTER button from your original TV
remote, and use that in your FAV macro.

2. Press the FAV button next to the LCD screen.
3. Press the device button that corresponds to the component that
the FAV channel will control. For example, pressing the TV device
will only send the type of code to which that the TV responds to.
Pressing the SAT device will only control the satellite box.
4. Press the LCD button you will be assigning to the favorite channel
and enter the channel number you wish to store in the FAV
channel button. Up to 10 digits can be stored.
5. Press the favorite channel button selected in step 4 again to store
the programmed channel.
Note:
If a wrong channel number is pushed, move the cursor by using the
left or right button of the joystick and then reassign the correct
channel number.
C-9

Appendix C

Lexicon

PROGRAMMING MACRO BUTTONS
A “macro” is a series of commands that can be sent with the push of a
single button. There are two types of macro functions that can be
programmed: functions involving the M1, M2 and M3 buttons;or
functions involving the POWER and SYSTEM OFF buttons. Each of
these buttons is designed to send up to 20 commands. The 10 device
buttons can also send a macro of up to 20 commands when the device
button is pressed for more than one second while on the HOME page
of the remote control.
Note:
If the POWER or SYSTEM OFF buttons are programmed with a macro, they
will no longer function as ON and OFF buttons for components. To restore
their original on and off function, erase any macros programmed onto them.

PROGRAMMING MACRO FUNCTIONS TO M1, M2, M3,
POWER AND SYSTEM OFF BUTTONS

7. Repeat from step 3 until you have programmed all of the Macros
that you require.
8. When programming is complete, press the HOME button. Exit
from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button once again.
Note:
Do not press the HOME button at the beginning of a macro, or it will not
work. The HOME button can be used at any other step in a macro. The M1,
M2, M3, POWER and SYSTEM OFF macros are system-wide, which means
they will function the same no matter what device is being used when they
are programmed.

PROGRAMMING MACRO FUNCTIONS TO THE TEN
DEVICE BUTTONS
To program Macro function to the 10 device buttons:

To program macro functions to the M1, M2, M3, Power, System
Off buttons:

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENTER buttons
simultaneously for three seconds.

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT button
simultaneously for three seconds.

2. Press the MACRO button next to the LCD screen.

4. Press one of the 10 device buttons.

3. Press the macro button (M1, M2, M3, Power or System Off)
being programmed.

5. Press the functional buttons you wish to store in the device macro
button you selected in the order you want them stored. Up to 20
commands can be stored.

4. Press the functional buttons you wish to store in the device
macro button you selected, in the order you want them
stored. Up to 20 commands can be stored.
5. Be sure to end a macro on the Device page that you would like it
to remain on when the macro is sent in normal use.
6. Store the commands programmed into the macro button by
pressing the CH UP button.
C-10

3. Important: Press the PAGE button.

Note:
Do not press the HOME button at the beginning of a macro, or it will
not work. The HOME button can be used at any other step in a macro.
6. Be sure to end your macro on the Device page that you would like
to remain on when the macro is sent in normal use.

Appendix C

RV-8
7. Return to step 4 until all desired commands are programmed.

1. Press HOME and ENT simultaneously for three seconds.

8. Save the commands selected to the macro button by pressing the
CH UP button.

2. Press MACRO.

9. Once you complete the programming and wish to exit from this
mode, press the HOME button. Exit from the SET UP mode by
pressing the HOME button once again. Tip: Remember that a
single push of a Device Button that has a macro connected to it
will take you to that device's function pages. Hold the Device
Button down for one second in order to send the macro that you
have created for that Device Button.
Note:
Pressing the PAUSE button (bottom right of cursor pad) during the macro
programming will add a time delay of 0.2 seconds between the
commands. For example, pressing the PAUSE button three times will create
a pause of 0.6 seconds between the commands where the delay was
inserted. Pressing PAUSE does not count as a macro step.
When using a macro, remember to keep the remote pointed toward
the components until the macro is finished being transmited. A
“Sending” icon will flash in the upper right corner of the LCD screen as
the macro is sending each command. It will not appear when a series
of PAUSE commands are being executed. Wait until the icon finishes
flashing before using other functions or putting down the remote.

SAMPLE MACRO SEQUENCE
The following is a sample macro which demonstrates what a macro
can accomplish. This example assumes the names of the devices have
not been changed and that the “punch through” technique was used
to assign the VOL to the RV-8. If the labels have been changed, insert
the changed names into the example.
In this example, the M1 button will be used to power on the TV, the
RV-8 and the cable box; choose the appropriate inputs; and tune in a
favorite TV channel.

3. Press M1.
4. Press MAIN. (Opens the remote control MAIN device page.)
5. Press POWER.
6. Press TV. (Opens the TV device page.)
7. Press POWER.
8. Press HOME.
9. Press SAT. (Opens the SAT device page.)
10. Press POWER.
11. Press HOME.
12. Press MAIN
13. Press PAUSE three times. Pressing the PAUSE button three
timesallows for an extra .6 seconds of wait time (3 x .2 seconds per
push = .6 seconds). This step is included in this example because
most receivers and amps take time to “cycle up” and cannot
receive any commands, such as input, until the device is ready.
This example enabled the other steps of the macro to run while
the Audio device is “cycling up.”
14. Press SAT. (This selects the “SAT” input on the RV-8.)
15. Press HOME.
16. Press SAT. (Back to this device to enter the appropriate channel.)
17. Press 1, then 3, then 5. (Then press the ENT button if the cable
device requires it.)
18. Press CH UP to save the macro.
19. Press HOME twice. Press M1 to test the macro. It should turn on
the RV-8, then the TV, then the satellite box, then change the input
to SAT on the RV-8, then change the channel to 135.

C-11

Appendix C
Note:
A macro can end on any page, including the HOME page. In the previous
example, the macro was ended on the SAT page before saving it, as this
was the desired endpoint.

PROGRAMMING “PUNCH THROUGH” FUNCTIONS
The RV-8 volume control can be used in a different mode using the
volume “punch through” feature. You can also have channel “punch
through” (Channel Up, Channel Down) as well as eight VCR (or DVD)
transport buttons (Play, Stop, Fast Forward and Rewind, Skip-, Skip+,
Pause, Record) operate in another mode such as SAT, CD and RV-8
MAIN modes.
To program “punch through” functions:
1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT buttons
simultaneously for three seconds.
2. Press the PUNCH button next to the LCD screen.

Lexicon
You are punching through the controls of the second device to
the device that is currently being controlled by any other
buttons. For example, for VOL you are “punching through” the
controls of the RV-8 MAIN VOL to the TV or SAT, enabling you
to control the RV-8 MAIN VOL when in the TV or SAT screen.
6. Punch Through is saved when the second device is pressed.
7. Repeat from step 2 to program Punch Through for other devices.
8. Once you complete the programming and wish to exit fromthis
mode, press the HOME button. Exit from the SETUP mode by
pressing the HOME button once again.
9. Repeat from step 5 to “punch through” any other devices or
learned buttons.
10. Press the HOME button to exit to main Punch Through mode.
Press the HOME button once again to exit the SETUP mode.

ERASING MACRO FUNCTIONS
To erase M1, M2, M3, Power, System Off buttons:

Note:
When using “Punch Through,” think of the first device selected as the
device that now controls the functions, and think of the second device
as the device you want to control those functions. You are taking the
controls of the second device and “punching them through” to the
first device.
3. Press the VOL button on the LCD for Volume Punch Through, the
PLAY button for Transport Punch Through and the CH button for
Channel Punch Through.
4. Select the device you wish to “punch through” to (first device
example - television or satellite receiver).
5. Select the device you wish to “punch through” from (second
device example - RV-8 MAIN).

C-12

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing both the HOME and ENT
buttons simultaneously for three seconds.
2. Press the ERASE button next to the LCD screen.
3. Press the MACRO button.
4. To erase all of the macro buttons in the RV-8 remote, press the ALL
button and then press the SURE? button at the next LCD screen.
5. To erase just one of the macros, press the KEY button at step 4 and
then one of the M1, M2, M3, POWER or SYSTEM OFF buttons to
erase the macro functions from that button.
6. Press the HOME button to exit to main Erase mode.
7. Press the HOME button once again to exit the SETUP mode.

Appendix C

RV-8

ERASING FAVORITE CHANNEL BUTTONS

ERASING PUNCH THROUGH FUNCTIONS

To erase favorite channel buttons:

To erase “punch through” functions:

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing both the HOME and ENT
buttons simultaneously for three seconds.

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT buttons
simultaneously for three seconds.

2. Press the ERASE button next to the LCD screen.

2. Press the PUNCH button next to the LCD screen.

3. Press the FAV button.

3. Press the VOL button for Volume Punch Through, the PLA button
for Transport Punch Through or the CH button for Channel Punch
Through.

4. To erase all the favorite channel buttons in the RV-8 remote, press
the ALL button and then press the SURE? button at the next LCD
screen.
5. To erase one button, press the KEY button. Press the individual
button you want to erase and continue with any other individual
buttons you want to erase.

4. Press the device button from which you wish to erase Punch
Through.
5. Press the same device button again.

6. Repeat from Step 5 to erase any favorite channel buttons.

6. Punch through is erased when the same device button is pressed
the second time.

7. Press the HOME button to exit to main Erase mode.

7. Repeat from step 2 to erase the Punch Through for other devices.

8. Press the HOME button once again to exit the SETUP mode.

8. Exit from Punch Through mode by pressing the HOME button and
then exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button
once again.

ERASE MACRO FUNCTIONS FROM DEVICE BUTTONS
To erase macro function from device buttons:

EDIT TEXT ON FUNCTION/DEVICE BUTTONS

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT buttons
simultaneously for three seconds.

To edit text on function or device buttons:

2. Press the ERASE button next to the LCD screen.

1. Enter the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT buttons
simultaneously for three seconds.

3. Press the MACRO button.
4. Press the KEY button.
5. Press one of the 10 DEVICE buttons from which you wish to erase
the macro function. Once the device button has been pushed the
macro has been erased. The LCD will flash “ERASED!”
6. Exit from Macro mode by pressing the HOME button and then
exit from SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button once again.

2. Press the EDIT button next to the LCD screen.
3. Press the DEVICE button to display the function buttons for that
device.
4. Press the function button on which you wish to write or edit text.
You can also go to the second page of the device by press ing the
PAGE button.

C-13

Appendix C

Lexicon

5. To edit DEVICE button text, skip Steps 3 and 4 and press the PAGE
button before selecting the Device button.
6. The character to be changed will blink. To change the character
use the number pad buttons on the remote control. The
characters assigned to each number pad button are shown below.
It will cycle to a different character each time the same number
pad button is pressed.
Note:
Move the cursor left or right using the joystick. Delete a current
character by using the cursor down on the joystick. Using the “cursor
down” technique is a quick way to delete all of the text on a label.
1. A B C

2. D E F

3. G H I

4. J K L

5. M N O

6. P Q R

7. S T U

8. V W X

9. Y Z (Blank)

0. + - <>, etc

7. Save the text by pressing the button you were writing on (the same
function button selected in step 3 or device button in step 4).
8. Exit from Edit mode by pressing the HOME button and then exit
from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button again.

4. The character to be changed on the button you selected will blink
and you can change the character using the number pad buttons
on the remote control. The characters assigned to each number
pad button are shown in the previous column. It will cycle to a
different character each time the same number pad button is
pressed.
5. Save the edited text by pressing the same function button selected
in step 4.
6. Exit from Edit mode by pressing the HOME button and then exit
from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button once again.

RECALLING THE PREPROGRAMMED THREE-DIGIT NUMBER
1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT buttons
simultaneously for three seconds.
2. Press the RECAL button next to the LCD screen.
3. The LCD display will alternately flash device names and the threedigit code number assigned to the device for 10 seconds and then
exit to the SETUP mode.
4. Before the 10 seconds are up, pressing the HOME button on the
remote will stop the flashing and exit to the SETUP mode.
5. Exit from SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button once again.

EDIT TEXT FOR FAVORITE CHANNEL BUTTONS

ERASING LEARNED BUTTONS

To edit text for favorite channel buttons:

To erase learned buttons:

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT buttons
simultaneously for three seconds.

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing both the HOME and ENT
buttons simultaneously for three seconds.

2. Press the EDIT button next to the LCD screen.

2. Press the ERASE button next to the LCD screen.

3. Press the FAV button and then the favorite channel button on
which you wish to write text. There are five LCD pages of favorite
channels. Select the page you wish to write on by pressing the
PAGE button.

3. Press the LEARN button.

C-14

Appendix C

RV-8
4. If you wish to erase all the learned functions in the RV-8 remote,
press the ALL button and then press the SURE? button at the next
LCD screen.
5. To erase all the buttons in a single device or an individual button in
the device, press the DEVICE button.
6. Press the device button (TV, VCR, MAIN, etc.) to erase the
button(s) from the device.
Note:
Press the PAGE button and then press the DEVICE button (TV, VCR,
etc.) to erase the learned function in the device button itself.

Note:
The time entered in SETUP for the backlight to go off is extended each
time a button is pushed. The light will turn off at the predetermined
interval after the last button has been pushed.

CLONING THE RV-8 REMOTE CONTROL
To clone the remote from another remote:
1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT buttons
simultaneously for three seconds.
2. Press the CLONE button next to the LCD screen.

7. Press the ALL button to erase all the learned buttons in the device
and press the SURE? button at the next LCD screen.

3. Press either the SEND or RECV button depending upon the role of
the remote control. If the RV-8 remote is to be copied from, press
the SEND button. If it is to be copied to, press the RECV button.

8. Press a single button to erase individual buttons one at a time. This
will show all the functions in the device. Press the button you wish
to erase.

4. To clone the entire remote, press the ALL button. To clone only
one device at a time, press the DEVICE button.

PROGRAMMING THE BACKLIGHT TO TURN OFF
The backlight can be toggled On and Off by pushing the LIGHT
button on the top right side of the remote. It can also be set to turn off
at a predetermined time.
To program the backlight:
1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT buttons
simultaneously for three seconds.
2. Press the LIGHT button next to the LCD screen.
3. Using the number pad buttons, enter the desired backlight time
(in seconds). It can go up to 99 seconds. Save the time by pressing
the button to the right of the time just assigned.

5. Press the DEVICE button to show all of the devices. Press the
device button you wish to clone.
6. Set the RV-8 remote head-to-head with another RV-8 remote. Each
unit should be in either cloning from or cloning to mode, based
on the above steps.
7. Press the START button on both units to begin cloning. It will take
about 40 seconds to complete the cloning. The LCD will flash
“GOOD” upon completion.
8. Exit from the Cloning mode by pressing the HOME button and
then exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button
again.

4. Exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button.

C-15

Appendix C
ADJUSTING THE LCD CONTRAST
To adjust the LCD contrast:
Pressing the HOME button and Up on the joystick simultaneously will
make the LCD contrast darker. Pressing the HOME button and Down
on the joystick simultaneously will make the LCD contrast brighter.

BATTERY LIFE
Under normal operating conditions, the batteries will last
approximately six months. If the batteries are running low, there will
be reduced range from the remote, commands that are not sent
properly, or are not sent at all. The backlighting of the LCD screen and
the buttons may be diminished. Should any of these occur, replace the
batteries immediately. To ensure proper performance of the remote,
use four new AAA alkaline batteries. However, the worn batteries
should be replaced with a fresh set as soon as possible. Do not mix
new and used batteries.

Lexicon

CAUTION!
The LCD screen is breakable glass. Do not tap the LCD
screen to activate devices. Use the rubber buttons beside
the labels on the screen.
The RV-8 remote control is not waterproof. Never immerse
it in water. Keep the LCD screen dry. Immediately wipe off
any spilled liquid.
Do not expose the RV-8 remote to extreme temperatures.
Keep it away from any heat sources.
Avoid dropping the remote control.
Clean the LCD screen with a soft cloth. Never use abrasives
or cleaning solutions on the soft cloth.

Note:

RECALLING THE ZONE AUDIO CODES FOR THE RV-8

If the batteries are running low, the LCD displays “LOW BATTERY”
when the POWER button is pressed, or when the HOME and ENT buttons are pressed simultaneously.

To recall the RV-8 zone audio codes:

The remote has an internal memory lock system that retains all of the
programs and learned functions for an extended period of time in the
event of battery loss or replacement.

2. Press the RECAL button next to the LCD screen.

1. Simultaneously press MAIN and ENT buttons to access SETUP mode.
3. The LCD display will alternatively flash device names and the
three-digit code number assigned to the device for 10 seconds
and then exit to the SETUP mode. Make sure that the audio code
has the correct (default) number.
4. The MAIN zone default audio code should be 001. The ZONE 2
default audio code is 302, and the ZONE 3 default audio code is
303. If one of these codes has inadvertently been changed,
reprogram the codes as described below.

C-16

Appendix C

RV-8

REPROGRAMMING THE ZONE AUDIO CODES TO DEFAULT CODES
To reprogram the RV-8 zone audio codes:
1. Simultaneously press MAIN and ENT buttons to access SETUP mode.
2. Press the P-PRO button next to the LCD screen.
3. The remote should flash SELECT BUTTON at the bottom of the
LCD screen. Press the button for the zone you wish to reprogram.
4. The remote should flash FROM TABLE at the bottom of the LCD
screen. Select the MAIN zone button.

5. The remote should flash ENTER NUMBER. The correct (default)
audio codes for the RV-8 zones are as follows: MAIN zone is 001,
ZONE 2 is 302 and ZONE 3 is 303.
6. Enter the correct code.
7. Press SAVE on the right of the LCD screen to enter and save the
audio code for the zone.
8. Exit from Preprogrammed mode by pressing the HOME button
and then exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button
once again.

C-17

Appendix C

Lexicon

THREE-DIGIT PREPROGRAMMED CODES
AUDIO
Manufacturer
ADC
ADCOM
AIWA
AKAI
AMC
AMEND
AMX
ANGSTROM
ARCAM
AUDIO ACCESS
AUDIO ALCHEMY
AUDIO DESIGN
AUDIO EASE
AUDIO FILE
AUDIO MATRIX
AUDIO SOURCE
AUDIO TECHNICA
B&K
BOSE
BRYSTON
CARVER
CASIO
CHIRO
CINEMA SOUND
CITATION
CLARION
CURTIS MATHES
DENON
EIGER
ELAN
ENLIGHTENED AUDIO

C-18

AUDIO
Codes
007
082 092 225 161 269
018 104 170 202 203 213 211 188
138 189
125 126 127 128 258 281 282
054
196
142
141
147
135
194 221 011
021 196 207
071
167
273
134
096 097
070 170 224
023
006 028 061 071 201 214 226 180 185 022 029 077 284
076
140
034 134
148 272
026
076
002 034 109 215 229 230 027 037 234 259
149
057
099 098

Manufacturer

Codes

FISHER

047 214 180 182

FOSGATE

062 231

GE
GOLDSTAR
HAFLER
HARMAN KARDON
INKEL
JBL
JCPENNY
JEFF ROWLAND
JENSEN
JVC
KENWOOD
KINERGETICS
KOSS
KRELL
KYOCERA
LEXICON
LINN
LUXMAN
LXI
MAGNAVOX
MARANTZ
MCINTOSH
MCS
MERIDIAN
MITSUBISHI
MONDIAL
MYRYAD
NAD
NAKAMICHI
NEC

056 260
008
174
231 233 254 153 154 118 121 227 277
197
263
076 216
206
058
240 163 191 114 266 279
026 066 145 146 181 190 197 192 182 199 151 222 180
005 280
220 140
216
150 072
007
120 235 236 237
124
137 139 052 165 115 004 009
076 056
038 164 152 208
006 028 031 040 063 185 186 251 265
238
076
100 012 013
242 243 204
157 158 042 043 081 112
276
186 113 283
111 244 245 172 183
176

ONKYO

017 046 064 107 108 187 079 080 090 179 209 270 275

OPTIMUS

026 041 138

Appendix C

RV-8
AUDIO

DVD

Manufacturer

Codes

Manufacturer

Codes

PANASONIC
PARASOUND
PHAST
PHILIPS
PIONEER
PROCEED
RCA
REALISTIC
REVOX
ROTEL
SAMSUNG
SANSUI
SANYO
SCOTT
SEARS
SHARP
SHERWOOD
SONY
SOUNDESIGN
SOUNDSTREAM
SSI
SUMO
TAEKWANG
TEAC
TECHNICS
THETA DIGITAL
TOSHIBA
WARDS
YAMAHA
ZENITH

032 195 219 177
129 130 132 261
196
249 250 251 063
014 033 039 044 045 050 069 159 168 116 035 078 198
144 268
010 048 117 156 067
019 056 073 075 095
162
074 083 085
016
040 048 110 119 065 228
047 059
019 091
076
026 094 131 175 181
024 038 055 102 103 105 106 051 030
018 093 223 247 248 160 166 015 101 184 218 271
036
084 088
068
171
138
005 019 049 111 212 217
122 176 193 219 178 177 200 257 262
136
060 087 198 278
180
026 253 169 067 173 205 264 232 089 264 274 285
143 210

APEX DIGITAL

087

DENON 007

080

026 027

HARMAN KARDON

084

JVC

012

091 057 074

MAGNAVOX

066

MARANTZ

083

MITSUBISHI

017

NAD

088

ONKYO

076 035

PANASONIC

021 042

PHILIPS

066

PIONEER

023 092 107 108

PROCEED

086

PROSCAN

026 027

RCA

026 027

SAMSUNG

056 070

SHARP

094

SONY

033

THETA DIGITAL

032

THOMPSON

026 027

TOSHIBA

035 034

YAMAHA

042 089

ZENITH

057 074 091

C-19

Appendix C

Lexicon

SAT

Manufacturer

Codes

Manufacturer

Codes

ALPHASTAR

123

AMPLICA
BIRDVIEW
BSR
CAPETRONICS
CHANNEL MASTER
CHAPARRAL
CITOH
CURTIS MATHES
DRAKE
DX ANTENNA
ECHOSTAR
ELECTROHOME
EUROSAT
FUJITSU
GENERAL ELECTRIC
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
HITACHI
HOME CABLE
HOUSTON TRACKER
HUGHES
HYTEK
HYUNDAI
ICR
JANIEL
KATHREIN
LEGEND
LUTRON
LUXOR
MACOM
MEMOREX
NEXTWAVE
NORSAT
PACE

050
129 113 051 126
053
053
013 014 015 018 036 055
008 009 012 077
054
050
005 006 007 010 011 112 116 141 052
024 046 056 076
038 040 057 058 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 122
089
114
017 021 022 027 133 134
151 106 150
003 004 016 029 031 059 101 148
139 140
080 044 029
033 037 039 104 057 051
068 154
053
149
023
060 147
108
057
132
144 062
010 059 063 064 065
057
028 124 125
069 070
143

PHILIPS
PL
PRESIDENT
PRIMESTAR
PROSAT
PROSCAN
RCA
REALISTIC
SAMSUNG
SATELLITE SERVICE
SONY
STARCAST
SUPERGUIDE
TEECOM
TOSHIBA
TOWN & COUNTRY
UNIDEN

071 152 153
023 026
019 102
110 030
072
151 106 150
151 106 150
043 074
123
028 035 047 085
103
041
020 124 125
023 026 075 087 088 090 107 130 137
002 127
023 026
016 025 042 043 044 045 048 049 078 079 080 086 101
135 136
115
128 146
082 083 084 091 120

PANASONIC

142 060

PANSAT

121

PERSONAL CABLE

117

C-20

VIEWSTAR
WINEGARD
ZENITH 081

Appendix C

RV-8
VCR
Manufacturer

VCR
Codes

Manufacturer

Codes

034 161

MAGNAVOX

031 034 041 067 068 156 164

016 043 046 124 125 146

MARANTZ

012 031 067 069

AMPRO

072

MARTA

101

ANAM

031

MATSUI

027 030

AUDIO DYNAMICS

012 023 039 043

MEI

031

BROOKSONIC

035 037 129

MEMOREX

003 010 014 031 034 053 072 101 102 134 139

CANON

028 031

MGA

045 046 059

CAPEHART

108

MINOLTA

013 020

003 040 135

MITSUBISHI

013 020 045 046 051 059 061 142 151 049

CURTIS MATHES

031 041

MTC

034 040

DAEWOO

005 007 010 065 108 110 111 112 116 117 119

MULTITECH

024 034
012 023 039 043 048
043

AIWA
AKAI

CRAIG

108

NEC

DBX

012 023 039 043

NORDMENDE

DYNATECH

034 053

OPTONICA

053 054

ELECTROHOME

059

ORION

025

EMERSON’

006 017 025 027 029 031 034 035 036 037 046 101 129

PANASONIC

066 070 083 133 140 145 157 163 074

131 138 153 162 116

PENTAX

013 020 031 063

003 008 009 010

PHILCO

031 034 067

034

PHILIPS

031 034 054 067 071 101

031 063 072 107 109 144 147

PILOT

101

GO VIDEO

132 136 155 040 115

PIONEER

013 021 048

GOLDSTAR

012 013 020 101 106 114 123

PORTLAND

108

HARMAN KARDON

012 045

PULSAR

072

HITACHI

004 018 026 034 043 063 137 150 160 013

QUARTZ

002 014

INSTANTREPLAY

031

QUASAR

066 145 075

031

RADIO SHACK

123

012 013 015 040 066 101

RCA

013 020 041 107 109 140 144 145 147 034 040 158

JENSEN

043

REALISTIC

003 008 010 014 031 040 053 054 101

JVC

012 031 043 048 050 055 060 130 150 152

RICO

058

KENWOOD

014 048 034 047

RUNCO

148

LLOYD

034

SALORA

014

LXI

003 009 017 034 106

SAMSUNG

032 040 066 102 104 107 109 112 113 115 120 122 125

MAGIN

040

SANSUI

022 043 048 135

DAYTRON

FISHER
FUNAI

JCL
JCPENNY

C-21

Appendix C

Lexicon

VCR

Manufacturer

Codes

Manufacturer

SANYO
SCOTT

003 007 010 014 134 102
017 037 112 129 131

ADMIRAL

Codes
072 081 161 160

AKAL

197 146

SEARS

003 008 009 010 013 014 081 101 017 073 112

AMARK

112 143

SHARP

031 054 149 159 165

AMPRO

073 167 157 183

SHINTOM

024

AMSTRAD

052

SIGNATURE

034

ANAM

043 054 056 080 112 131

SONY

003 031 052 056 057 058 076 077 078 149 154

AOC

197 004 112 058

SOUNDESIGN

034

AUDIOVOX

076

STS

013

BLAUPUNKT

088

SYLVANIA

031 034 059 067

CAIRN

201

SYMPHONIC

034

CANDLE

197 002 003 004

TANDY

010 034

CAPEHART

058

TATUNG

039 043

CETRONIC

043

TEAC

034 039 043

CITIZEN

197 002 003 004 043 101 103 143

TECHNICS

031 070

CLASSIC

043

TEKNIKA

019 031 034 101

CONCERTO

004

THOMAS

034

CONTEC

043 050 051

TMK

006

CORONADO

143

TOSHIBA

008 013 042 047 059 079 082 112 131 081

CRAIG

043 054

TOTEVISION

040 101

CROWN

043 143

UNITECH

040

CURTIS MATHES

197 101 004 143

VECTOR RESEARCH

012

CXC

043

VICTOR

048

DAEWOO

004 016 043 044 076 103 114 125 127 143

VIDEO CONCEPTS

012 034 046 141

DAYTRON

004 143

VIDEOSONIC

040

DWIN

177

WARDS

003 013 017 024 031 034 040 053 054 131

DYNASTY

043

YAMAHA

012 034 039 043

DYNATECH

062

ZENITH

034 048 056 058 072 080 101

EIKI

187

ELECTROHOME

024 076 143 196

EMERSON

197 004 005 028 043 047 048 050 051 076 096 143 151
153 154 155

FISHER

C-22

007 057

Appendix C

RV-8
TV

Manufacturer

Codes

Manufacturer

Codes

FUJITSU
FUNAI

198
028 043

NEC

132 130 134 197 040 016 024 056 019

NIKEI

043

FUTURETECH

043

ONKING

043

197 008 009 034 056 073 074 130 144 155 160 161 165

ONWA

043

004 091 157 183

OPTONICA

019 081

004 102 106 112 113 116 119 127 143

ORION

096

HALL MARK

004

PANASONIC

034 056 080 092 164

HITACHI

004 009 010 011 012 023 075 143 158 163 166 072

PHILCO

197 003 024 056 059 060 063 064 164 004

INFINITY

164

PHILIPS

197 003 004 005 038 059 093 164 127

JBL

164

PIONEER

197 018 023 025 116 135 190 203 204

JCPENNY

197 004 008 009 024 030 065 101 143 156 160

PORTLAND

004 143

JENSEN

013

PROSCAN

144 160 161 165 167

JVC

034 038 070 083 145 199

PROTON

004 058 131 143 171 173 193

KEC

043

QUASAR

034 056 092

KENWOOD

197 070

RADIO SHACK

019 043 143 004 127

KLOSS

002 059

RCA

160 161 165 065 156 144 197 004 023 024 056 074 152

KMC

143

REALISTIC

007 019 043 047

KTV

197 043 143 154

ROCTEC

186

LODGENET

072

RUNCO

168 169 178 179 180 181 182 183 073 157

LOGIK

072

SAMPO

197 058 004 202

LUXMAN

004

SAMSUNG

004 050 089 101 105 127 143 160

LXI

166 007 015 052 081 160 164

SANYO

166 007 020 053 057 082 187

MAGNAVOX

197 003 004 022 059 060 061 063 064 127 160 164 094

SCOTT

004 028 043 048 143

MARANTZ

197 164

SEARS

015 030 004 007 028 057 143 094 160 082 165 166

MATSUI

164

SELECO

189 200

MEMOREX

007 072 004

SHARP

170 081 019 028 029 014 004 022 143 175

METZ

088

SIEMENS

088

MGA

197 004 024 028 042

SIGNATURE

072

MINERVA

088

SONY

070 085 139 147 126 185 194

MITSUBISHI

004 024 028 040 042 109 124 146 191

SOUNDESIGN

004 028 003 043

MTC

197 004 062 101

SPECTRICON

112

NAD

015 025

SSS

004 043

GOLDSTAR

C-23

Appendix C

Lexicon

TV
Manufacturer

CD
Codes

Manufacturer

Codes

SUPRE MACY

002

ADCOM

062 042

SYLVANIA

197 003 059 060 063 064 164 044 160 127

AIWA

059 065 088 089 105 122 170 187

TANDY

081

AKAI

085 195 202

TATUNG

056 062

AMC

231 232

TECHNICS

034 080

AMEND

118

TECHWOOD

004

ARCAM

238

TEKNIKA

002 003 004 024 028 043 072 101 143

AUDIO ACCESS

119 147

TELEFUNKEN

037 046 086 087

AUDIO EASE

165

TELERENT

072

AUDIO TECHNICA

046

TERA

172

BSR

037 057

TMK

004

CALIFORNIA AUDIO

103 008

TOSHIBA

007 015 030 040 062 101 138

CAPETRONIC

063

TOTEVISION

143

CARRERA

057 080

UNIVERSAL

008 009

CARVER

VIDEO CONCEPTS

146

185 041 044 050 086 107 130 134 135 138 139 203 204
167

VIDIKRON

174 184 188 192

CASIO

VIDTECH

004

CLARINETTE

182

WARDS

004 008 009 019 028 060 061 063 064 072 074 143 164

CREEK

159

034

CROWN

035

WESTING HOUSE

076

DENON

002 123

YAMAHA

197 004

EMERSON

042 069 102

YORK

004

FISHER

050 185 134 008

YUPITERU

043

FRABA

111

ZENITH

072 073 095 103 157 183

GENEXXA

010 069 102

ZONDA

112

GOLDSTAR

080

C-24

111 182

HAITAI

093

HARMAN KARDON

018 033 047 208

HITACHI

042 175

INKEL

130 143 144

JC PENNEY

014 061 092 141

JENSEN

158

JVC

004 022 136 163 213 214 242 243

Appendix C

RV-8
CD

Manufacturer

Codes

Manufacturer

KENWOOD

185 007 023 055 071 072 142 137

RADIO SHACK

Codes
182

KOSS
KRELL

061
241

RCA

017 042 150

REALISTIC

042 050 051 102 181 182 187

KYOCERA

005

LOTTE

044 107 161 178 250
044 107

102

ROTEL
SAE

LUXMAN

011 028 070 076

SANSUI

044 069 107 128 171 190 125

LXI

059

SANYO

050

MAGNAVOX

044 107

SCOTT

069 102

MARANTZ

027 041 044 051 077 107 209

SHARP

026 031 051 066

MCINTOSH

212

SHERWOOD

003 019 051 096 112 115 119 166

MCS

014 073 092

SIGNATURE

033

MEMOREX

010

SONY

048 081 097 126 133 177 225 226 164

MISSION

044 107

SOUNDESIGN

251

MITSUBISHI

179

SUMO

155

MITSUMI

153

SYLVANIA

044 107

MODULAIRE

182

SYMPHONIC

052 181

MONDIAL

147

TAEKWANG

195 085

MYRYAD

244

TANDY

010

NAD

006 005 067 178

TEAC

015 034 036 051 052 101 131 140 079

KAKAMICHI

217 218 219 095

TECHNICS

060 103 200 172 184 008 068

NEC

014 062

TECHWOOD

076

NIKKO

046

THETA DIGITAL

234 235

NSM

044 107

TOSHIBA

006 067 091 160 148

ONKYO

030 038 039 168 169

VECTOR RESEARCH

080

OPTIMUS

010 050 057 058 081 082 083 085 093 195

VICTOR

004 022 114 124

PANASONIC

103 201 172 008 068

WARDS

185 033

PARASOUND

233

YAMAHA

024 046 054 186 183 245

PHILIPS

041 044

YORX

182

PIONEER

010 020 025 056 174 175 176

PROCEED

239

PROTON

044 107 228

QUASAR

103 008

C-25

Appendix C

Lexicon
PHONO

LD
Manufacturer

Codes

Manufacturer

Codes

DENON

206 207

FUNAI

120

KENWOOD

152 013

3M
AIWA
ARCHER
AUTON
DMX
DRAPER SCREEN
DWIN
EVERQUEST
EXTRON
FAROUDJA
FUJI
JERROLD
JVC
KENWOOD
LITE-TOUCH
LUTRON
MAKITA
MINDPATH
NILES
NSM
PIANO DISC PLUS
PHILIPS
POLK AUDIO
REPLAY
RUSSOUND
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA
SIMA
SOLO ELECTRONICS
SOMFY
SONY
STARCOM
TURBOSCAN
VELODYNE
X-10
XANTECH

152
164
155
191
156
204
080
206
151
184
209
153
185
185
208
077 158 159
186 201
205
160 187
161
085
090
162
075
081
156 163
082
207
078 079
104 164 165 166
153
167
203
093 183
168 169 170 171 172 188 189

MAGNAVOX

032 121

MARANTZ

211

MITSUBISHI

121

NAD

121

OPTIMUS

049 013

PANASONIC

113

PHILIPS

032

PIONEER

106 117 121

RADIO SHACK

120

RCA

002

REALISTIC

049

RUNCO

127

SANYO

075

SHARP

152 013

SONY

053 110

TECHNICS

113

THETA DIGITAL

032

TOSHIBA

152 106

YAMAHA

043 129

Note:
The LD codes are stored in DVD.

C-26

Appendix C

RV-8
CABLE
Manufacturer

CABLE
Codes

Manufacturer

Codes

ABC

103 003 004 039 042 046 053

OAK

031 037 053

AMERICAST

099

PANASONIC

044 047

ANTRONIX

014

PARAGON

052

ARCHER

005 007 014

PHILIPS

006 012 013 020 085 095

BELL SOUTH

099

PIONEER

103 034 051 063 076 105

CENTURION

092

PRUCER

059

CENTURY

007

RCA

047

CITIZEN

007

RECOTON

098

COMBANO

080 081

REGAL

049 050

COMSAT

074

REGENCY

057

COMTRONICS

030

SAMSUNG

030

DIGICABLE

101

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA

003 011 041 042 043 045 046

EAGLE

020 030 040

SIGNAL

030

EASTERN

057 066

SIGNATURE

103

ECHOSTAR

106

SL MARX

030

ELECTRICORD

032

SONY

096

GEMINI

008 054

SPRUCER

047 078

GENERAL ELECTRIC

072

STARCOM

002 004 008 009

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

103 074 104

STARGATE

008 030 097 104

GNC

099

TADIRAN

030

GOLDEN CHANNEL

030

TIME WARNER

043

HAMLIN

049 050 055

TOCOM

039 040 056

HITACHI

103 055

TOSHIBA

052

JERROLD

103 002 003 004 008 009 010 069 074

UNIKA

007 014

MAGNAVOX

010 012 064 079 095 094

UNITED CABLE

004 053

MEDIA ONE

107

UNIVERSAL

005 007 014 032 035

MEMOREX

052

VIEWSTAR

012 015 018 086 087 088 089

MITSUBISHI

102

ZENITH

052 060 093 100

M-NET

037

MOVIE TIME

028 032

NOVAPLEX

092

NSC

015 028 038 071

C-27

Appendix C

Lexicon

TAPE
Manufacturer

Codes

AIWA
CARVER
DENON
FISHER
GOLDSTAR
HARMAN KARDON
JVC
KENWOOD
LINN
LUXMAN
MAGNAVOX
MARANTZ
MCINTOSH
MITSUBISHI
NAD
NAKAMICHI
ONKYO
OPTIMUS
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PIONEER
QUASAR
SANSUI
SHARP
SHERWOOD
SONY
TEAC
TECHNICS
TOSHIBA
VICTOR
YAMAHA

015 071 100 114
006 008 027 024 036
105 227 229
064
011
233
106 116 239 240
005 013 023 026 064 145 146 181 190
124
035 137 139
027
014 027 056 065 087
238
242 243
029 048
244 245 025
002 012 016 017 018 019 115
026 054 055
007 010 032 088 195
027 087
003 039 047 050 066 098 222
007 088
027 113 119 224
026 057 131 175 181
038 004 028 030 033 034
020 022 052 084 089
009 059 212
007 010 076 088 109 122 199
112
106
021 026 031 067 040

C-28

D
Appendix
Installation Worksheet ................................................................ D-2

Appendix D

Lexicon

INSTALLATION WORKSHEET
INPUT SETUP
NAME
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
D
5.1a
MIC

MAIN ADVANCED
INPUT SELECT
ANLG BYP
S-VIDEO 16:9
S-VIDEO 4:3 OSD
COMPONENT OSD
LEGACY VIDEO
ZONE2 IN
ZONE2 ADVANCED
ANLG IN LVL
DIGITAL BYPASS
DIG OUT RATE
RECORD

D-2

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TUNER

PHONO

Appendix D

RV-8

SPEAKER SETUP

CUSTOM SETUP

THX SETUP

FRONT LEFT/RIGHT

THX 80Hz

CENTER

THX 80Hz

SIDE LEFT/RIGHT

THX 80Hz

SPEAKER DISTANCES

LEVELS CALIBRATION

REAR LEFT/RIGHT
SUBWOOFER

THX 80Hz

ULTRA2SUB
BGC
ASA
UNITS
BASS PEAK LIMITERS
CAL NOISE
SUB LIMITER
LIMIT ADJ
I/O CONFIG
Analog Inputs
Amplifier Outputs

SETTINGS
8 STEREO INPUTS

5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG

MAIN 7.1

MAIN 5.1 & ZONE2 2.0

2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG
MAIN 5.1 & ZONE3 2.0

D-3

Appendix D
INSTALLATION WORKSHEET

Lexicon
(continued)

DISPLAY SETUP

TRIGGER SETUP

TUNER SETUP

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

Circle all parameters set to ON.

REGION

MONO
5.1
FILM
5.1
TV
5.1
MUSIC

SCAN SENS

MUSIC
5.1 PLIIx MOV
5.1 PLIIx MUS
DIGITAL EX
5.1 2-CHANNEL
5.1 MONO LOGIC
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO
FILM
MUSIC

MODES

STATUS
POSITION
FORMAT
BACKGROUND
FRONT-PANEL DISPLAY
STATUS
BRIGHTNESS
A/V SYNC DELAY
CUSTOM NAME
EDIT CUSTOM NAME

VOLUME CONTROL SETUP
MAIN PWR ON
MUTE LEVEL
ZONE 2 PWR ON
ZONE 3 PWR ON
HEADPHONE
MAX VOLUME

D-4

MUSIC

LOCK OPTIONS
AUDIO CNTRL
SETUP

AUDIO CONTROLS
BASS
TREBLE
TILT EQ
LOUDNESS

2-CHAN
5.1a
FILM
5.1a
MUSIC
5.1a
SurEX
5.1a
MUSIC
5.1a STANDARD
5.1a 2-CHANNEL
5.1a BYPASS
2CH BYPASS
HEADPHONE
HEADPHONE 5.1
HEADPHONE
HEADPHONE 5.1a
LIVE! SMALL
LIVE! MED
LIVE! LARGE

BALANCE
FADER
ZONE2 BALANCE
ZONE3 BALANCE

Appendix D

RV-8

3-DIGIT PREPROGRAMMED CODES WORKSHEET
COMPONENT

MANUFACTURER

CODE(S) USED

DVD1
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
PHONO

D-5

Appendix D

Lexicon

PREPROGRAMMED LCD TEXT FOR OTHER DEVICES
DVD1
PROG
DISPL
CLEAR
REPEA
A-B

DVD2
MENU
SETUP
MEMO
TITLE
SHUFF

PAGE 1

SYSTEM-OFF
POWER
VOL UP
VOL DN
CH UP
CH DN
MUTE
PRE-CH
UP
DOWN
LEFT
RIGHT
SELECT
PLAY
STOP
REW
FF
, MENU
, GUIDE
O, EXIT
II, INFO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
DISPLAY
ENTER

D-6

RANDO
RETUR
AUDIO
TIME
SOUND

SAT
ANGLE
S-ON
S-CHA
SLOW+
SLOW-

PAGE 2

OFF
ON/OFF

SKIP+
SKIPSEARCH
UP
DN
LEFT

EJECT
PAUSE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
DISPLAY
ENTER

FAUCH
ALPHA
NEXT
VIEW
ALT

SAT
ACTIO
REC
SERVI
BACK
HOP

PAGE 1

SYSTEM-OFF
POWER
VOL UP
VOL DN
CH UP
CH DN
MUTE
PRE-CH
UP
DOWN
LEFT
RIGHT
SELECT
PLAY
STOP
REW
FF
, MENU
, GUIDE
O, EXIT
II, INFO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
DISPLAY
ENTER

FETCH
A
B
C
D

VCR
HELP
E
F
G
H

PAGE 2

OFF
ON/OFF
VOL UP
VOL DN
SKIP+
SKIPMUTE
SEARCH
UP
DN
LEFT
RIGHT
SELECT

MENU
GUIDE
EXIT
INFO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
DISPLAY
ENTER

V/T
DISP
VCR-P
F. ADV
XPLA

VCR
INPUT
SLOW
SLOW+
SLOWEJECT

PAGE 1

SYSTEM-OFF
POWER
VOL UP
VOL DN
CH UP
CH DN
MUTE
PRE-CH
UP
DOWN
LEFT
RIGHT
SELECT
PLAY
STOP
REW
FF
, MENU
, GUIDE
O, EXIT
II, INFO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
DISPLAY
ENTER

PROG
T-SPE
COUNT A-TRK
RESET
A-CH
CLEAR
ADD
T-REC DELET
PAGE 2

OFF
ON/OFF
VOL UP
VOL DN
SKIP+
SKIPMUTE
SEARCH
UP
DN
LEFT
RIGHT
SELECT
PLAY
STOP
REW
FF

RECORD
PAUSE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
DISPLAY
ENTER

Appendix D

RV-8

T/V
SLEEP
CC
CC-SN
RESET

INPUT
A-CH
ADD
DELET
ANT

PAGE 1

SYSTEM-OFF
POWER
VOL UP
VOL DN
CH UP
CH DN
MUTE
PRE-CH
UP
DOWN
LEFT
RIGHT
SELECT
PLAY
STOP
REW
FF
, MENU
, GUIDE
O, EXIT
II, INFO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
DISPLAY
ENTER

P-ON
P-OFF
SWAP
STILL
SOURC LOCAT
POSI
FREEZ

PROG
INTRO
DISPL
TIME
CLEAR FADER
REPEA
EDIT
A-B

PAGE 2

PAGE 1

OFF
ON/OFF
VOL UP
VOL DN
SKIP+
SKIPMUTE
PRE CH
UP
DN
LEFT
RIGHT
SELECT

MENU
GUIDE
EXIT
INFO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
DISPLAY
ENTER

SYSTEM-OFF
POWER
VOL UP
VOL DN
CH UP
CH DN
MUTE
PRE-CH
UP
DOWN
LEFT
RIGHT
SELECT
PLAY
STOP
REW
FF
, MENU
, GUIDE
O, EXIT
II, INFO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
DISPLAY
ENTER

PHONO

DISK 1
DISK 2
DISK 3
DISK 4
DISK 5

DISK 6

PAGE 2

OFF
ON/OFF

TRACK+
TRACKRANDOM

SKIPSKIP+
PLAY
STOP
REW
FF

EJECT
PAUSE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
DISPLAY
DISC

A
B
C
D
E

PHONO
F
G
H
I
J

PAGE 1

SYSTEM-OFF
POWER
VOL UP
VOL DN
CH UP
CH DN
MUTE
PRE-CH
UP
DOWN
LEFT
RIGHT
SELECT
PLAY
STOP
REW
FF
, MENU
, GUIDE
O, EXIT
II, INFO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
DISPLAY
ENTER

A
B
C
D
E

F
G
H
I
J
PAGE 2

OFF
ON/OFF
VOL UP
VOL DN
CH UP
CH DN
MUTE
PRE CH
UP
DN
LEFT
RIGHT
SELECT
PLAY
STOP
REW
FF

RECORD
PAUSE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
DISPLAY
ENTER

D-7

Index
Numerics
2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG option, 3-61
2.0 ENCODING parameter, 2-34
2CH BYPASS listening mode, 6-34
2CH BYPASS STATUS menu, 2-32
2-CH MODE menu, 3-15
2-CH Parameter, D-2
2-CH parameter, 3-12
2CH STATUS menu, 2-30
2-CH SURROUND listening mode, 6-15
2-CHANNEL listening mode, 6-15
5, 6-26
5 SPKR ENHANCE parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-16, 6-17, 626, 6-29, 6-30, 6-39
5 ST. & 5.1 ANLG option, 3-61
5.1 2-CHANNEL listening mode, 6-23
5.1 ANALOG STATUS menu, 2-33
5.1 L7 FILM listening mode, 6-16
5.1 L7 MUSIC listening mode, 6-17
5.1 L7 TV listening mode, 6-17
5.1 MAIN & ZONE2 2.0 parameter, 3-62
5.1 MONO listening mode, 6-24
5.1 MONO LOGIC listening mode, 6-23
5.1 MONO SURR listening mode, 6-24
5.1 PLIIx MOV listening mode, 6-20
5.1 PLIIx MUS listening mode, 6-21
5.1a 2-CHANNEL listening mode, 6-33
5.1a BYPASS listening mode, 6-33
5.1a BYPASS STATUS menu, 2-31
5.1a L7 FILM listening mode, 6-29
5.1a L7 MUSIC listening mode, 6-30
5.1a MODE menu, 3-16
5.1a parameter, 3-12
5.1a STANDARD listening mode, 6-32
5.1a THX listening mode, 6-30
5.1a THX MUSIC listening mode, 6-32
5.1a THX SurEX listening mode, 6-30

5.1a THX UL2Cin listening mode, 6-30
5.1-channel connectors, 2-7
8 STEREO INPUTS option, 3-60

A
A/V SYNC DELAY parameter, 3-63, 3-67, D-4
about the RV-8, 1-2
AC input connector, 2-9
ACADEMY FILTER parameter, 6-15, 6-23, 6-39
adjusting the LCD contrast, C-16
advanced speaker array, 3-35
amplifier channel status, 2-13
amplifier output connectors, 2-13
amplifier outputs, 2-7
amplifier overview, 2-13
analog audio input connectors, 2-7
ANALOG BYPASS parameter, 3-18
ANALOG IN parameter, 3-7, 3-8, D-2
anamorphic trigger signals, 3-18
ANLG IN LVL parameter, 3-7, 3-9, 3-23
ANLOG BYPASS parameter, 3-17
arrow buttons, 2-15
ASA parameter, 3-29, 3-35
assigning input connectors, 3-7
audio controls
BALANCE parameter, 4-6
BASS parameter, 4-2
CLEAR PRESET parameter, 5-3
FADER parameter, 4-6
LISTEN TO PRESET parameter, 5-3
LOUDNESS parameter, 4-4
NAME parameter, 5-3
TILT EQ parameter, 4-4
TREBLE parameter, 4-2
ZONE2 BALANCE parameter, 4-6
AUDIO CONTROLS menu, 4-2, D-4
audio output connectors, 2-8, 2-9

AUTO, 6-4
AUTO AZIMUTH parameter, 6-4, 6-39
AUTO FREQUENCY parameter, 3-78
AUTO GAIN parameter, 3-9, 3-10
AUTO parameter, 3-9, 3-10
AUTO SPEAKER SETUP screens, 3-48
Autoload, 2-12
AUTOLOAD parameter, 3-74
Automatic Calibration, 3-36
Automatic calibration using microphones, 3-37

B
BACKGROUND parameter, 3-20, D-4
BALANCE parameter, 4-2, D-4
BASS CONTENT parameter, 6-13, 6-39
BASS ENHANCE parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-16, 6-17, 626, 6-29, 6-30, 6-39
BASS parameter, 4-2, D-4
frequency response graph, 4-3
BASS PEAK LIMITERS, 3-53
BASS PEAK LIMITERS menu, 3-58, D-3
BASS RT parameter, 6-12, 6-39
BASS XOVER parameter, 6-39
battery installation, 1-6
battery life, C-16
BGC parameter, 3-29, 3-35
BIT RATE parameter, 2-34
boundary gain compensation, 3-35
BRIGHTNESS parameter, D-4

C
CAL NOISE parameter, 3-58, D-3
Calibration
automatic, 3-36
manual, 3-53
CALIBRATION parameter, 6-13, 6-39

Index
CATHEDRAL listening mode, 6-12
CENTER DEPTH parameter, 6-11, 6-12, 6-40
CENTER MIX LVL parameter, 2-34
CENTER MIX parameter, 6-23, 6-29, 6-33, 6-40
Center output connector, 2-7
CENTER parameter, 3-29, 3-31, 6-37, 6-40
changing input names, 3-5
CHANNELS parameter, 2-34
checking microphones, 3-41
CHURCH listening mode, 6-12
CLEAR ALL parameter, 3-75
CNTR DLY SAMPLES parameter, 6-23, 6-29, 6-33, 6-40
COMPONENT IN parameter, 3-7, 3-11
COMPONENT OSD parameter, 3-17, 3-20, 3-21, D-2
component video input connectors, 2-7
Composite video connectors, 2-8
COMPRESSION parameter, 6-16, 6-17, 6-19, 6-20, 6-21,
6-22, 6-23, 6-40
CONCERT HALL listening mode, 6-11
CROSSOVER SETUP menu, 3-26
CTR WIDTH parameter, 6-8, 6-40
CUSTOM menu, 6-37, 6-40
CUSTOM NAME parameter, 3-63, 3-67
CUSTOM parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-6, 6-7, 6-8, 6-9, 6-10,
6-11, 6-12, 6-13, 6-15, 6-16, 6-17, 6-19, 6-20, 6-21,
6-22, 6-23, 6-24, 6-40
CUSTOM SETUP Menu, 3-29
CUSTOM SETUP menu, 3-26, D-3
custom speaker setups, 3-26
CUSTOM vs PRESET listening modes, 6-37, 6-40

D
Declaration of Conformity, A-4
DIALOG OFFSET parameter, 2-34
DIG OUT RATE parameter, 3-23, 3-24
digital audio input connectors, 2-8
digital audio output connectors, 2-9
DIGITAL BYPASS parameter, 3-23, 3-24
DIGITAL IN parameter, 3-7
DIGITAL STATUS menu, 2-32
DIMENSION parameter, 6-8, 6-40
direct station access, 2-10

I-2

Lexicon
DISPLAY parameter, 3-76
DISPLAY SETUP menu, 3-2, 3-63
DISTANCES & LEVELS option, 3-36, 3-48
DISTANCES option, 3-36, 3-48
documentation conventions, 1-ii
DOLBY DIGITAL EX listening mode, 6-22
DOLBY DIGITAL listening mode, 6-22
DOLBY DIGITAL MODE menu, 3-15
Dolby DIGITAL parameter, 3-12
DOLBY PL + THX listening mode, 6-9
DOLBY PLII MOV listening mode, 6-7
DOLBY PLII MOVIE listening mode, 6-7
DOLBY PLII MUSIC listening mode, 6-8
DOLBY PLIIx MOV listening mode, 6-20
DOLBY PLIIx MUS listening mode, 6-8
DOLBY PRO LOGIC listening mode, 6-9, 6-9
DOLBY STATUS menu, 2-30
DTS 2-CHAN listening mode, 6-29
DTS L7 FILM listening mode, 6-26
DTS listening mode, 6-28
DTS Neo
6 + THX listening mode, 6-10
6 CIN listening mode, 6-10
6 MUSIC listening mode, 6-10
DTS STATUS menu, 2-31
DTS THX MUSIC listening mode, 6-28
DTS THX UL2 Cin listening mode, 6-27
DTS-ES 2-CHAN listening mode, 6-29
DTS-ES DECODING parameter, 6-25
DTS-ES DISCR listening mode, 6-28
DTS-ES L7 FILM listening mode, 6-26
DTS-ES L7 MUSIC listening mode, 6-26
DTS-ES listening mode, 6-28
DTS-ES MODE menu, 3-16
DTS-ES parameter, 3-12
DTS-ES STATUS menu, 2-31
DTS-ES THX listening mode, 6-27
Dynamic listening modes, 3-13, 6-3

E
EARLY RFLX LVL parameter, 6-41
EDIT CUSTOM NAME parameter, 3-63, 3-67, D-4

EDIT INPUT NAME menu, 3-5
editing presets, 2-12
EFFECT LVL parameter, 6-11, 6-12, 6-13, 6-15, 6-23, 641
ES DECODING parameter, 6-25, 6-27, 6-28, 6-29, 6-40,
6-42, 6-44, 6-46
ES ENCODING parameter, 2-34
EX DECODING parameter, 6-20, 6-21, 6-22, 6-41
EX ENCODING parameter, 2-34
EXTERNAL NOISE TEST, 3-53, 3-57

F
factory-default settings, restoring, 7-4
FADER parameter, 4-2, D-4
FORMAT DETECT parameter, 3-21
FORMAT parameter, D-4
FREQUENCY option, 3-76
Front L/R output connector, 2-7, 2-7
FRONT L/R parameter, 3-29, 3-31
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu, 3-66
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY parameter, 3-63
FRONT STEERING parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-17, 6-42
front-panel
BRIGHTNESS parameter, 3-66
display, 2-3
overview, 2-2, 2-4
RV-8, 2-2
STATUS parameter, 3-66

H
HEADPHONE 5.1 listening mode, 6-34
HEADPHONE 5.1a listening mode, 6-35
HEADPHONE DTS listening mode, 6-35
HEADPHONE L7 listening mode, 6-34
headphone output, 2-5
headphone overview, 2-14
HEADPHONE parameter, 3-69
highlights, RV-8, 1-4
high-pass filter, 3-28, 3-28
horizontal bar graphs, 2-16

Index

RV-8
I
I/O CONFIG SETUP menu, 3-2
INPUT BALANCE parameter, 6-13, 6-42
input connectors, 2-7
microphone, 2-8
INPUT NAME menu, 3-5
INPUT parameter, 2-35
INPUT SELECT parameter, 3-17, 3-19, D-2
input selection buttons, 2-4
remote control, 2-18
INPUT SETUP menu, 3-2, 3-4, D-2
INPUT TYPE parameter, 2-35
INPUTS
Advanced, 3-17
changing names, 3-5
Main Zone, 2-28, 3-2
installation considerations, 1-5
INTERNAL NOISE TEST, 3-53, 3-56
IR IN connector, 2-9
IR receiver, 2-3

preferred, 6-3
selection buttons, 6-3
listening modes, preferred, 3-12, 3-14
LIVE! CALIBRATION
menu, 3-3
parameter, 3-80
performing, 3-83
LIVE! listening mode, 6-35
LIVE! STATUS menu, 2-33
LIVENESS parameter, 6-11, 6-42
loading presets, 2-11
LOCK OPTIONS, 3-79
AUDIO CNTRL parameter, 3-79
menu, 3-3
MODES parameter, 3-79
SETUP parameter, 3-79
LOUDNESS parameter, 4-2
frequency response graph, 4-5
LOW FREQ WIDTH parameter, 6-13, 6-42
low-pass filter, 3-28, 3-28

L7 FILM listening mode, 3-13, 6-4
L7 MUSIC listening mode, 6-5
L7 MUSIC SURR listening mode, 6-5
L7 TV listening mode, 6-4
LEDs, IR receiver, 2-3
LEGACY VIDEO parameter, 3-21
level meters, 3-10
LEVELS CALIBRATION menu, 3-55
LEVELS CALIBRATIONS menu, D-3
LEVELS option, 3-36, 3-48
LFE MIX parameter, 6-16, 6-17, 6-19, 6-20, 6-21, 6-22,
6-23, 6-26, 6-27, 6-28, 6-29, 6-29, 6-30, 6-31, 6-32,
6-33, 6-42
LIMIT ADJ parameter, 3-59
LIMITER parameter, 3-58, 3-59
LISTENER POS parameter, 6-42
listening mode
activating, 6-2
descriptions, 6-4
parameter descriptions, 6-39

MAIN 5.1 & ZONE3 2.0 parameter, 3-62
MAIN 7.1 parameter, 3-62
MAIN ADVANCED option, 3-17
MAIN menu, 2-15
MAIN PWR ON parameter, 3-68
Main Zone Off button, 2-5
Main Zone selection buttons, 2-4
maintenance, 7-4
manual analog audio adjustments, 3-10
manual calibration, 3-53
MANUAL parameter, 3-9, 3-10
manual speaker distance calibration, 3-54
MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu, 3-53
MASTER LEVEL parameter, 6-23, 6-29, 6-33, 6-43
MAX VOLUME parameter, 3-69
menu arrow buttons, 2-15
menu item selection, 2-15
menu navigation, 2-15
menu options, 2-16
Menu tree, B-2

MIC MODE menu, 3-16
MIC parameter, 3-12
MICROPHONE CHECK option, 3-36
microphone input connectors, 2-8
microphones
automatic calibration, 3-42, 3-48
checking, 3-40
connecting, 3-37, 3-80
improper positioning, 3-39, 3-46, 3-47, 3-82
placement, 3-42
proper positioning, 3-38, 3-43, 3-44, 3-45, 3-81
MID RT parameter, 6-12, 6-43
MIX ROOM parameter, 2-35
MODE ADJUST menu, 6-2
mode buttons, 2-4
MODE parameter, 2-35
MONO listening mode, 6-16
MONO LOGIC listening mode, 6-15
MONO SURROUND listening mode, 6-16
Mute button, 2-5
MUTE LEVEL parameter, 3-68

N
NAME parameter, 3-5
naming presets, 2-11
NIGHTCLUB listening mode, 6-11

O
Off buttons, 2-5, 2-5
on-screen display
BACKGROUND parameter, 3-65
FORMAT parameter, 3-65
POSITION parameter, 3-65
STATUS parameter, 3-64
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu, 3-64, D-4
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY parameter, 3-63
output connectors
audio, 2-8, 2-9
trigger, 2-8
video, 2-7
OUTPUT LEVELS menu, 6-37
OUTPUT LEVELS parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-6, 6-7, 6-8, 6-9,

I-3

Index
6-10, 6-11, 6-12, 6-13, 6-15, 6-16, 6-17, 6-19, 6-20,
6-21, 6-22, 6-23, 6-26, 6-27, 6-28, 6-29, 6-30, 6-31,
6-32, 6-33, 6-43
Output levels, calibrating
automatic, 3-36
Bass Peak Limiters, 3-58
manual, 3-55

P
PANORAMA listening mode, 6-13
PANORAMA parameter, 6-8, 6-43
parameter drop-down menus, 2-16
parameter relationships, 6-47
parameters
listening mode menu, 6-39
STATUS menu, 2-34
parameters, preferred listening mode selection, 3-12
phono input connectors, 2-8
POWER MANAGEMENT menu, 3-3
power switch, 2-9
PRE-DELAY parameter, 6-11, 6-12, 6-43
preferred listening mode selection, 3-14
Preferred listening modes, 3-12
PRESET NAME option, 3-76
product registration, 1-5
program operation parameters, 3-71
programming macro buttons, C-10
cloning the remote control, C-15
editing text on buttons, C-13
erasing favorite channel, C-13
erasing learned buttons, C-14
erasing macro functions, C-12, C-13
erasing punch through functions, C-13
programming backlight, C-15
punch through functions, C-12
recalling preprogrammed numbers, C-14
sample sequence, C-11

R
RADIO TEXT parameter, 3-77
RDS NAME option, 3-76
REAR DLY OFFSET parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-13, 6-16, 6-17,

I-4

Lexicon
6-26, 6-29, 6-30, 6-43
Rear L/R output connector, 2-7
REAR L/R parameter, 3-29, 3-32, 6-37, 6-44
rear-panel
overview, 2-6
RV-8, 2-6
recalling zone audio codes, C-16
RECORD parameter, 3-23, 3-24
RE-EQUALIZER parameter, 6-4, 6-6, 6-9, 6-10, 6-16, 617, 6-19, 6-26, 6-27, 6-29, 6-30, 6-31, 6-43
REGION parameter, 3-72
remote control
battery installation, 1-6
buttons, 2-17
command matrix, 2-18, 2-18
operation considerations, 2-14
remote control buttons, 2-17
remote control overview, 2-14
remote control programming, C-2
auto scan with three-digit number, C-6
device activation, C-2
macro operations, C-3
overview, C-4
programming device buttons, C-8
programming favorite channels, C-9
programming function buttons, C-8
using learning method, C-7
using programmed codes, C-5
REMOTE ONLY parameter, 3-70
reprogramming zone audio codes, C-17
RESET MODE parameter, 6-38, 6-44
RESTORE DEFAULT NAME menu, 3-6
restoring factory-default settings, 7-4
REVERB LVL parameter, 6-40, 6-42, 6-44, 6-44, 6-46
ROLLOFF parameter, 6-11, 6-12, 6-44
routine maintenance, 7-4
RS-232 connectors, 2-9
RV-8
about, 1-2
highlights, 1-4
product registration, 1-5

S
safety instructions, 1-ii
SAMPLE RATE parameter, 2-35
saving presets, 2-11
Scan Mode, 2-11
SCAN SENS parameter, 3-73
SCROLL RATE parameter, 3-77
selecting a station, 2-10
SET CROSSOVERS option, 3-25
SET DISTANCES menu, 3-51
SET LEVELS menu, 3-51
SETTING DISTANCES menu, 3-49
SETTING LEVELS menu, 3-49
SETUP menu, 2-16, 3-2
SHAPE parameter, 6-44
SIDE L/R parameter, 3-29, 3-32, 6-37, 6-44
SIZE parameter, 6-11, 6-12, 6-44
SOUND STAGE parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-16, 6-17, 6-44
SOURCE parameter, 6-46
SPEAKER ANGLE parameter, 6-45
SPEAKER DISTANCES, 3-53
SPEAKER DISTANCES menu, 3-54
SPEAKER SETUP menu, 3-2, 3-25
speaker setup parameters, 3-29
SPEECH DETECT parameter, 6-11, 6-12, 6-45
SPREAD parameter, 6-45
Standby button, 2-4
STATUS menu
level meters, 2-35
parameters, 2-34
STATUS menus, 2-29
SUB & SUB LVL parameter, 6-45
SUB L/R LVL parameter, 6-33
SUB LEVEL parameter, 6-15, 6-16, 6-23, 6-24, 6-29
SUB parameter, 6-37
SUBWOOFER parameter, 3-29, 3-33
SURR MIX LVL parameter, 2-35
SURR ROLLOFF parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-13, 6-15, 6-16, 617, 6-23
SURROUND DLY parameter, 6-8, 6-45
SURROUND EX parameter, 6-19, 6-31, 6-45
SURROUND MIX parameter, 6-23, 6-29, 6-33, 6-46
S-VIDEO 16

Index

RV-8
9 parameter, 3-17, 3-18
S-VIDEO OSD 4
3 parameter, 3-17, 3-20
S-Video output connectors, 2-8

T
three-digit preprogrammed codes, C-18
THX listening mode, 6-18
THX MUSIC listening mode, 6-19
THX SETUP Menu, 3-29
THX SPEAKER SETUP screen, 3-28, 3-28
THX SurEX listening mode, 6-18
THX UL2Cin listening mode, 6-18
THX ULTRA2 SUB parameter, 3-29, 3-34
TILT EQ parameter, 4-2
frequency response graph, 4-5
TREB CUT RT parameter, 6-46
TREBLE parameter, 4-2
frequency response graph, 4-3
trigger output connectors, 2-8
TRIGGER SETUP, 3-70
TRIGGER SETUP menu, 3-2
troubleshooting, 7-2
Troubleshooting automatic calibration, 3-52
Tune/Seek access, 2-10
TUNE/SEEK Buttons, 2-5, 2-5
tuner antenna connectors, 2-8
tuner overview, 2-10
TUNER PRESETS menu, 5-2
TUNER PRESETS parameter, 3-75
Tuner Regions, 3-73
TUNER SETUP menu, 3-3
TUNER SETUP option, 3-72
Tuner status, 2-29
Two-line Status, 2-28, 2-29

V
VIDEO IN parameter, 3-11
video input connectors, 2-7
video output connectors, 2-7
VOCAL ENHANCE parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-16, 6-17, 6-26,
6-29, 6-30, 6-46
VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu, 3-2, 3-68
volume knob, 2-3

W
WORD LENGTH parameter, 2-35

Z
Z2 PWR ON parameter, 3-68
Z3 PWR ON parameter, 3-69
Zone 2 Off button, 2-5
Zone 2 selection buttons, 2-4
Zone 3 Off button, 2-5
Zone 3 selection buttons, 2-4
ZONE2 ADVANCED inputs, 3-23
ZONE2 BALANCE parameter, 4-2, 4-2
ZONE2 IN parameter, 3-21
ZONE2 IN parameter settings, 3-22
Zones, understanding, 2-28

U
Ultra2-certified, 3-34
understanding the zones, 2-28
USE LAST parameter, 3-14

I-5

PRODUCT REGISTRATION
Please register this product within 15 days of
purchase. To do so, complete and return this card
or register online at www.lexicon.com. Retain the
sales receipt for proof of coverage.

LIMITED WARRANTY
Harman Specialty Group offers the following warranty
on this product:
What is the Duration of this Warranty?
This warranty will remain in effect for three (3) years
from the original date of purchase.

Who is Covered?
This warranty may be enforced by the original purchaser and subsequent owners during the warranty
period, provided the original dated sales receipt or
other proof of warranty coverage is presented at time
of service.

What is Covered?
This warranty covers all defects in material and
workmanship on this product, except as specified
below. The following are not covered:
1. Damage resulting from
A. Accident, misuse, abuse, or neglect.
B. Failure to follow instructions contained in the
user guide.
C. Repair or attempted repair unauthorized by
Harman Specialty Group.
D. Failure to perform recommended periodic
maintenance.
2. Causes other than product defects, including lack
of skill, competence, or experience on the part of
the owner.
3. Damage occurring during any shipment of this
product. Claims for shipping damages must be
made with the carrier.
4. Damage to a unit that has been altered, or on
which the serial number has been defaced, modified, or removed.

What Expenses will Harman Specialty Group
Assume?
Harman Specialty Group will pay all labor and material
expenses for covered items. Payment of shipping
charges is discussed in the next section of the warranty.

How is Service Obtained?
When this product needs service, write, telephone, or
fax Harman Specialty Group to request information
about where the unit should be taken or sent. When
making a written request, please include your name,
complete address, and daytime telephone number;
the product model and serial numbers; and a description of the problem. Do not return the unit to Harman
Specialty Group without prior authorization.

When Shipping a Product for Service . . .
1.

2.
3.

Pay any initial shipping charges, which are the
responsibility of the owner. If necessary repairs are
covered by this warranty, Harman Specialty
Group will pay return shipping charges to any
destination in the United States using the carrier
of our choice.
Pack the unit securely. Package insurance is
strongly recommended.
Include a copy of the original dated sales receipt.
(A copy of the original dated sales receipt must be
presented whenever warranty service is required.)
Do not include accessories such as power cords or
user guides unless instructed to do so.

What are the
Warranties?

Limitations

What Certain Damages are Excluded?
Harman Specialty Group’s liability for a defective
product is limited to repair or replacement of that
product, at our option. Harman Specialty Group shall
not be liable for damages based on inconvenience;
loss of use of the product; loss of time; interrupted
operation; commercial loss; or any other damages,
whether incidental, consequential, or otherwise.

How do State Laws Relate to this Warranty?
Some states do not allow limitations on the duration of
implied warranties and/or the exclusion or limitation
of incidental or consequential damages. As such, the
above limitations may not apply.
This warranty is not enforceable outside of North
America. This warranty provides specific legal rights.
Additional rights may be provided by some states.

Implied

Tel 781-280-0300
Fax 781-280-0490
www.lexicon.com

First Name

Customer Service
Tel 781-280-0300
Fax 781-280-0495 (Sales)
Fax 781-280-0499 (Service)

Mrs.
Married

Ms.
Divorced

Miss
Widowed

Last Name

Company
Title
Mailing Address
City
State
Zip
Telephone Number
Fax Number
Email Address
Product Model
Purchase Date
Version
Serial Number
Where did you purchase this product?
Age
Education
Household Income
Under 18
High School
Under $20,000
18-24
College
$20,000 to $34,999
25-34
Graduate School
$35,000 to $49,000
35-49
Certificate:
$50,000 to $74,999
50-64
$75,000 to $99,000
65+
$100,000+
How did you learn about this product? Choose one:
Friend
Store salesperson
Advertisement
Colleague
Store display
Magazine Article
Teacher
Received as a gift
Own other Lexicon
products
Which of the following were most important in the selection of this product?
Sound
Quality
Value for price
Durability
Features
Brandname
Other:
What are your three favorite magazines?
1.
2.
3.
What are your three favorite websites?
1.
2.
3.
What features would you like to see added to this product in the future?

RV-8 01/06

Any implied warranties, including warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are
limited in duration to the length of this warranty.
Harman Specialty Group
3 Oak Park
Bedford, MA 01730-1413
USA

Mr.
Single

A Harman International Company

Part No. 070-15838 | Rev 1 | 01/06

Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.4 Linearized : No Page Mode : UseNone XMP Toolkit : 3.1-702 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 7.0.5 (Windows) Creator Tool : FrameMaker 7.1 Modify Date : 2006:02:01 12:17:14-05:00 Create Date : 2006:01:31 09:37:16Z Metadata Date : 2006:02:01 12:17:14-05:00 Format : application/pdf Title : untitled Document ID : uuid:0cbbbaf8-0720-4749-90d0-853a0b486ffe Instance ID : uuid:956e1aa1-1471-4d92-a57d-a391442fb933 Has XFA : No Page Count : 262 Creator : FrameMaker 7.1
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Lexicon Rv 8 Owner S Manual

RV-8 to the manual 925c3041-409a-4577-bb1f-3a0a8e8a3ef5

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation